Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
PROJECT MANUAL - SPECIFICATIONS
TP-1 RENOVATIONS & ADDITIONS NEILL’S CREEK BAPTIST CHURCH 4200 NEILL’S CREEK ROAD ANGIER, NORTH CAROLINA 27501 SEARS, HACKNEY, KEENER & WILLIAMS, INC. ARCHITECTURE AND PLANNING 1142 EXECUTIVE CIRCLE, SUITE D CARY, NORTH CAROLINA 27511 TELEPHONE - (919) 467-5703 FAX NO. - (919) 467-2512 CRITERIUM GILES ENGINEERS CONSULTING STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS 7334 CHAPEL HILL ROAD, SUITE 200 RALEIGH, NORTH CAROLINA 27607 TELEPHONE – (919) 465-3801 FAX NO. – (919) 465-3802 D.N. (NICK) KISLEY, P.E. CONSULTING MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL ENGINEER 111 MACKENAN DRIVE, SUITE C CARY, NORTH CAROLINA 27511 TELEPHONE – (919) 460-9091 FAX NO. – (919) 342-7167 FEBRUARY 2018 SHK&W, INC. COPYRIGHT © 2018, SHK&W, INC. ARCHITECTURAL SEAL APPLIES TO SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 1 THROUGH DIVISION 14 INCLUSIVE TC-1 TABLE OF CONTENTS TITLE PAGE TP-1 TABLE OF CONTENTS TC-1 THRU TC-3 INVITATION TO BID 1B-1 THRU 1B-3 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS ITB-1 SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS SIB-1 THRU SIB-3 BID FORM BF-1 THRU BF-3 GENERAL CONDITIONS GC-1 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS SGC-1 THRU SGC-16 DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 1A – Description of the Work 1A – 1 Section 1B – Use of Site 1B – 1 THRU 1B – 2 Section 1C – Sequence of Work 1C – 1 Section 1D – Separate Contracts 1D – 1 Section 1E – Existing Utilities 1E – 1 Section 1F – Unforeseen Conditions 1F – 1 Section 1G – Rock Excavation 1G – 1 THRU 1G – 2 Section 1H – Allowances 1H – 1 Section 1 I – Alternates 1I – 1 Section 1J – Unit Prices 1J – 1 Section 1K – Temporary Heating & Ventilation 1K – 1 Section 1L – Fire Resistance Requirements 1L – 1 THRU 1L – 2 Section 1M – Project Forms 1M – 1 (plus 2 forms) Section 1N – Testing Services 1N – 1 THRU 1N – 4 Section 1O – Temporary Offices & Sanitary Fac. 1O –1 Section 1P – Signs 1P – 1 Section 1Q – Standard Specifications 1Q – 1 Section 1R – Construction Drawings 1R – 1 Section 1S – Record Drawings 1S – 1 Section 1T – Submittals 1T – 1 THRU 1T – 3 Section 1U – Storage and Protection 1U – 1 Section 1V – Products and Substitutions 1V – 1 DIVISION 2 – SITE WORK Section 2A – Demolition 2A – 1 THRU 2A – 5 Section 2B – Earthwork & Site Preparation 2B –1 THRU 2B – 5 Section 2C – Site Drainage 2C – 1 THRU 2C – 2 Section 2D – Shoring 2D – 1 THRU 2D – 2 Section 2E –Ground Termite Control 2E – 1 THRU 2E – 2 DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE Section 3A – Cast-In-Place Concrete 3A – 1 THRU 3A – 5 Section 3B – Gypsum Cement Underlayment 3B – 1 THRU 3B – 2 DIVISION 4 – MASONRY Section 4A – Unit Masonry 4A – 1 THRU 4A – 6 Section 4B – Mortar and Grout 4B – 1 THRU 4B – 2 DIVISION 5 – METALS Section 5A – Structural Steel 5A – 1 THRU 5A – 4 Section 5B – Miscellaneous Iron & Steel 5B – 1 THRU 5B – 3 DIVISION 6 – CARPENTRY Section 6A – Rough Carpentry 6A – 1 THRU 6A – 4 Section 6B – Finish Carpentry 6B – 1 THRU 6B – 3 Section 6C – Millwork 6C – 1 THRU 6C – 3 Section 6D – Prefabricated Wood Trusses 6D – 1 THRU 6D – 3 TC-2 DIVISION 7 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION Section 7A – Granular Fill 7A – 1 Section 7B – Vapor Barrier 7B – 1 Section 7C – Foundation Waterproofing 7C – 1 THRU 7C – 2 Section 7D – Building Insulation 7D – 1 THRU 7D – 3 Section 7E – Weather Barriers 7E – 1 THRU 7E – 2 Section 7F – Caulking and Sealants 7F – 1 THRU 7F – 2 Section 7G – Shingle Roofing 7G – 1 THRU 7G – 2 Section 7H – Flashing and Sheet Metal 7H – 1 THRU 7H – 5 DIVISION 8 – DOORS, WINDOWS AND GLASS Section 8A – Wood Doors 8A – 1 THRU 8A – 2 Section 8B – Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 8B – 1 THRU 8B – 3 Section 8C – Wood Windows 8C – 1 THRU 8C – 2 Section 8D – Glass and Glazing 8D – 1 THRU 8D – 2 Section 8E – Thresholds and Weatherstripping 8E – 1 THRU 8E – 2 Section 8F – Hardware 8F – 1 THRU 8F – 3 Section 8G – Access Doors 8G – 1 Section 8H – Coiling Counter Shutters 8H – 1 THRU 8H - 2 DIVISION 9 – FINISHES Section 9A – Tile Carpeting 9A – 1 THRU 9A – 3 Section 9B – Ceramic Tile 9B – 1 THRU 9B – 4 Section 9C – Engineered Wood Floors 9C – 1 THRU 9C – 2 Section 9D – Resilient Flooring 9D – 1 THRU 9D – 2 Section 9E – Gypsum Wallboard 9E – 1 THRU 9E – 6 Section 9F – Acoustical Lay-in Ceiling 9F – 1 THRU 9F – 3 Section 9G – Painting 9G – 1 THRU 9G – 6 Section 9H – Exterior Stucco 9H – 1 THRU 9H – 2 DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES Section 10A – Folding Partitions 10A – 1 THRU 10A – 2 Section 10B – Audio/Visual Specialties 10B – 1 Section 10C – Fire Extinguishers and Cabinets 10C – 1 THRU 10C -3 Section 10D – Louvers 10D – 1 DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT Section 11A – Appliances 11A–1 THRU 11A – 2 DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS Section 12A – Manufactured Casework 12A–1 THRU 12A – 2 Section 12B – Countertops 12B–1 THRU 12B – 3 DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13–1 This Division is not applicable DIVISION 14 – CONVEYING SYSTEMS 14-1 Section 14A – Hydraulic Elevators 14A – 1 THRU 14A – 7 TC-3 DIVISION 15 – PLUMBING AND HVAC Section 15010 – General Provisions of the Plumbing/HVAC Contracts Section 15051 – Plumbing/HVAC Related Work Section 15100 – Valves Section 15120 – Piping Specialties Section 15140 – Supports and Anchors Section 15250 – Plumbing System Insulation Section 15251 – HVAC System Insulation Section 15401 – Domestic Water Piping System Section 15405 – Soil and Waste Piping System Section 15429 – Plumbing Fixtures Section 15773 – Split System Heat Pumps Section 15841 – Low Pressure Ductwork Section 15932 – Air Outlets and Inlets 15010-1 THRU 15010-4 15051-1 THRU 15051-7 15100-1 THRU 15100-4 15120-1 THRU 15120-4 15140-1 THRU 15140-6 15250-1 THRU 15250-4 15251-1 THRU 15251-6 15401-1 THRU 15401-4 15405-1 THRU 15405-6 15429-1 THRU 15429-6 15773-1 THRU 15773-9 15841-1 THRU 15841-5 15932-1 THRU 15932-4 DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL Section 16010 – General Provisions of the Electrical 16010-1 THRU 16010-5 Section 16110 – Raceways 16110-1 THRU 16110-4 Section 16120 – Wire and Cables (600V and Below) 16120-1 THRU 16120-7 Section 16135 – Electrical Boxes and Fittings 16135-1 THRU 16135-3 Section 16143 – Wiring Devices 16143-1 THRU 16143-3 Section 16170 – Circuit, Motor Disconnects and Enclosed Switches 16170-1 THRU 16170-3 Section 16180 – Overcurrent Protective Devices 16180-1 THRU 16180-4 Section 16450 – Grounding 16450-1 THRU 16450-4 Section 16470 – Panel Boards 16470-1 THRU 16470-3 IB-1 INVITATION TO BID Selected and qualified Contractors are hereby invited to submit a Proposal to Neill’s Creek Baptist Church in its offices at 4200 Neill’s Creek Road, Angier, North Carolina, 27501 for furnishing all labor, materials and supervision necessary to construct designated renovations and additions, all in accordance with Drawings and Specifications entitled “Renovations & Additions, Neill’s reek Baptist Church, 4200 Neill’s Creek Road, Angier, North Carolina 27501" and prepared by Sears, Hackney, Keener & Williams, Inc., Architecture/Planning. Bids shall be submitted on or before Thursday, May 10, 2018. The Site for this project is A Pre-bid conference will be held at the site of the project on Wednesday, May 02, 2018 beginning at 2:00 p.m. All invited bidders and their major subcontractors are strongly encouraged to attend this meeting. Selected portions of the work illustrated on the drawings and described in the technical specifications hereafter shall be awarded in a single prime contract to a properly licensed General Contractor and shall include the construction of a two story addition to Neill’s Creek Baptist Church’s existing Fellowship Hall of Type V-A construction including attached elevator shaft assembly. The Gross area of this addition is approximately 1,100 square feet. The following is a general description of work to be included as a part of this project: Site work shall include the following: 1. Minor Sedimentation and Soil Erosion Control as required to keep adjacent pavement clear of debris. 2. Earthwork (both cut and fill) and site preparation as required for the installation of new footings, foundation walls, floor slabs, and site structures. 3. The extension of new underground utilities to designated existing connection points. Base Bid General Construction shall include trench footings of reinforced concrete, below grade foundation walls of reinforced concrete masonry, above grade exterior walls of concrete masonry with brick masonry veneer and/or insulated wood stud wall systems with brick masonry veneers. Interior walls shall be of concrete masonry or wood stud construction with gypsum board finishes. Floor systems shall be of concrete (slab-on-grade) or wood framed with plywood deck and poured gypsum concrete topping (elevated floors). Roof systems shall be of wood framed construction with plywood deck, felt underlayment, and glass fiber asphalt shingles. Interior floor finishes shall be of prefinished wood, porcelain tile or carpet, walls and ceilings shall be of fire rated gypsum board with painted finishes, casework shall be prefabricated, and counter tops shall be of quartz. Plumbing Work shall include without limitation the furnishing and installation of a new plumbing system for a new church kitchen, complete with hot and cold water piping, waste and vent piping, fixtures and trim – all of which are connected to existing waste (septic tank) and water systems. Include the cutting and patching of existing paving as required to extend and connect new sewer to existing septic system. Heating and Air Conditioning work shall include a complete system of split system heat pumps, low pressure ductwork, registers and grilles, thermostats and controls for new kitchen and classroom. New exhaust systems shall be provided for kitchen hoods. Electrical Work shall include the replacement of the existing obsolete 800A service with a new 800 “MDP” service as well as the replacement of the existing kitchen panel. A new panel will be required for the new kitchen and new classroom. Duke Energy Progress will upgrade existing electrical IB-2 service to 208/120 wye. Upgrade is to be coordinated by contractor and phased to allow existing building to remain in use to the greatest extent possible. Alternate Work, if accepted, shall include the replacement of First Floor Corridor floors, the replacement of First Floor Corridor ceilings, and the replacement of Second Floor Corridor floors. Refer to complete project documents including Drawings and Specifications for complete descriptions of Work to be performed by this Contractor. Proposals shall be made upon the detached form provided therefor. All blank spaces in the form shall be fully filled; numbers shall be stated both in writing and in figures; signatures shall be in long hand. Proposals shall not contain any recapitulation of the work to be done. No oral, telephonic, or telegraphic proposals or modifications will be considered. Proposal shall be delivered in an opaque, sealed envelope marked "Proposal" and shall bear the title of the work, name of the Bidder and the Bidder's license number. Should a Bidder find discrepancies in, or omissions from, the drawings, specifications, or bidding documents, or should he be in doubt as to their meaning and intent, he should notify at once the Architect who will send a written instruction or "Addendum" to all Bidders; neither the Owner nor the Architect will be responsible for any oral instructions or representations. Acknowledgement of any Addenda received during the time of bidding shall be noted on the Proposal in the spaces provided thereon. In the closing of a contract, any Addenda issued shall become a part of the contract. The aggregate time limit for completion of Base Bid work shall total not more than one-hundred twenty (120) calendar days from the date of receipt of official Notice to Proceed. Extensions of time will be authorized only as provided for in the General Conditions. In as much as the to complete the project within the time limit stated will result in substantial injury to the Owner, and as actual damages arising from such failure cannot be calculated with any degree of certainty, it is hereby agreed that the contractor causing a delay shall pay to the Owner as liquidated damages for such delay, and not as a penalty, Five Hundred and no/100 Dollars ($500.00) for each and every calendar day after the specified completion date, until such substantial completion shall have been fully accomplished. This provision for liquidated damages shall in no manner affect the Owner’s rights to terminate the contract as provided in the General Conditions or elsewhere in the Contract Documents; and the Owner’s exercise of right to terminate shall not release the Contractor from his obligations to pay said liquidated damages in the amounts hereinafter set out. Said liquidated damages shall be payable in addition to any excess expenses or costs payable by the Contractor under said General Conditions, and shall not include the recovery of damages by the Owner under provisions of the Contract except for Contractor’s delays. Three (3) sets of plans and specifications may be obtained by those qualified and invited to bid from the office of Sears, Hackney, Keener and Williams, Inc, Architecture - Planning, 1142 Executive Circle, Cary, N. C. 27511, by sending a plan deposit in the amount of $ 100.00. The full deposit will be returned to those making a bonafide bid, provided the complete documents are returned to the Architects in good condition within ten (10) days after the date for receipt of bids. Failure to meet these conditions will result in forfeiture of the Plan Deposit to the Architects in payment for expenses involved. Additional complete sets may be had by those qualified to bid and by material suppliers and subcontractors upon the non-refundable payment of $100.00 per set for the cost of reproduction and mailing. IB-3 No bid may be withdrawn after the scheduled closing time for the receipt of Bids for a period of ninety (90) days. The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all Bids or accept any bid he deems to be in the best interest of the Owner. A. G. C. – Charlotte, Triad, and Raleigh F.W. Dodge - Raleigh, Greensboro This the 2nd day of April , 2018. Sears, Hackney, Keener, & Williams, Inc. Architecture/Planning 1142 Executive Circle Cary, North Carolina 27511 Instructions to Bidders - 1 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS AIA Document A701, "Instructions to Bidders", 1987 Edition, is included by reference and is hereby made a part of the bidding documents to the same extent as if bound herein, subject to modifications contained in the Supplement to Instructions to Bidders. Copies of AIA Document A701 are on file in the office of the Architect and are available to contractors upon request. SIB-1 SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS The Supplementary Instructions to Bidders contains modifications of and additions to AIA Document A701, Instructions To Bidders, 1987 Edition, and supersedes them only whenever they are in conflict. ITEM 1: Refer to Article 2, Bidder’s Representations. Amend subparagraph 2.1.3 to include the provision that a Pre-Bid Conference will be held at the project site on Wednesday, May 02 beginning at 2:00 p.m. All invited bidders and their major subcontractors are strongly encouraged to attend this meeting. ITEM 2: Refer to Article 2, Bidder's Representations. Add the following subparagraphs: 2.1.5 The Bidder has sufficient manpower to prosecute the work within the time limit established for this project. 2.1.6 The Bidder and his Subcontractors are properly licensed in the State of North Carolina to perform the work for which his Bid is submitted. ITEM 3: Refer to Article 3, Bidding Documents. Add the following subparagraphs to Paragraph 3.2, Interpretation or Correction of Bidding Documents: "3.2.4 If any bidder is in doubt as to the true meaning of any part of the Documents, he shall request an interpretation from the Architect. Requests shall be made in time to allow the Architect to evaluate the request and to issue a formal written clarification no later than five (5) working days prior to scheduled bid date. "3.2.5 Whenever there are discrepancies within the Drawings, or between the Drawings and Specifications, or conflicts within the Specifications, and such discrepancy is not called to the Architect's attention in time to permit clarification by Addendum, the bidder shall base his bid upon providing the better quality or greater quantity of work or material called for, shall submit a written statement with his proposal noting such discrepancies, and shall so furnish and install such better quality or greater quantity unless otherwise ordered in writing." Add the following to Subparagraph 3.3.2 under Paragraph 3.3, Substitutions: "It shall not be incumbent upon the Owner and/or the Architect to consider any items submitted for substitution except for those items which, in their judgment, merit consideration. All requests for substitutions by Sub-bidders or Material Suppliers will be considered only when made through a qualified bidder and when submitted with sufficient information to evaluate the product/materials being submitted. All requests shall comply with the following: 1. The equipment and/or product submitted must be equal in all ways to the specified equipment or product. The Architect will make the final decision on equality. 2. The proposer of the substitution of equipment or products shall identify any delay to the schedule for work, inspections, or tests which might result from the use of the proposed substitution." SIB-2 Add the following to Subparagraph 3.3.4: "The Owner and the Architect will consider a formal request for substitution of products in place of those specified prior to the signing of the Owner/Contractor agreement only. Review of proposed substitutions after the Contract has been signed will be at the discretion of the Architect." ITEM 4: Refer to Article 4, Bidding Procedures. Add the following subparagraphs to Paragraph 4.2, Bid Security: "4.2.4 Bids shall be accompanied by a cash deposit or a certified check drawn on and certified by a bank or trust company insured by the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation, in an amount not less than 5 percent of the bid, or in lieu thereof, a bidder may offer a bid bond (executed by a corporate surety licensed under the laws of North Carolina to execute such bond on AIA Document A310) of 5 percent of bid. Should the bidder fail or refuse to enter into a Contract with the Owner within ten calendar days of receipt of the contract for signature, or should the Bidder fail or refuse to furnish the Performance and Labor and Material Payment Bonds, then the bid security shall be forfeited to the Owner." "4.2.5 Certified checks and/or Bid Bonds shall be pinned or clipped to the Proposal Form." ITEM 5: Refer to Article 6, Post Bid Information. Change subparagraph 6.3.1 to read as follows: "6.3.1 The Bidder shall, within seven (7) days following receipt of bids, furnish to the Owner through the Architect in writing: .1 a designation of the Work to be performed with the Bidder's own forces; .2 names of the manufacturers, products and the suppliers of principal items or systems of materials and equipment proposed for the Work; and .3 names of persons or entities (including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design) proposed for the principal portions of the Work." ITEM 6: Refer to Article 7, Performance Bond and Payment Bond. Change subparagraphs 7.1.1 and 7.1.2 to read as follows: "7.1.1 The Bidder shall furnish bonds covering the faithful performance of the contract and payment of all obligations arising thereunder. Bonds may be secured through the Bidder's usual sources. "7.1.2 The cost of Performance and Payment Bonds shall be included in the Bid." Change subparagraph 7.2.2 to read as follows: "7.2.2 The form of Performance Bond and Labor and Material Payment Bond shall be A.I.A. document A311 - Performance Bond and Labor and Material Payment Bond. Both bonds shall be written in the amount of the Contract Sum." SIB-3 ITEM 7: Refer to Article 8, Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor. Change subparagraph 8.1.1 to read as follows: “8.1.1 The Agreement for the Work will be written on A.I.A. Document A101, Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor Where the Basis of Payment Is a Stipulated Sum – 1987 Edition.” ITEM 8: Add Article 9, Supplementary Instructions, containing the following provisions: 9.1 Bid Forms 9.1.1 Bid Proposals shall be submitted only on those forms contained within the bidding documents or on duplicate copies of those forms obtained from the Architect. 9.2 Bid Security 9.2.1 Bid Proposal shall be accompanied by a Bid Security in the amount of 5% of the Bid. Bid guarantee may be in cash, or certified check drawn on and certified by a bank or trust company insured by the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation, or in lieu thereof a Bidder may file a bid bond executed by a corporate surety licensed under the laws of North Carolina to execute such bond, conditioned that the Surety will upon demand forthwith make payments to the Obligee upon said bond if the Bidder fails to execute the contract in accordance with the Bid Bond. 9.3 Performance Bond and Payment Bond 9.3.1 A Performance Bond and Labor and Material Payment Bond shall be required of each prime contractor by the Owner in the full amount of the contract price. Required Bonds shall be as specified herein. No other forms of Performance and/or Payment Bond will be accepted. The cost of these bonds shall be borne by the Contractor. 9.4 Damages 9.4.1 Time is of the essence to this contract, and the failure of this Prime Contractor to complete his portion of the work within the maximum time shall be deemed to be a material breach. This Contractor recognizes that his failure to complete the work within the maximum time limit established for this work will cause the Owner to incur substantial damages and loss of revenue resulting from the inability to utilize the work to be constructed. 9.5 Contract Time 9.5.1 This Contractor acknowledges that the "maximum time" as referred to in this paragraph for Base Bid Work and any or all Alternates is defined as One Hundred and Sixty (160) calendar days from the Date of Notice To Proceed with the project and that this time period takes into consideration such factors including, but not limited to, the time required by the Contractor to obtain building permits and mobilize as well as the time required to complete the work under weather conditions normal for the time of year during which the work will be performed. BF - 1 FORM OF PROPOSAL - SINGLE-PRIME CONTRACT , 2018 Neill’s Creek Baptist Church 4200 Neill’s Creek Road Angier, North Carolina 27501 Gentlemen: Having carefully examined the Invitation to Bid, Instructions to Bidders, Supplementary Instructions to Bidders, the General Conditions, the Supplementary General Conditions, the Specifications, and the Drawings entitled " Renovations & Additions, Neill’s reek Baptist Church, 4200 Neill’s Creek Road, Angier, North Carolina 27501" and having further examined the building site, and conditions affecting the work, the undersigned hereby proposes to furnish all labor and materials and supervision called for by them for the items and sums indicated below: BASE BID: ($ ) in the manner and form as provided by the following enumerated drawings, specifications and documents: INVITATION TO BID; INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS; SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS; GENERAL CONDITIONS; SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS; PERFORMANCE BOND; PAYMENT BOND; SALES TAX FORMS; SPECIFICATIONS (includes all Sections of all Divisions) DIVISION 1-GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, DIVISION 2-SITE WORK, DIVISION 3-CONCRETE, DIVISION 4-MASONRY, DIVISION 5-METALS, DIVISION 6-CARPENTRY, DIVISION 7-THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION, DIVISION 8-DOORS, WINDOWS, AND GLASS, DIVISION 9-FINISHES, DIVISION 10-SPECIALTIES, DIVISION 11-EQUIPMENT, DIVISION 12-FURNISHINGS, DIVISION 13-SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION, DIVISION 14-CONVEYING SYSTEMS, DIVISION 15- MECHANICAL, DIVISION 16-ELECTRICAL; PROJECT DRAWINGS C-100 THRU C-103 INCLUSIVE, A-100 THRU A-104 INCLUSIVE, A-201 and A-202, A-300, A-400 AND A-401, A- 600, A-700, S1.0 THRU S4.0 INCLUSIVE, P-100, M-100, E-100 THRU E-300 INCLUSIVE, and all ADDENDA issued through date of proposal. ALTERNATES Refer to Section 1I – Alternates. If ADD Alternate No. G-1 is accepted as described in Section 1I – Alternates, add the sum of _________________________________ Dollars ($_________) Refer to Section 1I – Alternates. If ADD Alternate No. G-2 is accepted as described in Section 1I – Alternates, add the sum of _________________________________ Dollars ($_________) Refer to Section 1I – Alternates. If ADD Alternate No. G-1 is accepted as described in Section 1I – Alternates, add the sum of _________________________________ Dollars ($_________) BF - 2 UNIT PRICES: Refer to Section 1J Unit Prices. If rock is encountered as defined in Section 1G-Rock Excavation, the undersigned agrees to remove rock in open excavation for the sum of _________________________________ Dollars ($_________) per cubic yard and rock in trench excavation for the sum of _________________________________ Dollars ($_________) per cubic yard. The Undersigned agrees, that if awarded the Contact, to subcontract the work as follows: GENERAL CONSTRUCTION WORK: NAME: ADDRESS: CITY, STATE: TELEPHONE: LICENSE NO.: PLUMBING WORK: NAME: ADDRESS: CITY, STATE: TELEPHONE: LICENSE NO.: HVAC WORK: NAME: ADDRESS: CITY, STATE: TELEPHONE: LICENSE NO.: ELECTRICAL WORK: NAME: ADDRESS: CITY, STATE: TELEPHONE: LICENSE NO.: BF - 3 The Undersigned agrees, that if awarded the contract, to complete Base Bid Work and any or all Alternates within One Hundred and Sixty (160) calendar days from Date of Notice to Proceed and that this time period takes into consideration such factors including but not limited to the time required to obtain permits, mobilize and the time required to complete the work under weather conditions normal for the time of year during which the work will be performed. For each calendar day in excess of the contract completion time, the undersigned agrees to pay as liquidated damages the sum of One Thousand Dollars ($1,000) for each consecutive calendar day until his work is substantially complete as provided in the contract documents. If written notice of the acceptance of this Bid is mailed, telegraphed, or delivered to the Undersigned within thirty (30) calendar days after the date for opening of Bids or at any time thereafter before this bid is withdrawn, the Undersigned will, within ten (10) calendar days after the date of such mailing, telegraphing, or delivery of such notice, execute and deliver AIA Document A-101 "Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor – 1987 Edition", and furnish Performance and Labor and Material Payment Bonds, in accordance with the specifications and Bid as accepted. The Undersigned declares that he is a duly licensed Contractor in the State of North Carolina and that his license number is . The receipt of the following Addenda is acknowledged: Addendum No. Dated ,2018 Addendum No. Dated ,2018 Addendum No. Dated ,2018 Yours very truly, Individual or Firm Name By: Title: Business Address General Conditions - 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction", AIA Document A201, 1987 Edition, is included by reference and is hereby made a part of the Contract, with the modifications listed under Supplementary General Conditions. Copies of A.I.A. Document A201 are on file in the office of the Architect and are available upon request. SGC-1 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS The following supplements modify, change, delete from or add to the "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction," AIA Document A201, 1987 Edition. Where any article of the General Conditions is modified or any Paragraph, Subparagraph or Clause thereof is modified or deleted by these Supplementary Conditions, the unaltered provisions of that Article, Paragraph, Subparagraph or Clause shall remain in full force and effect. ARTICLE 1 - GENERAL PROVISIONS 1.1 BASIC DEFINITIONS Delete the last sentence of Subparagraph 1.1.1 and substitute the following: “The Contract Documents include the bid Form, all sample forms contained within Addenda and/or the Project Manual, and all Addenda issued prior to Contract execution. Add the following to Subparagraphs 1.1.3- the Work and 1.1.4- the Project: “Descriptions of the “Work” are included in Division 1 – General Requirements of the Technical Specifications, Section 1A – Description of the Work. Add the following to Subparagraph 1.1.5: "Plumbing, Mechanical, and Electrical Drawings are diagrammatic only. Actual work shall be installed in accordance with measurements obtained at job site, coordination with other trades as necessary, and shop drawing requirements." 1.2 EXECUTION, CORRELATION AND INTENT Delete Subparagraph 1.2.1 in its entirety and substitute the following: "1.2.1 The Contract Documents shall be signed in triplicate by the Owner and Contractor as provided in the Agreement. If either the Owner or Contractor or both do not sign all the Contract Documents, the Architect shall identify such unsigned Documents upon request." Add the following to Subparagraph 1.2.3: "All work shall conform to the Contract Documents. No significant change therefrom shall be made without prior written authorization by the Owner. Where only part of the work is indicated, similar parts shall be considered repetition. When any detail is shown and the components therefore are fully described, similar details shall be construed to require equal materials and construction. Whenever there are discrepancies between Drawings, or between the Drawings and Specifications, or conflicts within the Specifications, the Contractor shall furnish and install the better quality or greater quantity unless otherwise ordered in writing. Items shown on the Drawings and not mentioned in the Specifications shall be of like effect as if shown or mentioned in both. Should the Specifications and Drawings fail to particularly describe a product or material shown to be used in any place, the Contractor shall furnish the product that would normally be used in this place to produce first quality finished work subject to the Architect's approval." Add the following Sub-subparagraph 1.2.3.1 to Subparagraph 1.2.3: SGC-2 "1.2.3.1 The Contractor acknowledges and warrants that he has closely examined all of the Contract Documents, that they are suitable and sufficient to enable the Contractor to complete the Work in a timely manner for the Contract Sum, and that they include all work, whether shown or described, which may reasonably be inferred to be required or necessary for the completion of the Work in full compliance with all applicable codes, laws, ordinances and regulations." Add the following to Subparagraph 1.2.4: "Such separations shall not operate to make the Architect an arbiter to establish limits of work between Subcontractors or between Contractor and Subcontractor. Add the following Sub-subparagraph 1.2.5.1 and 1.2.5.2 to 1.2.5: "1.2.5.1 The words "satisfactory", "submitted", "reported", and similar words and phrases shall be presumed to be followed by "to the Architect". The word "install" shall mean unload, unpack, assemble, fabricate, erect, connect, adjust and test except where otherwise specified. The word "provide" means both furnishing and installing of items or materials, complete and ready for the intended use or operation. 1.2.5.2 "Or Approved Equal" and "Equal To" shall mean products by manufacturers other than those described or listed in the Contract Documents and Addenda which the Contractor has submitted for substitution prior to bid and has proven to be equal to those specified and which may be incorporated into the Work after review and concurrence by the Architect and acceptance by the Owner." ARTICLE 2 - OWNER 2.1 DEFINITION Add the following subparagraph 2.1.3: "2.1.3 The Owner is Neill’s Creek Baptist Church, 4200 Neill’s Creek Road, Angier, North Carolina 27501” 2.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK Delete Subparagraph 2.3.1 in its entirety and substitute the following: "2.3.1 If the Contractor fails to correct Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents as required by Paragraph 12.2 or persistently fails to carry out Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Owner, without additional charge or penalty, by written order signed personally or by an agent specifically so empowered by the Owner in writing, may order the Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, the right of the Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to a duty on the part of the Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of the Contractor or any other person or entity, except to the extent required by Subparagraph 6.1.3." SGC-3 ARTICLE 3 - CONTRACTOR 3.2 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FIELD CONDITIONS BY CONTRACTOR Delete Subparagraph 3.2.1 in its entirety and substitute the following: "3.2.1 The Contractor shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents with each other and with information furnished by the Owner pursuant to Subparagraph 2.2.2 and shall, before proceeding with the Work, at once report in writing to the Architect errors, inconsistencies or omissions discovered. The Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner or Architect for damage resulting from errors, inconsistencies or omissions in the Contract Documents unless the Contractor recognized such error, inconsistency or omission and knowingly failed to report it to the Architect. If the Contractor performs any construction activity knowing it involves a recognized error, inconsistency or omission in the Contract Documents without such notice to the Architect, the Contractor shall assume responsibility for such performance and shall bear all costs for correction." Add the following to Subparagraph 3.2.2: "The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for accuracy of measurements obtained at the site. No extra compensation will be allowed because of differences between actual measurements and dimensions indicated on the Drawings, nor for the Contractor's failure to coordinate work with actual field measurements." 3.3 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES Add the following Subparagraph 3.3.1.1 and 3.3.1.2 to subparagraph 3.3.1 “3.3.1.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for supervising and expediting the work of his contract with a full time on-site job superintendent. Said individual shall be on-site at all times when work is in progress. Said individual shall be a full time employee of the Contractor, not a sub-contract consultant, consultant, nor contract employee. The job superintendent shall be given enough support staff to insure that his ongoing site presence can be maintained while errands to secure materials etc. are carried out by others and deliveries to site are received by others." “3.3.1.2 Any instructions that the Architect may issue to the Contractor shall be adjudged an interpretation of the requirements of the Contract Documents and not an act of Supervision. The Architect has no authority and accepts no responsibility, either direct or implied, to direct and superintend the work. The Contractor shall insure that all suppliers and Subcontractors adhere to the requirements of the Contract Documents and that they order materials on time, taking into account the current market and delivery conditions, and that they provide both labor and materials on time." Delete Subparagraph 3.3.4 in its entirety and substitute the following: "3.3.4 The Contractor shall be responsible for the inspection of both existing conditions at the beginning of the project as well as portions of work already performed under this contract by the Contractor and/or his subcontractors to determine that such portions are in proper condition to receive subsequent work." SGC-4 “3.3.5 As soon as the foundations for the structure are established, the General Contractor shall furnish to the Owner a foundation survey prepared by a properly licensed land surveyor. The foundation survey shall confirm the proper location of the structure on the site.” 3.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS Revise subparagraph 3.4.1 to include the following provisions: "The Contractor shall be provided temporary water and power at existing sources of supply. Any modification of connections or special requirements other than those available on site shall be the Contractor’s responsibility. All sources shall be returned to original state at completion unless specifically directed otherswise.” Add the following Subparagraph 3.4.3 to Paragraph 3.4: "3.4.3 The Contractor has the responsibility to insure that all product suppliers and Subcontractors adhere to the Contract Documents and that they order products on time, taking into account the current market and delivery conditions, and that they provide products on time. The Contractor shall keep the Architect informed as to the availability of all specified materials and equipment and shall advise him promptly, in writing, of all material and equipment that may not be obtainable, or the availability of which may be delayed, for the purposes of the Contract, whether due to conditions of the market or other limiting or governing factors." 3.5 WARRANTY Add the following to Subparagraph 3.5.1: "The words 'guarantee' and 'warranty' shall mean 'An agreement by which the maker, installer, or both insures to the Owner the integrity of a product or system and the good faith of the maker, installer or both requiring that for the term of the agreement, the maker, installer or both will be responsible for the material and labor required to repair a defective product or system or remove and install in its place a non-defective product or system.' A written instrument addressed to the Owner and signed by the maker and/or installer entitled 'guarantee', 'guaranty', or 'warranty' will be acceptable. All warranties shall be delivered to the Architect upon completion of the Project and before or with the submission of the Request for Final Payment." Add the following Subparagraph 3.5.2 and 3.5.3: "3.5.2 No substitutions of materials, products, or manufacturers will be considered after the execution of Contract except under one or more of the following circumstances: 1. The substitution is required for compliance with subsequent interpretations of code or insurance requirements. 2. The specified product is unavailable through no fault of the Contractor. 3. The manufacturer or fabricator refuses to certify or guarantee the specified product as required. SGC-5 4. Subsequent information reveals that the specified product is unable to perform properly or to fit in the designated space. 5. The proposed substitute is acceptable to the Owner and will result in a reduction in the cost of the Work. Any reduced cost resulting from an approved substitution will be shared equally by the Contractor and the Owner. "3.5.3 The Contractor shall bear all unforeseen expenses resulting from substitutions proposed by the Contractor under Item No. 5 in sub-para. 3.5.2.5 including the cost of work in general, structural, plumbing, mechanical and electrical trades required due to the substitution and the cost of any Architect's services made necessary by the substitution." 3.6 TAXES “3.6.2 The Owner is entitled to a refund from the State of North Carolina for all sales taxes paid in conjunction with the work of this project. The Prime Contractor and each Subcontractor (filed through the Prime Contractor) shall furnish the Owner with separate documentary proof of payment of State Sales and Use Tax, and County Sales and Use Tax if applicable, in order that the Owner may obtain a refund. These separate documents shall be certified by the Prime Contractor and shall list each of his suppliers by name and the amount of Sales and Use Tax taxes paid to and by each of them and the total amounts of Sales and Use Taxes paid. The proof shall be submitted each month with the Contractor’s Application for Payment. After the first proof is submitted, each subsequent proof shall not contain sales and use taxes contained in previous submissions of proof. Sales Tax information should be submitted in accordance with the “Sales Tax Report” contained herein. 3.7 PERMITS, FEES AND NOTICES Add the following to Subparagraph 3.7.2: "If the Contractor fails to give such notices, he shall be liable for and shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and Architect against any and all resulting fines, penalties, judgements or damages, including reasonable attorneys fees, imposed on or incurred by the parties indemnified, as a result of such failure by the Contractor." Add the following Sub-subparagraph 3.7.2.1 to Subparagraph 3.7.2: "3.7.2.1 The Contractor, his Subcontractors and all trades people working on the project who are required by statute to be licensed shall have a current license in good standing before entering the premises." 3.10 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE Add the following Subparagraphs 3.10.4, 3.10.5, and 3.10.6 to paragraph 3.10. “3.10.4 The Contractor shall provide any and all information with respect to the progress of the Work and scheduling as the Architect or Owner may reasonably require.” “3.10.5 Should any monthly revision of any Progress Schedule show that the Contractor is behind so that without increasing his rate of performance he will not complete any activity, the late completion of which could delay Substantial Completion of the Work, the Owner shall be entitled to withhold from the next Progress Payment due the Contractor an amount not exceeding the amount the Owner would be entitled to in Liquidated Damages, should the SGC-6 Contractor delay his Substantial Completion by the same number of days as he is behind, as shown in the most recent revision to the Progress Schedule. If, subsequently, the Contractor's progress is such that the anticipated delay no longer exists, the Owner will pay with the Progress Payment next due to the Contractor such amounts as have been withheld in accordance with this paragraph.” “3.10.6 The responsibility for construction planning and the effective efficient implementation of such, or the converse, to meet the Contract Completion Date, or authorized appropriate extension thereof, is the total responsibility of the Contractor, and such responsibility shall not transfer to the Owner or Architect. Preparation of the original Progress Schedule and subsequent modifications thereto, by the Contractor, shall not operate to imply the agreement of the Owner or Architect to the Contractor's planned procedures, coordination, critical path scheduling, etc., as being either appropriate or reasonable. The Contractor represents that this schedule reflects all of his activities which impact, limit or otherwise affect the time of completion of any other of his activities or Final Completion of the Work and that all of the activities of others which impact, limit or otherwise affect the start, duration or completion of his activities will also be shown. The Contractor further represents that he can, and agrees that he shall, complete each activity within the time shown and by the Completion Date that is shown for that activity. Time is of the essence with respect to each such activity and the Completion Date." 3.11 DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT THE SITE Add the following Subparagraph 3.11.2: "3.11.2 The Contractor shall record on the Record Drawings all changes and selections made during construction and shall locate by dimensions showing actual field measurements of all major items which will be concealed in the completed work. These items shall include underground piping and conduit beneath slabs-on-grade (or basement slabs), underground site utilities such as pipe, conduit, etc., and items above hard ceilings such as duct, pipe, etc." 3.12 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES Add the following to Subparagraph 3.12.5: "Requirements regarding submittal of Shop Drawings, Samples, and related required submittals are specified in Division One of the Specifications." 3.13 USE OF SITE Add the following Subparagraph 3.13.2 to Paragraph 3.13: "3.13.2 The Contractor shall have use of the site on the date stipulated in the Notice To Proceed, subject to the condition that all insurance required of the Contractor is in full force and effect." 3.14 CUTTING AND PATCHING Add the following Subparagraphs 3.14.3, 3.14.4, and 3.14.5 to Paragraph 3.14: “3.14.3 The Mechanical, Electrical, and Plumbing trades shall supply and shall set sleeves SGC-7 for piping and attachments for hangers as the building construction or renovation progresses.” “3.14.4 All patching work unless otherwise noted, shall be done by the General Contractor. Patches in finish surfaces shall match the adjacent surfaces in material, finish, and quality. The General Contractor shall finish tight against all openings (ductwork, piping, conduit, etc.) to make it smoke tight. Any U.L. rated fire seal material and flanges as required by code and/or the Contract Documents shall be applied and installed by the Mechanical, Plumbing, or Electrical trade as applicable. Exact size and location of U.L. rated penetrations is critical; careful coordination shall be required by all trades.” “3.14.5 The General Contractor shall remove ceilings and re-install as required for access and installation of work of other trades except for mechanical and/or electrical items attached to ceiling. The mechanical and/or electrical subcontractor respectively shall remove, and where required, re-install all mechanical and/or electrical items which are located in or above the ceiling.” 3.15 CLEANING UP Add the following Subparagraph 3.15.3 to Paragraph 3.15. "3.15.3 Removal of debris and waste material shall be performed a minimum of one time daily and additionally as required to keep debris and waste from stockpiling and creating a potential fire or other safety hazard." ARTICLE 4 - ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 4.1 ARCHITECT Add the following to Subparagraph 4.1.1: "The Architect as referred to in these documents is Sears, Hackney, Keener & Williams, Inc., 1142 Executive Circle, Cary, North Carolina 27511. The term "Architect" shall include the Architect's consultants and staff for all disciplines including structural, mechanical, plumbing, electrical, etc." 4.2 ARCHITECT'S ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT Add the following to Subparagraph 4.2.7: "The Architect will review each of the Contractor's shop drawings, samples and submittals one initial time and, should resubmittal be required, one additional time to verify that the reasons for resubmittal have been addressed by the Contractor and corrections made. Should additional resubmittals be required, the Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for all costs incurred including the cost of the Architect's services made necessary to review such additional resubmittals." 4.3 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES Delete Subparagraph 4.3.3 in its entirety and substitute the following: "4.3.3 Claims by either party must be made within 21 days after occurrence of the event giving rise to such claim or within 21 days after the claimant first recognizes the condition giving rise to the claim, whichever is later. Claims must be made by written notice. Any claim implemented by Change Order shall represent the entire claim for that event and no SGC-8 additional claims shall be made by either party to the Contract after the claim has been implemented by Change Order." Delete Subparagraph 4.3.7 in its entirety and substitute the following: "4.3.7 Claims For Additional Cost. If the Contractor wishes to make Claim for an increase in the Contract Sum, written notice as provided herein shall be given and approval of the Owner shall be secured before proceeding to execute the Work. Prior notice is not required for Claims relating to an emergency endangering life or property arising under Paragraph 10.3. If the Contractor believes additional cost is involved for reasons including but not limited to (1) a written interpretation from the Architect, (2) an order by the Owner to stop the Work where the Contractor was not at fault, (3) a written order for a minor change in the Work issued by the Architect, (4) failure of payment by the Owner, (5) termination of the Contract by the Owner, (6) Owner's suspension of the work or (7) other reasonable grounds, Claim shall be filed in accordance with the procedure established herein." Add the following to Sub-Subparagraph 4.3.7.1: “4.3.7.1 Except for suspensions of the entire project ordered by the Owner, the Architect may delay the commencement of the work, or any part thereof, if the Architect shall deem it for the best interest of the Owner so to do. The contractor shall have no claims of damages on account of such delay, or on account of any delay on the part of the Owner in performing any work or furnishing any materials to the Contractor, or due to extra work required, but he shall be entitled to so much additional time in which to complete the whole or any portion of the work required under this contract as the Architect shall certify in writing to be just. The Architect shall forthwith notify the Contractor in writing of such determination. Such additional time shall be the sole and exclusive remedy for any delay caused by the Owner, except for suspensions of the entire project ordered by the Owner. The Contractor shall not have claim for damages on account of any delay on the part of another contractor.” Add the following to Sub-Subparagraph 4.3.8.2: "Time extensions will not be granted for rain, wind, ice, snow, extreme temperature, or other natural phenomena of normal intensity for the locality where the Work is located. For the purpose of determining the extent of delay attributable to unusual weather phenomena, National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration National Weather Service records of climatic conditions during the same time interval for the previous five years for the locality of the Work shall be used to determine the effect of weather on the progress of the Work." ARTICLE 5 - SUBCONTRACTORS 5.2 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE WORK. Add the following to Subparagraph 5.2.1: "The listing required by this subparagraph shall be submitted to the Architect not later than thirty (30) days from the Receipt of Bids. This list shall include the names of manufacturers, suppliers, and installers proposed for each of the products, equipment, and materials to be incorporated into the project, and shall identify any deviations from the listing required following notification of Contract Award and state the reasons therefore. The Contractor shall furnish upon request adequate data on any named entity on the list in order to permit the Architect and Owner to conduct a proper evaluation. Failure to object to a manufacturer shall not constitute a wavier of any of the requirements of the Contract Documents, and all products furnished by the listed manufacturer must conform to such requirements." SGC-9 5.3 SUBCONTRACTURAL RELATIONS Add the following to Subparagraph 5.3.1" "The division of these Specifications into Sections is not intended to control the Contractor in dividing the work among Subcontractors or to limit the scope of work performed by any trade under a given section. The Architect will not undertake to settle any differences between the Contractor and his Subcontractors as to inclusion of work or material items. It shall be the Contractor's entire responsibility for the proper coordination and completion of all the work described in these Specifications whether performed by the Contractor or Subcontractors, if any." ARTICLE 6 - CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 6.1 OWNER'S RIGHT TO PERFORM CONSTRUCTION AND TO AWARD SEPARATE CONTRACTS. Add the following to Subparagraph 6.1.2: "The term Contractor or Prime Contractor(s) when used in the Contract Documents shall mean each Contractor who executes a separate Owner/Contractor Agreement.” 6.2 MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY Add the following Sub-Subparagraph 6.2.1.1 and 6.2.1.2 to Subparagraph 6.2.1: "6.2.1.1 The General Contractor shall make application, coordinate, secure and pay for all required building permits and other permits and governmental fees, licenses and inspections necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work which are customarily secured after execution of the Contract and which are legally required when bids are received or negotiations concluded. “The General Contractor shall coordinate the securing of all final certificates of inspection, the Certificate of Occupancy, and other inspections that may be required by authorities having jurisdiction over the work. He shall deliver same to the Architect upon completion of the work.” “6.2.1.2 The General Contractor's superintendent shall be on-site at all times when the work of any Subcontractor is in progress.” ARTICLE 7 – CHANGES IN THE WORK 7.3 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES Add the following Sub-Subparagraph 7.3.6.6 to Subparagraph 7.3.6: “7.3.6.6. Overhead and Profit combined not to exceed 15% of actual costs for work performed by the Contractor’s own forces or 10% for work performed by Subcontractors. Subcontractor’s overhead and profit combined shall not exceed 15% of actual costs.” SGC-10 ARTICLE 8 - TIME 8.2 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION Add the following to Subparagraph 8.2.3: "If the progress or completion of the Work is delayed by any fault, neglect, act or failure to act on the part of the Contractor, the Contractor shall in addition to all of the other obligations imposed by this Contract and by law upon the contractor, and at no cost or expense to the Owner, take such actions, including but not limited to, increasing manpower, and working such overtime as may be necessary to make up for all time lost and to avoid delay in the progress and the completion of the work." 8.3 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME Add the following Sub-Subparagraph 8.3.1.1 to Subparagraph 8.3.1: “8.3.1.1 No claim for extension of time shall be made or entertained on the basis of rejection of work in place or of submittals found to be in non-conformance to the Contract Documents." Add the following Subparagraph 8.3.4: "8.3.4 The Contractor will pay for the cost of the Architect's services caused by delays beyond the Contract Completion Date. These costs shall be in addition to liquidated damages. Such payment shall be withheld from amounts owed to the Contractor by the Owner and should the cost of the Architect's services exceed the amounts owed by the Owner, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner." ARTICLE 9 - PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 9.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES Add the following Sub-Subparagraphs 9.2.1.1, 9.2.1.2, 9.2.1.3, and 9.2.1.4 to Subparagraph 9.2.1: "9.2.1.1 In submitting the Schedule of Values, the Contractor shall be prepared to substantiate any line items in the Schedule of Values that may be questioned by the Architect. Items in question shall be substantiated by such data as may be required by the Architect to establish the reasonableness of the value assigned to the labor and/or materials for that item.” “9.2.1.2 At the time of submitting the Schedule of Values, the Contractor shall also submit an estimate of the amount of each Request for Payment for the Owner's use in planning cash flow for the project. It is understood that actual amounts requested by the Requests for Payment may not agree with this estimate.” “9.2.1.3 The Schedule of Values shall be in sufficient detail to show the work of each section of the Specifications and each line item shall further include a separate listing for Total Cost of Labor and Total Cost of Materials and Equipment.” “9.2.1.4 The Schedule of Values shall be submitted on the same AIA forms and in the identical format as will be used for Applications for Payment. The Schedule of Values shall be so arranged that each phase of the project is scheduled separately with line items for each of the various portions of the Work which constitute that phase." 9.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT SGC-11 Add the following Sub-Subparagraphs 9.3.1.3, 9.3.1.4, 9.3.1.5, and 9.3.1.6 to Subparagraph 9.3.1: "9.3.1.3 Requests for Payment and required attachments shall be submitted in four (4) copies (unless otherwise directed) to the Architect on AIA Document G702 and G703.” “9.3.1.4 Unless otherwise agreed between the Owner and Contractor, the Contractor shall submit his requests for payment not later than the last day of each month. Requests shall be based on work performed during the period ending not later than the twenty-fifth day of that same month. The Owner will make a partial payment to the Contractor based on the Contractor's requests duly certified and approved by the Architect by the twenty-fifth day of the following month.” “9.3.1.5 No Application for Payment will be processed without an updated Progress Schedule and Sales Tax Report. Each application shall have a legible notarized, raised, seal visible.” “9.3.1.6 Until Substantial Completion, the Owner will pay ninety percent (90%) of the amount due the Contractor on account of progress payments.” Add the following Sub-Subparagraphs 9.3.2.1, 9.3.2.2, and 9.3.2.3 to Subparagraph 9.3.2: "9.3.2.1 In requesting payment for materials stored on or off the site, the Contractor shall submit with his Application for Payment the following: 1. An itemized list of the stored material prepared in sufficient detail to identify the materials and their value. 2. Evidence such as bills of sale or such other proof as may be requested by the Owner or Architect to substantiate that the materials listed have been paid for by the Contractor, or for materials stored at the site only, a notarized statement from the materials supplier stating that the materials will become the property of the Owner upon payment by the Owner to the Contractor.” “9.3.2.2 For material stored off the site, the Contractor shall submit with his Application for Payment the following: 1. Evidence that the materials are stored at the location previously agreed to in writing. 2. Evidence that the storage location is bonded. 3. Evidence that the materials are insured while in storage and while in transit to the site. 4. Evidence that transportation to the site will be provided. No payment will be certified for material stored off the site until the storage location has been agreed upon in writing.” “9.3.2.3 The materials may be reviewed in their storage location by the Architect. This inspection, if performed, is an extra service for which the Owner shall pay the Architect and for which the Owner shall be reimbursed by the Contractor." 9.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION Add the following to Subparagraph 9.8.1: SGC-12 "The Work or designated portion thereof will not be considered suitable for Substantial Completion until all systems are operational as designed; all designated or required governmental inspections or certifications have been made and posted, designated instruction of Owner's personnel in the operation of systems has been completed, and all final finishes are in place." Delete Subparagraph 9.8.2 in its entirety and substitute the following: “9.8.2 When the Contractor considers that the Work, or a portion thereof which the Owner agrees to accept separately, is substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Architect a comprehensive list of items to be completed or corrected. The Contractor shall proceed promptly to complete and correct items on the list. Failure to include an item on such a list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Upon receipt of the Contractor's list including ; a) Request for Architect's Substantial Completion Inspection; b) Reports of the Contractor's inspections of every interior, exterior, and site element; c) Reports of all tests evidencing satisfactory function of every operable system as required; d) Reports on the instruction of the Owner's personnel in the use of operable systems and equipment including maintenance and operating information; e) Acceptance by each regulatory body having jurisdiction; f) Certificate of Occupancy; g) List of items to be completed or corrected for each interior, exterior and site element, including operable systems and equipment; h) Operations and maintenance manuals; i) Test and Balance Reports; and j) All warranties; the Architect will make an inspection to determine whether the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete. If the Architect's inspection discloses any item, whether or not included on the Contractor's list, which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall, before issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion, complete or correct such item upon notification by the Architect. The Contractor shall then submit a request for another inspection by the Architect to determine Substantial Completion. When the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete, the Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion which shall establish the date of Substantial Completion, shall establish responsibilities of the Owner and Contractor for security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance, and shall fix the time within which the Contractor shall finish all items on the list accompanying the Certificate. Warranties required by the Contract Documents shall commence on the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof unless otherwise provided in the Certificate of Substantial Completion. The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall be submitted to the Owner and Contractor for their written acceptance of responsibilities assigned to them in such Certificate.” Add the following Sub-Subparagraph 9.8.2.1 and 9.8.2.2 to Subparagraph 9.8.2: "9.8.2.1 As a further condition of Substantial Completion Acceptance, the Contractor shall certify that all remaining work will be completed within thirty (30) consecutive calendar days following the Date of Substantial Completion, and the failure to do so shall automatically reinstitute the provisions for damages due the Owner as contained elsewhere in the Agreement or as provided by law for such period of time as may be required by the Contractor to fully complete the work whether the Owner has occupied the work or not. "9.8.2.2 In the event that more than the two inspections by the Architect, described above are made necessary by the failure of the Contractor to complete the Work or to complete or correct items identified on the list of such items, the Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for all costs incurred including the cost of the Architect's services made necessary thereby." 9.10 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT Add the following to Subparagraph 9.10.2: SGC-13 "At the completion of the Project and prior to receiving final payment, the Contractor shall furnish the Owner, through the Architect, properly signed and notarized waivers of lien from all subcontractors employed and material suppliers furnishing materials for the Project. Such waivers shall be submitted before final payment and will be forwarded by the Architect to the Owner." ARTICLE 10 - PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 10.2 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY Add the following Subparagraph 10.2.8 to Paragraph 10.2: "10.2.8 The Contractor shall promptly report to the Architect and Owner in writing all accidents arising out of or in connection with the Work that cause death, personal injury or property damage. The report shall give full details, including statements of witnesses, hospital reports and other information then in the possession of the Contractor. In addition, in the event of any death or serious injury or damage, the Contractor shall immediately notify the Architect and Owner by telephone of such incident." ARTICLE 11 - INSURANCE 11.1 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE Add the following Sub-Subparagraph 11.1.2.1 to Subparagraph 11.1.2: "11.1.2.1 The insurance required by Subparagraph 11.1.1 shall be written for not less than the following, or greater if required by law. 1. Workmen's Compensation" (a) State Statutory (b) Applicable Federal Statutory (c) Employer's Liability $500,000 per Accident $500,000 Disease Policy Limit $500,000 Disease Ea. Employee 2. Comprehensive General Liability (including Premises Operations; Independent Contractor's Protective; Products and Completed Operations; Bodily Injury; Broad Form Property Damage). The Contractor shall include the Owner and the Architect as an additional insured party on the Comprehensive General Liability Policy. (a) Combined single interest (Bodily injury and property damage) $1,000,000 Ea. Occurrence $2,000,000 Aggregate (b) Property Damage Liability Insurance shall provide X, C, and U coverage. (c) Products and Completed Operations Insurance shall be maintained for a minimum period of two (2) years after final payment and the Contractor shall continue to provide evidence of such coverage to the Owner on an annual basis during the aforementioned period. SGC-14 3. Contractual Liability: Combined Single Interest $1,000,000 Minimum $2,000,000 Aggregate 4. Personal Injury, with Employment Exclusion deleted: $2,000,000 Annual Aggregate 5. Comprehensive Automobile Liability (including hired and non-owned coverage): Bodily Injury $1,000,000 ea. person $1,000,000 ea. accident Property Damage $500,000 ea. occurrence 6. Business Umbrella Policy: $1,000,000 Over Primary Insurance $2,000,000 Retention Delete Subparagraph 11.1.3 in its entirety and substitute the following: "11.1.3 Certificates of Insurance acceptable to the Owner shall be filed with the Owner prior to commencement of the Work. These Certificates and the insurance policies required by this Paragraph 11.1 shall contain a provision that coverage’s afforded under the policies will not be cancelled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days prior written notice delivered by Certified Mail has been given to the Owner. If any of the foregoing insurance coverage’s are required to remain in force after final payment and are reasonably available, an additional certificate evidencing continuation of such coverage shall be submitted with the Final Application for Payment as required by Subparagraph 9.10.2 Information concerning reduction of coverage shall be furnished by the Contractor with reasonable promptness in accordance with the Contractor's information and belief.” Add the following Sub-Subparagraph 11.1.3.1 to Subparagraph 11.1.3: "11.1.3.1 The Contractor shall furnish one copy of each of Certificates of Insurance herein required for each copy of the Agreement which shall specifically set forth evidence of all coverage required by Subparagraph 11.1.1, 11.1.2, and 11.1.3. The form of the Certificates shall be AIA Document G-705. The Contractor shall furnish to the Owner copies of any endorsements that are subsequently issued amending coverage or limits. 11.4 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND Delete Subparagraph 11.4.1 in its entirety and substitute the following: "11.4.1 A Performance Bond and a Labor and Material Payment Bond are required. The Contractor shall obtain Performance Bond and Labor and Material Payment Bond, acceptable to the Owner on AIA Document A 311, from a surety company authorized to do business in the state in which the Project is constructed for the full amount of the Contract Sum. The bond shall guarantee the Contractor's faithful performance of the Contract and the payment of all obligations arising thereunder. The bond shall remain in force until (1) all work has been completed and accepted by the Owner, (2) the provisions of all guarantees required by these Documents have been fulfilled, and (3) the time limitation for all guarantees has expired, or until the time for the filing of all mechanics' liens has expired whichever is longer, after which they shall become void. The Contractor shall pay all charges in connection with this bond as a part of the Contract. One executed copy of the bond shall be attached to SGC-15 each copy of the Contract before they are returned to the Architect for the Owner's signature. The Contractor shall require the attorney in fact who executes the required bonds on behalf of the surety to affix thereto a certified and current copy of his power of attorney indicating the monetary limit of such power.” ARTICLE 12 - UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 12.2 CORRECTION OF WORK Add the following to Sub-Subparagraph 12.2.1: "In the judgment of the Owner should any material, equipment or systems require corrective work because of defects in material or workmanship within the warranty period, the Contractor shall complete all required corrective work within 45 days of notice." Add the following to Sub-Subparagraph 12.2.2: "Except as provided by specific warranties of longer duration, the Contractor shall guarantee for a period of 24 months that the work of his Contract shall be watertight and leakproof at every point and in every area, except where leaks can be attributed to damage to the work by external forces beyond his control. He shall, immediately upon notification by the Owner of water penetration, determine the source of water penetration and, at his own expense, do any work necessary to make the work of his Contract watertight. He shall also, at his own expense, repair or replace any other damaged material, finishes, and furnishings, damaged as a result of this water penetration to return the building to its original accepted condition." ARTICLE 13 - MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 13.1 GOVERNING LAW Add the following to Subparagraph 13.1.1: "In all operations under the Contract, the Contractor agrees that he will comply with provisions of all State and Federal Laws (including OSHA) and all local ordinances which may affect such operations." 13.6 INTEREST Add the following to Subparagraph 13.6.1: "Any money withheld due to any of the causes noted in Paragraphs 9.5, 9.6, 9.7, or 9.8 constitutes a waiver of the Contractor's right to interest as stipulated in Paragraph 13.6" ARTICLE 14 - TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT Delete Paragraph 14.3.2 in its entirety and substitute the following: "14.3.2 For suspensions of the entire project, an adjustment shall be made for increases in the cost of performance of the Contract, including profit on the increased cost of performance, caused by suspension, delay or interruption. No adjustment shall be made to the extent: .1 That performance is, was or would have been so suspended, delayed or interrupted by another cause for which the Contractor is responsible: or .2 That an equitable adjustment is made or denied under another provision of this Contract." SGC-16 Add the following Paragraph 14.4 14.4 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE "14.4.1 Notwithstanding any other provisions to the contrary in any Agreement or the General Conditions, the Owner reserves the right at any time and in its absolute discretion to terminate the services of the Contractor and the Work by giving written notice to the Contractor. In such event, the Contractor shall be entitled to, and the Owner shall reimburse the Contractor for, an equitable portion of the Contractor's overhead and profit based on the portion of the Work completed prior to the effective date of the termination and for any other costs directly attributable to the termination." 1A-1 DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 1A - DESCRIPTION OF THE WORK The site for this project is Neill’s Creek Baptist Church located at 4200 Neill’s Creek Road in Harnett County, North Carolina. The construction of work illustrated on project drawings and described in these technical specifications will be awarded in a Single Prime Contract to a properly licensed General Contractor and shall include limited Site Work, General Construction, Plumbing, HVAC, and Electrical Work. Site work shall include the following: 1. Minor Sedimentation and Soil Erosion Control as required to keep adjacent pavement clear of debris. 2. Earthwork (both cut and fill) and site preparation as required for the installation of new footings, foundation walls, floor slabs, and site structures. 3. The extension of new underground utilities to designated existing connection points. Base Bid General Construction shall include trench footings of reinforced concrete, below grade foundation walls of reinforced concrete masonry, above grade exterior walls of concrete masonry with brick masonry veneer and/or insulated wood stud wall systems with brick masonry veneers. Interior walls shall be of concrete masonry or wood stud construction with gypsum board finishes. Floor systems shall be of concrete (slab-on-grade) or wood framed with plywood deck and poured gypsum concrete topping (elevated floors). Roof systems shall be of wood framed construction with plywood deck, felt underlayment, and glass fiber asphalt shingles. Interior floor finishes shall be of prefinished wood, porcelain tile or carpet, walls and ceilings shall be of fire rated gypsum board with painted finishes, casework shall be prefabricated, and counter tops shall be of quartz. Plumbing Work shall include without limitation the furnishing and installation of a new plumbing system for a new church kitchen, complete with hot and cold water piping, waste and vent piping, fixtures and trim – all of which are connected to existing waste (septic tank) and water systems. Include the cutting and patching of existing paving as required to extend and connect new sewer to existing septic system. Heating and Air Conditioning work shall include a complete system of split system heat pumps, low pressure ductwork, registers and grilles, thermostats and controls for new kitchen and classroom. New exhaust systems shall be provided for kitchen hoods. Electrical Work shall include the replacement of the existing obsolete 800A service with a new 800 “MDP” service as well as the replacement of the existing kitchen panel. A new panel will be required for the new kitchen and new classroom. Duke Energy Progress will upgrade existing electrical service to 208/120 wye. Upgrade is to be coordinated by contractor and phased to allow existing building to remain in use to the greatest extent possible. Alternate Work, if accepted, shall include the replacement of First Floor Corridor floors, the replacement of First Floor Corridor ceilings, and the replacement of Second Floor Corridor floors. Refer to complete project documents including Drawings and Specifications for complete descriptions of Work to be performed by this Contractor. 1B-1 SECTION 1B - USE OF SITE 1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: a. The Contractor is cautioned that existing adjacent facilities will be occupied while construction is in progress and that suitable barriers and other safety measures will be required of him to separate and protect areas where work is in progress from access by the public or other unauthorized individuals. 2. EXTERIOR ELEMENTS: a. Construction traffic, work activities, and access to the site shall be coordinated to minimize disruption to adjacent work and to the surrounding neighborhood. Contractor shall be responsible for keeping the adjacent parking lots, pedestrian ways, and driveways free of debris and mud from the construction site. b. Operational roadways shall not be blocked. All work in operational roadways whether loading, unloading, or actual roadway construction shall take place only with the use of flagmen dedicated to the purpose of directing traffic, at the front and rear of such work. c. Furnish, install, and maintain for the duration of the construction all required scaffolds, tarpaulins, barricades, canopies, warning signs, steps and other temporary construction necessary for the proper completion of the Work in compliance with all pertinent safety regulations. d. Fencing and/or barricades shall be required to secure work in progress from the public and from unauthorized personnel. All open excavations, hazardous areas, and areas of equipment operation shall be secured in such a manner as to prevent accidental access. e. Staging areas shall be designated by the Owner at the project site for use by the contractor during construction operations. All stored materials and temporary facilities shall be confined to these designated staging areas. 3. BUILDING PROTECTION: a. Areas of work in progress shall be secured as soon as practical against unauthorized access and shall remain locked when construction is not in progress. b. Trash shall be removed from areas of work activity on a daily basis and not allowed to stockpile. Disposal shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. c. Suitable means of removing debris, gypsum board mud, etc., from workers shoes shall be placed at entrances to construction areas. 1B-2 4. CONSTRUCTION PARKING/TRAFFIC: a. Personnel will be required to utilize specific parking areas to be designated by the Owner for construction traffic. Personnel utilizing other parking areas will be subject to towing. b. Truck parking will be allowed only in areas as provided by the Owner. 5. CONSTRUCTION OPERATIONS: a. Scheduling of Work Activities shall be the responsibility of the General Contractor as defined by the General and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract. b. All personnel are expected to exhibit proper behavior on the jobsite. Indecent language, acts, or dress will not be tolerated. Offending Personnel will be immediately removed from the project. c. Time extensions shall be the Contractor’s sole remedy for work schedule interruptions caused by the Owner. 1C-1 SECTION 1C - SEQUENCE OF WORK 1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: a. Prior to the beginning of construction, and thereafter on a regular basis, the Contractor shall meet with the Owner and the Architect to coordinate the Contractor's required and scheduled activities during construction with the scheduled and ongoing activities of the other Prime Contractors. b. Where adjacent work must be protected from the effects of work-in-progress, suitable protection shall be in place before any other work commences. The location and configuration of all barriers shall be subject to the approval of the Owner. c. The Sequence of the Work indicated on drawings and specified herein shall be arranged in the following manner: 1. Meet with Owner to develop a suitable Phasing Plan and coordinate scheduled activities. 2. Secure all required permits. 3. Install safety measures as required to perform construction operations. 4. Perform designated work. e. The Contractor shall strictly adhere to the Procedures specified herein to the extent that they are applicable. 2. PROCEDURES FOR WORKING IN OCCUPIED AREAS: a. All work in operational roadways whether loading or unloading shall take place only with the use of flagmen dedicated to the purpose only of directing traffic, at the front and rear of such work. b. Where the Contractor encounters conflicts or omissions in the drawings which will not allow the scope of work for any particular task to be clearly defined, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to issue the Architect a written request for information. The Contractor shall not proceed with such work until he receives written clarification from the Architect. Where the Contractor performs such work without written clarification, he may bear the cost of re-work if, in the opinion of the Architect, such work does not conform to the design intent of the drawings. 3. EXECUTION: a. All work specified herein shall be arranged to take place in an orderly and timely manner, in accordance with the approved progress schedule submitted by the Contractor, and as indicated by the contract documents. 1D-1 SECTION 1D - SEPARATE CONTRACTS The work indicated on the Drawings and specified herein shall be awarded in a single prime contract and shall include Site Work, General Construction, Plumbing Work, Heating and Air Conditioning Work, and Electrical Work. The following items are to be furnished by others and are not a part of this Construction Contract: Landscape work. Furniture and movable equipment except for equipment specifically indicated to be purchased by Owner and installed by Contractor. Interior signage (except of exist signage and radiation protection signage) Telephone and Data systems, except for empty conduits and boxes, which are included in the Electrical Subcontract under Specifications Division 16. The Owner shall furnish to the General Contractor, as required, all rough-in dimensions and other pertinent information necessary for the coordination of the Work of the Sub-Contracts and Work by others under separate contract. 1E-1 SECTION 1E - EXISTING UTILITIES Existing utilities of which the Designer is aware are shown on Project Drawings. Any Contractor whose work involves digging or earth excavation shall first secure the services of a qualified utility locating service to confirm that all utilities are as shown and/or to locate utilities not shown. These utilities shall be marked in a manner that will permit the Contractor to perform his work while maintaining the location of the utility and recorded on as-built documents to be provided by the Contractor. Existing utilities shown on Project Drawings and any other utilities subsequently discovered or installed, except utilities to be modified or marked abandoned, shall remain in place and shall be protected from damage during construction operations. Any damage to these utilities caused by construction operations shall be the responsibility of the Contractor who caused the damage. In the event that unmarked utilities are discovered, all parties owning utilities which will interfere with the execution of the work shall be notified to remove or relocate them, except those utilities indicated to be installed, relocated, or removed as a part of this project. In the event the cost of this work is not borne by these parties, it shall be paid for by the Owner in the manner prescribed for Changes in the Work, ref. Article 7 of the General Conditions of the Contract. 1F-1 SECTION 1F - UNFORESEEN CONDITIONS Should conditions encountered be at variance with the conditions indicated by the Construction Documents, the Contract sum and/or time shall be adjusted as appropriate when written claim is made within a reasonable time after the first observance of the condition. Settlement of this claim shall be in accordance with the provisions of the General Conditions of the Contract. If unforeseen conditions are encountered and corrected without verification by the owner or architect, no compensation will be made. 1G-1 SECTION 1G – ROCK EXCAVATION 1. Refer to Section 1H – Allowances, Section 1J – Unit Prices, and Section 2B – Earthwork and Site Preparation. Material to be excavated is assumed to be earth excavation including rock. In the event that rock is encountered, rock excavation shall be defined as the removal of a formation that cannot be excavated without systematic drilling and blasting. Boulders larger than one-half cubic yard shall be classified as rock. In contrast, normal or earth excavation is a formation that, when plowed and ripped, breaks down into small enough pieces to be easily moved, can be loaded in hauling units, and can be readily incorporated into an embankment or foundation in relatively thin layers. 2. If the classification of the material to be excavated is in question, then the contractor may, at his option and expense, provide the following demonstrations for rock in open, and/or trench excavation: a. For open excavation, if the material cannot be ripped with a D8 Dozer or with a Crawler Tractor rated at a minimum of 50,000 pounds drawbar pull at one mile per hour, pulling a single-tooth ripper, then the material will be considered rock. b. For trench excavation, if the material cannot be removed with a Cat 330 Track Hoe equipped with rock teeth or with a backhoe equipped with a minimum one-half cubic yard heavy-duty trenching bucket placed on a machine capable of lifting capacity of 7,500 pounds at a trench depth of ten (10) feet, then the material will be considered rock. In each of the above demonstrations, the contractor may be required to provide equipment specification data verifying that the above minimum rated equipment will be used for demonstration purposes. 3. Any material that is considered by the contractor to be rock shall be exposed and cleaned by the Contractor for inspection and measurement by the Architect. Any material moved or removed without the measurement and approval by the Architect will be considered as earth excavation. The Architect shall be the final judge of what is to be classified as rock excava-tion. 4. The Contractor shall notify the Architect, the Consulting Engineer, and the Owner immediately when the use of explosives is necessary for the prosecution of the work. The Contractor shall exercise the utmost care not to endanger life or property and shall be responsible for any and all damage resulting from the use of explosives. All explosives shall be stored in a secure manner, in compliance with local laws and ordinances, and all such storage places shall be marked clearly “DANGEROUS EXPLOSIVES.” Where no local laws or ordinances apply, storage shall be provided satisfactory to the Designer and in general not closer than 1000 feet (1000’) from the road or from any building or camping area. The Contractor shall notify each Building Owner and public utility company, having structures in proximity of the site of the work, of his intention to use explosives and such notice shall be given in sufficient time to enable companies to take such steps as they may deem necessary to protect their property from injury. Such notice shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for any damage resulting from his blasting operations. Explosives shall be transported, handled, stored, and used in accordance with Article XVIII of the “Rules and Regulations Governing Pits and Quarries” as promulgated by the NC Department of Labor. 1G-2 5. The General Contractor shall include in his Base Bid the removal and disposal of of ten (10) cubic yards of rock in open excavation and the removal and disposal of five (5) cubic yards rock in trench excavation, such that the application of the unit price shall represent the Contractor’s total compensation for work that is priced by the unit. 6. Final adjustments in the amount of each Contract shall be made on the basis of the quantity of rock actually encountered, and based upon the application of the appropriate unit price for rock excavation quoted in the Contractor’s Proposal. 1H-1 SECTION 1H – ALLOWANCES 1. Allowance for Rock in open and trench excavation: Refer to Section 1G – Rock Excavation, Section 1J – Unit Prices and Section 2B – Earthwork and Site Preparation. The General Contractor shall include in his Base Bid the removal of ten (10) cubic yards of rock in open excavation and five (5) cubic yards of rock in trench excavation at the unit prices quoted in his Proposal. Final adjustments in the amount of the Contract (either added to or subtracted from) shall be made on the basis of the quantity and type of rock actually encountered and based upon the application of the appropriate unit price for rock excavation quoted in the Contractor’s Proposal. 2. Allowance for Finish Hardware: Refer to Section 8F – Hardware. The General Contractor shall include in his Base Bid an allowance of two thousand, five hundred and no/100 ($2,500.00) for the purchase and delivery of all finish hardware and other miscellaneous items as directed. Any difference between the actual cost of the above described materials and the stated allowance shall be adjusted in the Contract Amount. 3. Allowance for Carpet: Refer to Section 9A – Carpet. The General Contractor shall include in his Base Bid an allowance of $4.00 per foot for the purchase and delivery (tax included) of all carpet tile to be installed as specified herein. This allowance is for carpet tile material only. All other costs related to installation (subfloor preparation, adhesives, etc.) shall be included in contractor’s base bid. Any difference between the actual cost of carpet tile delivered to the jobsite and this allowance shall be adjusted in the Contract Amount by Change Order. 4. Allowance for Glazed Porcelain and Ceramic Tile: Refer to Section 9B – Ceramic Tile. The General Contractor shall include in his Base Bid an allowance of $3.00 per square foot for the purchase and delivery (tax included) of all glazed porcelain and ceramic tiles to be installed as specified herein. This allowance is for tile material only. All other costs related to installation (waterproofing, beds, labor, etc.) shall be included in contractor’s base bid. Any difference between the actual cost of glazed porcelain and ceramic tiles delivered to the jobsite and this allowance shall be adjusted in the Contract Amount by Change Order. 5. Allowance for Engineered Wood Flooring: Refer to Section 9C – Engineered Wood Flooring. The General Contractor shall include in his Base Bid an allowance of $4.00 per square foot for the purchase and delivery (tax included) of all Engineered Wood Flooring including Shoe Molds and Prefinished Trim Pieces to be installed as specified herein. This allowance is for material only. All other costs related to installation (adhesives, subfloor preparation, etc.) shall be included in contractor’s base bid. Any difference between the actual cost of Engineered Wood Flooring including Shoe Molds and Prefinished Trim Pieces delivered to the jobsite and this allowance shall be adjusted in the Contract Amount by Change Order. No other allowances are included in the work of this project. 1I-1 SECTION 1I - ALTERNATES The General Contractor shall state in the appropriate spaces of his Bid Form the amount to be added to the Base Bid if the following listed Alternates are included in the Work of the Contract. 1. Alternate No. G-1: The General Contractor shall state the amount to be added to his Base Bid if existing first floor corridor floors are replaced with engineered wood flooring to match new floors in Fellowship Hall as a part of this project. Refer to Project Drawings and the following listed sections of specifications for a complete description of work to be included as a part of Alternate No. G-1: Section 1A – Description of the Work Section 1J – Unit Prices Section 2A - Demolition Section 9C – Engineered Wood Flooring 2. Alternate No. G-2: The General Contractor shall state the amount to be added to his Base Bid if existing second floor corridor floors are replaced with carpet tile flooring as a part of this project. Refer to Project Drawings and the following listed section of specifications for a complete description of work to be included as a part of Alternate No. G-2: Section 1A – Description of the Work Section 1J – Unit Prices Section 2A - Demolition Section 9A – Carpet 3. Alternate No. G-3: The General Contractor shall state the amount to be added to his Base Bid if existing first floor corridor ceilings and light fixtures are replaced with new ceilings and lights to match new work in Fellowship Hall as a part of this project. Refer to Project Drawings and the following listed sections of specifications for a complete description of work to be included as a part of Alternate No. G-3 Section 1A – Description of the Work Section 2A –Demolition Section 9F – Acoustical Lay-In Ceilings Division 16 – Electrical (Sections as Applicable) No other Alternates shall be required for the work of this project. 1J-1 SECTION 1J – UNIT PRICES The following unit prices shall be required of the General Contractor and shall be entered in the appropriate spaces on the Form of Proposal. UNIT PRICE FOR ROCK EXCAVATION Refer to Section 1G – Rock Excavation and to Section 2B – Earthwork and Site Preparation. The General Contractor shall include in his base bid a unit price per cubic yard for the removal and disposal of rock in open excavation, and a unit price per cubic yard for the removal and disposal of rock in trench excavation. Unit prices quoted shall be the basis upon which the value of specified allowances for rock excavation are determined. No other unit prices will be required for the work of this project. 1K-1 SECTION 1K - TEMPORARY HEATING AND VENTILATION The General Contractor shall provide all temporary heat, ventilation, and other climate control required during construction to protect work in place from freezing or frost action, mold growth, or other environmental conditions inconsistent with Manufacturer’s recommendations or Industry Standards for the material/type of work to be protected. All heating, ventilation, and humidity control equipment and/or appliances shall be subject to the approval of the Owner and shall not emit noxious or toxic fumes or generate excessive noise. Devices shall not be left unattended. 1L-1 SECTION 1L – FIRE RESISTANCE REQUIREMENTS 1. REQUIREMENTS a. Refer to Project Drawings for locations of floors, walls, ceilings, chases and all penetrations of these elements. The Contractor is cautioned that the work of this project shall require specific fire resistance ratings as specified herein and/or as illustrated on project drawings. b. Except where more stringent ratings are indicated and/or specified, this project shall comply with the requirements of Chapter 5 of the N.C. State Building Code as it relates to Type V-A construction and Chapter 7 as it relates to fire resistance ratings of components. c. Construction shall be as required to meet the requirements of Primary Occupancy Classification Assembly A-3 as noted on Project Drawings. The following listed fire resistance ratings and assemblies, or approved equal, shall be required: 1) Corridor Walls – one hour construction conforming to the requirements of U.L. Design No. U305. 2) Masonry Elevator Shaft Walls – One Hour Fire Rated Construction conforming to the requirements of U.L. Design No. U906. 3) Shaft wall construction– One Hour Fire Rated Construction conforming to the requirements of U.L. Design No. U4105 – System A. 4) Floor/Ceiling Assemblies – One Hour Fire Rated Construction conforming to the requirements of U.L. Design No. L521 or GA File No. FC-5406. 5) Column Enclosures – One Hour Fire Rated Construction conforming to U.L. Design No. X528. d. Floor and Wall penetrations at rated assemblies, including openings therein, shall be treated as illustrated on mechanical and electrical drawings. e. Doors and frames – Refer to Door Schedule for specific rating requirements. Comply with N. C. State Building Code, chapter 7 Fire-Resistant-Rated Construction, Section 715 Opening Protectives and with NFPA 80 – Standard for Fire Door and Fire Windows. Doors and frames indicated to be rated, unless specifically noted otherwise, shall be rated at 45 minutes. f. Glass and glazing shall comply with the requirements of the North Carolina State Building Code, Chapter 24 – Glass and Glazing, Section 2406 – Safety Glazing, Table 2406.1, Category II, and with the requirements of C.P.S.C. 16CFR-1201. g. Carpet shall meet Surface Burning Characteristics requirements specified, per ASTM E 84/NFPA 255/UL 723, ASTM E 648/NFPA 253 and ASTM E 662/NFPA 258. h. All other interior finishes shall meet the requirements of ASTM E-84 for Class A Interior Finish or NFPA Class I. i. Shingle Roofing shall be U.L. Rated Class “A” self-sealing shingle roofing. 1L-2 j. Contractor shall furnish to the Architect product data for each system used indicating compliance with all fire resistance and sound attenuation requirements. 2. PRODUCTS: a. Products shall be as required by the referenced U.L. Design or System No., Factory Mutual No., STC ratings, or approved equal. 3. EXECUTION OF THE WORK: a. General Contractor shall be responsible for the systems relating to all work. b. All work shall be performed in strict accordance with the requirements of the labeling or certifying authority for the assembly in which it is required. c. Installation tolerances for doors and/or windows in frames shall meet the requirements of NFPA-80 “Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows”, latest edition. 1M-1 SECTION 1M - PROJECT FORMS The following listed forms shall be required of each prime contractor for use on this project: AIA Document G702 - Application and Certificate For Payment AIA Document G703 - Continuation Sheet AIA Document G706 - Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims AIA Document G706A - Affidavit of Release of Liens AIA Document G707 - Consent of Surety to Final Payment These forms shall be purchased by the Contractor. Sales Tax Reporting Form shall be as illustrated herein. Other forms shall be as specified or enclosed elsewhere in the Project Manual. STATE OF NORTH CAROLINA SALES AND USE TAX REPORT DETAIL CONTRACTOR: ______________________________________________ PAGE _____ OF _____ SUBCONTRACTOR: ______________________________________________ SUBJECT: ______________________________________________ FOR PERIOD: _____________________ PURCHASE DATE VENDOR NAME INVOICE NUMBER TYPE OF PROPERTY INVOICE TOTAL COUNTY TAX PAID COUNTY OF SALE* TOTAL: *If this is an out-of-state vendor, the County of Sale should be the county to which the merchandise was shipped. STATE OF NORTH CAROLINA SALES AND USE TAX REPORT DETAIL SUMMARY TOTALS AND CERTIFICATION CONTRACTOR: ______________________________________________ PAGE _____ OF _____ SUBCONTRACTOR: ______________________________________________ SUBJECT: ______________________________________________ FOR PERIOD: _____________________ TOTAL FOR COUNTY OF: TOTAL FOR COUNTY OF: TOTAL FOR COUNTY OF: TOTAL FOR COUNTY OF: TOTAL FOR COUNTY OF: TOTAL FOR COUNTY OF: TOTAL FOR COUNTY OF: TOTAL FOR COUNTY OF: CONTRACTOR SUBCONTRACTOR(S)* COUNTY TOTAL * Attach subcontractor (s) report (s) ** Must Balance with Detail Sheet (s) I certify that the above figures do not include any tax paid on supplies, tools and equipment which were used to perform this contract and only includes those building materials, supplies, fixtures and equipment which actually became a part of or annexed to the building or structure. I certify that, to the best of my knowledge, the information provided here is true, correct, and complete. Sworn to and subscribed before me, This is the ________________ day of ________________________ __________________________________________________ Signed _______________________________________________________ Notary Public __________________________________________________ Print of Type Name of Above SEAL: Note: This Certified Statement may be subject to audit. 1N-1 SECTION 1N - TESTING SERVICES 1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: a. Prior to the initiation of any work requiring testing services, the cost of which is to be paid by the Owner, the Architect shall designate to the Contractor the name of the testing agency to provide the designated services. b. Testing of materials entering into the construction work shall be in accordance with the requirements of the North Carolina Building Code, 2012 Edition, Chapter 17 – Structural Tests and Special Inspections, and with standard ASTM procedures or other industry standards as specified or required. Costs of tests to indicate quality shall be paid by the Owner, unless indicated otherwise in the contract documents. The cost of tests required to provide compliance with contract documents, when quality tests have failed, shall be paid by the Contractor. c. The Contractor shall provide timely notice to the Architect and to the designated testing agency in advance of all activities requiring testing services and shall coordinate his schedule with theirs so that all required inspections and testing can be performed in an orderly fashion. Minimum advance notice shall be 48 hours. d. In the placement of soil for compacted fills and beneath footings, an independent testing laboratory shall be selected by the designer and paid for by the Owner to perform control testing at representative locations for the compacted fill or final subgrade. Additional sampling required due to failure of initial tests to comply with the specifications shall be paid by the Contractor. e. Concrete testing shall comply with the requirements of the North Carolina Building Code, 2012 Edition, Chapter 17 – Structural Tests and Special Inspections with special attention to Table 1704.4 – Required Verification and Inspection of Concrete Construction. All concrete testing shall be performed by a laboratory meeting the requirements of the North Carolina Building Code and ASTM E-329, STANDARD RECOMMENDED PRACTICE FOR TESTING AGENCIES FOR CONCRETE AS USED IN CONSTRUCTION. Accreditation as a Class (I or II) laboratory by BACTL (Board of Accreditation of Concrete Testing Laboratories, Inc.) will suffice as evidence of the laboratory meeting these ASTM requirements. Testing laboratory shall be selected by the Designer and paid for by the Owner. Procedure shall be in accordance with the testing chapter of ACI-301. Two specimens shall be obtained for testing at 28 days for acceptance and two shall be obtained for testing at 7 days for informational purposes. Evaluation of tests shall be in accordance with ACI-318, Section 4.8, except that one sample of four cylinders shall be taken for each 100 cubic yards, or fraction thereof, of each class of concrete placed each day. f. Masonry work shall comply with the requirements of the North Carolina Building Code, 2012 Edition, Chapter 17 – Structural Tests and Special Inspections with special attention to Table 1704.5.1 – Level 1 Special Inspection and Table 1704.5.3 – Level 2 Special Inspection. Quality Assurance shall comply with the requirements of Table 1708.1.1 for Level 1, Table 1708.1.2 for Level 2, and Table 1708.1.4 for Level 3. g. Testing of Structural Steel shall comply with the requirements of the North Carolina Building Code, 2012 Edition, Chapter 17 – Structural Tests and Special Inspections with special attention to Table 1704.3 – Required Verification and Inspection of Steel Construction. A qualified independent testing laboratory, approved by the Architect, and 1N-2 paid for by the Owner, shall make field and shop inspections of the structural connections during and upon completion until they are satisfactory. The representative of the independent testing laboratory shall hereafter be called the inspector. The inspector shall furnish complete and accurate reports to the Architect, the Engineer and the General Contractor periodically during shop fabrication and field erection and a complete report upon completion of the work. Final report shall contain a statement that the items requiring inspection have been found to be satisfactory. h. Testing of Mechanical and Electrical Systems shall comply with the requirements of the Mechanical and Electrical divisions of these specifications. i. Refer to the General Conditions of the Contract and to the following listed sections of specifications for additional requirements affecting testing services: Division 2 – Site Work (Sections as Applicable) Section 3A – Cast In Place Concrete Section 4A – Unit Masonry Section 4B – Mortar and Grout Section 5A – Structural Steel Section 9A - Carpet Mechanical Divisions (all Sections as Applicable) Electrical Divisions (all Sections as Applicable) 2. EXECUTION OF THE WORK: a. Earthwork & Tests An independent testing laboratory, approved by the Architect and paid by the Owner, shall have a representative observe all cut and fill operations. He shall inspect the area after all cut material is removed and before filling operations are initiated. After confirming the suitability of the subgrade soils, he shall observe and test the compaction of all filling operations. b. Concrete Tests: 1. The testing agency shall be an independent testing laboratory paid by the Owner and approved by the Engineer. The testing agency shall be responsible for making, handling, and curing the specimens in addition to testing the concrete. Reports shall be sent to the Owner, the Engineer, and the Contractor. 2. Four cylinders shall be made from each sample. Two shall be tested at 7 days and two at 28 days. If 28 day tests do not comply with specifications, additional testing will be performed at the Contractor's expense as provided by the General Conditions of the Contract. 3. The testing agency as the Owner's representative shall be present whenever concrete is being placed and shall reject any concrete that does not meet these specifications. 4. If additional testing, curing, or other measures are required to confirm or verify the strength of any concrete in questions, cost shall be paid by the Contractor. 1N-3 5. Design mix must be submitted by the Contractor as soon as possible to avoid delay of the beginning of the project. Submittal shall be in accordance with 16.7.3 and 3.8. Cost of preparing and testing mix shall be paid by the Contractor. Approval of design mix by the Engineer shall not in any way relieve the Contractor from meeting all requirements of these specifications. c. Masonry Tests: 1. Provide certification of materials and testing as specified for submittals, ref. Section 4A - Masonry and ACI 530.1-05. d. Mortar and Grout Tests: 1. Provide certification of materials and testing as specified for submittals, ref. Section 4A - Mortar and Grout and ACI 530.1-05. e. Structural Steel Tests: 1. Provide shop and field inspections of fabrication and connections. 2. Provide inspection reports and verify by written statement that fabrication and connections comply with specification requirements. f. Water Piping Tests: 1. Test pressure piping in accordance with ASME B31. 2. General: Provide temporary equipment for testing, including pump and gages. Test piping system before insulation is installed wherever feasible, and remove control devices before testing. Test each natural section of each piping system valves to isolate sections where test pressure exceeds valve pressure rating. Fill each section with water and pressurize for indicated pressure and time. 3. Required test period is 2 hours. 4. Test long runs of Schedule 40 pipe at 150 psi, except where fittings are a lower Class or pressure rating. 5. Test each piping system at 150% of operating pressure indicated, but not less that 25 psi test pressure. 6. Observe each test section for leakage at end of test period. Test fails if leakage is observed or if pressure drop exceeds 5% of test pressure. 7. Water piping tests shall be paid by the Contractor. g. Soil and Waste Piping Tests: 1. Test soil and waste piping system in accordance with requirements of National Standard Plumbing Code and north Carolina Building Code Volume II. 2. Soil and Waste Piping Tests shall be paid by the Contractor. h. Mechanical System Tests: 1N-4 1. Test fans, air-conditioning units and ductwork systems. Comply with NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems" as applicable to mechanical air distribution systems, and associated equipment and apparatus. 2. Comply with ASHRAE recommendations pertaining to measurements, instruments, testing, adjusting, and balancing, except as otherwise indicated. 3. Submit certified test reports of all tests performed. 4. Mechanical Systems Tests shall be paid by the Contractor. i. Fire Alarm System Tests: 1. Test Fire Alarm System. Comply with NFPA-72. 2. Submit Certificate of Completion to Architect as per NFPA-72. 3. Fire Alarm System Test and Certification shall be paid by the Contractor. 1O-1 SECTION 1O - TEMPORARY OFFICES AND SANITARY FACILITIES A. Temporary office facilities shall not be required of the contractor except for local telephone service allowing communication between the job site and the Architect. Work space within the existing Education Building shall be available to the contractor at no cost for a plan table, document storage and construction meetings. B. Sanitary Facilities: 1. Existing Sanitary facilities within the existing Education Building may be used by the Contractor and his personnel, subject to the condition that these facilities are kept clean and sanitary. Violations of this requirement will cause existing toilets to be placed off limits to the Contractor, at which time suitable chemical toilets will be required for the Contractor’s use and at the Contractor’s expense. 1P-1 SECTION 1P - SIGNS Directional signs may be erected on the Owner's property subject to approval of the Owner with respect to size, style, and location of such directional signs. Such signs may bear the name of the Contractor and a directional symbol. No other signs, trademarks, or advertisements shall be displayed within or about the project area unless approved by the Architect. 1Q-1 SECTION 1Q - STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS All references to Specification Standards of any society, institution, association or governmental authority shall be to the edition current at the date of the Construction Documents, unless otherwise specifically noted. 1R-1 SECTION 1R - CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS a. The General Contractor shall receive, free of charge, for construction purposes, twelve (12) sets of project drawings and specifications. Additional copies will be furnished, if requested by the Contractor, for the nominal cost of reproduction and handling. b. All drawings and specifications are instruments of service and as such are the property of the Architect. Such documents shall be returned to the Architect upon completion of the project. 1S-1 SECTION 1S - RECORD DRAWINGS Record Drawings shall be furnished to the Architect at time of project closeout. The General Contractor shall file one (1) complete set of Contract Drawings in his field office. The Contractor and each Subcontractor shall fully and accurately note in red on this set any and all changes and deviations in the Project from that originally indicated on the drawings, as required by change orders, bulletin drawings, addenda, alternates, products, equipment, and methods of con-struction. All utility services and other concealed work which are built into walls, floor slabs, roof slabs, below slabs on grade, and in general unexposed shall be accurately located to avoid damage to them in case of change or renovation at some future date. All changes in dimensions, elevations, the location of building components and equipment, and the location of any existing work which are different from that originally shown shall be indicated on these drawings. 1T-1 SECTION 1T - SUBMITTALS 1. GENERAL: a. Each submittal shall be complete with all requested information including the Contractor's stamp of approval. b. All submittals shall be dated and shall contain the project name, description or names of equipment, materials or equipment which are to be installed, reference to the Section of Specifications where it is specified and Drawing number where shown. 2. SHOP DRAWINGS: a. Submit either five (5) copies each or legible positive side up sepia and three opaque prints of each drawing. Each drawing shall have a clear space for stamps. When phrase "by others" appears on Shop Drawings, the Contractor shall indicate on drawing who is to furnish material or operations so marked before submittal. When Shop Drawings are checked "resubmit", or words of like meaning, Contractor shall correct original tracing and submit new copies or a new transparency for approval to the Architect. After completion of checking of each submission of Shop Drawings or transparencies, the Architect will return check copies or transparencies to Contractor. For use of all trades, the Contractor shall provide such number of prints as are required for field distribution. b. No manufacturing or fabrication of items shall begin before final approval of shop drawings by the Architect/Engineer. c. Approval of shop drawings shall be for design only. Contractor is responsible for dimensions, quantities, and coordination with other trades. Approval does not authorize changes to contract requirements unless stated in a separate letter or change order. 3. MANUFACTURER'S LITERATURE: For standard manufactured items not requiring special shop drawings for manufacture, submit sufficient copies of manufacturer's catalog sheets to permit the Architect to retain one copy, provide one copy for the Owner, provide one copy to the Engineer, and to return adequate copies for the contractors use and distribution. Catalog cuts shall be of item to be furnished, showing scale details, sizes, dimensions, performance characteristics, capacities, wiring diagrams and controls, and all other pertinent information. 4. SAMPLES: a. Unless otherwise specifically directed by the Architect, all samples shall be of the precise article proposed to be furnished. b. Submit all samples in the quantity which is required to be returned plus one which will be retained by the Architect. c. The Architect, at his discretion, may require a sample of products installed for review and approval of quality of materials and workmanship. Installation shall not continue until authorized by the Architect. 1T-2 5. COORDINATION DRAWINGS: a. Coordination Shop Drawings shall be prepared indicating Mechanical, Plumbing, and Electrical work. Drawings shall indicate all ductwork, mechanical lines 2" and over, except all lines which require gravity draining are to be shown. All plumbing lines 2" and over, and all major pieces of equipment are to be indicated. Electrical light fixtures need not be shown, but size and elevation conflicts for same shall be brought to the attention of other Contractors. b. Drawings shall be produced in 1/4" scale, except that mechanical rooms, air handling equipment rooms, and the like, shall be produced in 1/2" scale. Drawings shall be reproducible transparencies as indicated above under Shop Drawings. c. Sequence of production of Drawings shall be as follows: 1. The HVAC trade shall initiate these drawings including furnishing of reproducible sheets. Sequence of preparation shall be: a) Ductwork. b) Remainder of mechanical work including equipment and piping. 2. Plumbing trade shall show piping (supply, waste, vent, etc.) overlaid on the sheets furnished by mechanical trade. 3. Electrical work shall be shown on the same sheets after completion of the above. d. Minimally, monthly meetings shall be held in order to review status of Drawings and to resolve conflicts. e. Drawings must be complete and submitted to the Architect for his review 45 days after award of contract. The Architect's review shall not denote responsibility of content of Drawings on his part, but to check for general conformity and requirements of the Contract Documents. f. Each Drawing shall have a space allotted for each Contractor to sign, indicating acceptance and approval of all work shown. Space shall also be allowed for the Architect's stamp. 6. MAINTENANCE MANUAL AND INSTRUCTIONS: a. Contractor shall, prior to Substantial Completion of Contract, deliver to the Architect three copies of a manual, assembled, indexed, and bound; presenting for the Owner's guidance, full details for care and maintenance of mechanical, electrical, and other equipment included in Contract. b. Contractor shall, for this manual, obtain from Subcontractors, literature of manufacturers relating to equipment, including motors; also furnish cuts, wiring diagrams, instruction sheets, and other information pertaining to same that will be useful to Owner in overall operation and maintenance. Include also the name, address, and phone number of the nearest sales and service organization for each item. 1T-3 c. The binder shall be a hard-cover, three ring notebook, embossed with the name of the project, spring-lock metal label holders, and piano hinge edges or approved equal. d. Such manuals and/or data called for under separate sections of the specifications, shall be included in the manual described in this Section. 7. INSTRUCTIONS: The Owner's delegated representative shall be given personal instructions by trained personnel, in the care, use, maintenance, and operation procedures for each item. This shall be done in accordance with, and in addition to, the above required manual. Training shall be a scheduled event acknowledged in writing by the Owner with copies of acknowledgement delivered to the Architect. 8. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS: a. Coordinate with technical sections of the specifications. Submittals shall include the following: 1. Record Drawings. Record drawings shall be provided reflecting changes in the work and locations of concealed items for all trades including plumbing, mechanical, electrical, and general construction. 2. Operation and Maintenance Data. 3. Guarantees, Warranties and Bonds. 4. Keys and keying Schedule. 5. Spare parts and Maintenance Materials. 6. Certificate of Insurance for Products and Completed Operations. 7. Certificate of Occupancy if required. 8. Affidavit of Release of Liens by the Contractor, 4 copies. (AIA Document G706A) 9. Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims by the Contractor, 4 copies. (AIA Document G706) 10. Consent of Surety to Final Payment, 4 copies. (AIA Document G707) 11. All other submissions and certificates required by other Articles and Sections of the Specifications shall be in the hands of the Architect before approval for final payment. 12. Any other items as required by the Architect and/or Owner. 1U-1 SECTION 1U - STORAGE AND PROTECTION 1. All products, both stored and installed, shall be properly stored and protected from damage in accordance with the type of product and its manufacturer's recommendations. See Specification Sections for any special storage and protection requirements. 2. Products that can be damaged by weather, dampness and sunlight shall be stored in a weatherproof building or similar enclosure. On-site yard storage on pallets under a canvas or plastic sheet or the like is NOT a substitution for a weatherproof building or similar enclosure. Products that will not be damaged by weather, dampness, and sunlight and that can be stored outside a weatherproof building or similar enclosure shall be stored off the ground and shall be protected from dirt, grime, mud, etc., with particular attention being given to those products that will be exposed to view in the finished work. Products that can also be damaged by high and/or low temperatures shall be stored in weatherproof building or similar enclosure where the proper storage temperature can be maintained as required by the product being stored. Stored products, when installed, shall be in a new, undamaged, and factory finished condition. 3. No finishing product or finished product shall be stored in the Project or installed in the Project until the Project is fully enclosed; meet the requirements stipulated above; is heated to the minimum temperature required by the product; and the humidity can be controlled to that required by the product. Coordinate with all finishing trades involved, in order that the required environmental conditions can be furnished and maintained prior to, during, and after the time of storage or installation of finishing products and finished products. 1V-1 SECTION 1V - PRODUCTS AND SUBSTITUTIONS 1. Refer to the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction and The Supplementary General Conditions for requirements pertaining to substitutions of specified materials. 2. Any and all revisions resulting directly or indirectly from equipment, products, and systems to be provided, which have different characteristics from that which the Project was designed for, shall be the financial responsibility of the Contractor or Subcontractor providing the equipment, products, and system which caused the revision. For example: Should a unit of equipment require a utility supply of larger capacity, such increase required in the supply system and its related components, back to a point where an increase will not be required, shall be paid for by the Contractor or Subcontractor providing that unit of equipment. 2A-1 DIVISION 2 – SITE WORK SECTION 2A – DEMOLITION 1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: a. Refer to Project Drawings for location, type, quantity, and general description of demolition required. Provide all demolition as required for the installation of Base Bid Work and Accepted Alternates. b. Refer to the following listed sections of specifications for additional requirements and related work affecting work specified herein: Section 1A – Description of Work Section 1B – Use of Site Section 1C – Sequence of Work Section 1E – Existing Utilities Section 1F – Unforeseen Conditions Section 1I – Alternates Section 2B – Earthwork and Site Preparation Section 4A – Unit Masonry Division 15 – Mechanical (Sections as Applicable) Division 16 – Electrical (Sections as Applicable) c. Prior to demolition the Owner will engage the services of an accredited industrial hygienist to survey all work to be demolished. Hazardous materials shall be identified in accordance with State and Federal asbestos regulations and shall be removed by the Owner prior to the beginning of demolition operations. d. Demolition shall not begin until the Contractor is notified in writing that all Regulated Asbestos Containing Materials within the area to be demolished have been removed and properly disposed. e. Furnish all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to perform all demolition as required to complete new construction, including alterations to existing construction, site improvements, and grading work. Abandoned work shall be removed from the site. f. Refer to Specifications Section 1I – Alternates: 1. If Alternate No. G-1 is accepted as described in Section 1I – Alternates, this section shall include the removal and disposal of designated first floor corridor floor finishes as required for the installation of new hardwood floors. 2. If Alternate No. G-2 is accepted as described in Section 1I – Alternates, this section shall include the removal and disposal of designated second floor corridor floor finishes as required for the installation of new carpet tile floors. 3. If Alternate No. G-3 is accepted, this section shall include the removal and disposal of designated First Floor corridor ceiling systems, including light fixtures, as required for the installation of new work. g. Provide all necessary safety measures for the protection of all persons on the job, including the requirements of the A.G.C Accident Prevention Manual in Construction, as amended, and comply with all state laws or regulations and North Carolina State 2A-2 Building Code requirements to prevent accident or injury to persons on or about the location of the work. Adhere to the rules, regulations and interpretations of the North Carolina Department of Labor relating to Occupational Safety and Health Standards for the Construction Industry (Title 29, Code of Federal Regulations, Part 1926, published in Volume 39, Number 122, Part II, June 24, 1974, Federal Register), and revisions thereto as adopted by General Statutes of North Carolina 95-126 through 155. h. Portions of buildings, site facilities, and other structures to be demolished shall be vacated and discontinued in use prior to the start of demolition work. i. The Owner shall endeavor to maintain conditions existing at the time of inspection for bidding purposes until demolition operations begin, but assumes no responsibility for the actual condition of structures or portions of structures to be demolished. j. Items of salvageable value to the contractor may be removed from the work to be demolished as the work progresses. Salvaged items must be transported from the project site as they are removed. Storage or sale of removed items on the site will not be permitted. k. The Contractor shall be responsible for securing all Demolition and/or Disposal Permits from appropriate regulatory agencies. The use of explosives will not be permitted. l. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordination of the removal of existing utilities and installation of proposed improvements such that there will be no interruption of the Owner’s use of the facilities, or any interruption will be limited to the maximum extent practical and will be coordinated in advance with the Owner. 2. EXECUTION OF THE WORK: a. Pollution Controls: 1. Use water sprinkling, temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods as necessary to limit the amount of dust and dirt rising and scattering in the air, to the lowest level of air pollution practical for the condition of work. Comply with governing regulations. 2. Clean adjacent structures, surfaces, and improvements of all dust, dirt, and debris caused by demolition operations, and as directed by the Architect. Return adjacent areas to condition existing prior to the start of the work. b. Site Demolition: 1. Remove all existing interfering underground features including abandoned utilities, abandoned storm drainage piping, abandoned driveway culverts, and abandoned footings/foundations. 2. Remove all existing interfering surface features including trees and shrubs, equipment pads and sidewalks. 3. Properly dispose of all demolished materials off-site in accordance with all governing regulations. 4. All existing trees, shrubs, landscape features, sidewalks, storm drainage structures, sewer structures, and utilities that are to remain, shall be properly 2A-3 protected during demolition activities to insure the integrity of the structure and/or utility. 5. Contractor shall repair, at his expense, any damaged sidewalks, storm drain and sewer structures, piping and utilities or other work to remain in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction or as directed by the Architect. c. Building Demolition: 1. Demolish indicated work completely and remove from the site. Use such methods as required to complete the work within the limitations of governing regulations. Cutting of new openings through existing structural elements (i.e. roof deck, beams, floors, walls, etc.) shall be co-ordinated with the Designer and subject to his approval. 2. Proceed with demolition in a systematic manner, from the top of the structure to the ground. Complete demolition work above each floor or tier before disturbing any of the supporting members on the lower levels. 3. Existing floor and other surfaces that are to receive new finishes shall be stripped of existing finishes as necessary and thoroughly and properly prepared to receive new finishes as scheduled or required. 4. Where partitions between existing rooms or spaces are removed, the floor and/or ceiling finishes in the adjoining rooms or spaces, where scheduled to remain, shall be cut back from such partitions as necessary, then patched to match existing. In the instance where floors may be at differing elevations on either side of the removed partition, contractor shall level floor within the confines of the newly created room to the level of the room door threshold. Leveling of existing floors shall be by chipping and grinding or by use of topping materials. 5. Demolish concrete and masonry in small sections. 6. Remove structural framing members and lower to the ground by means of hoists, derricks, or other suitable methods. 7. Break up and remove designated concrete slabs-on-grade, unless otherwise shown to remain. 8. Locate demolition equipment throughout the structure and remove materials so as not to impose excessive loads to supporting walls, floors, or framing. 9. Any parts of existing construction which are to remain and which are damaged during demolition and preparatory work or new construction work on this project shall be patched to match existing surface texture, finish and surface elevation. Adjacent surface patching and finishing of such areas shall conform with all applicable requirements of other technical sections of these specifications, and shall match existing work in material, type, finish, etc. d. Traffic: 1. Conduct demolition operations and the removal of debris to ensure minimum 2A-4 interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. 2. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks or other occupied or used facilities without permission from the Architect. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways as required by governing regulations. e. Protections: 1. Conduct operations to prevent damage by falling debris or other cause to adjacent buildings, structures, and other facilities as well as persons. 2. Provide interior or exterior shoring, bracing, or support to prevent movement or settlement or collapse of structures to be demolished and adjacent facilities to remain. Where it is necessary to remove portions of existing roofing, care shall be taken to protect the structure below with temporary waterproof protection at each penetration of the roof. 3. Contractor shall provide, erect, and maintain all bracing, anchoring, lights, barricades, warning signs and guards as necessary for protection of adjacent parts of existing structure, parked vehicles, employees of Owner, and the public. 4. Care shall be taken to prevent damage to adjacent existing structures, finishes, etc. during the demolition operation. Should damage occur, promptly repair as directed by the Architect and at no cost to the Owner. f. Utilities: 1. Rules and regulations of the authority having jurisdiction shall be followed in executing all Utility Demolition Work. 2. Active utilities shown on the Drawings shall be adequately protected from damage. Where active utilities are encountered, but are not shown on the Drawings, the Architect shall be advised. The work shall be adequately protected, supported, or relocated as directed. 3. Inactive and abandoned utilities encountered, either shown or not shown on the Drawings, shall be removed, plugged or capped as directed by the Architect. In the absence of specific requirements, plug or cap such utility lines at least 3 feet outside of building walls or as required by local authorities. g. Below-Grade Demolition: 1. Demolish and remove all foundations, footings, concrete slabs on ground, and all other below-grade construction to the extent required to accommodate new construction. 2. Completely fill below-grade areas and voids resulting from the demolition of structures. 3. Use satisfactory soil materials consisting of process fill, stone, gravel, and sand, free from debris, trash, frozen materials, roots and other organic matter, and stones larger than 2 inches in any dimension. 2A-5 4. Prior to placement of fill materials, ensure that areas to be filled are free of standing water, frost, frozen materials, trash and debris. 5. Place fill materials as specified in Section 2B - Earthwork and Site Preparation. 6. After fill placement and compaction, grade the surface to meet project requirements. h. Disposal of Demolished Materials: 1. All barricades, guards, signs, etc., required for demolition operations shall be removed from the site as soon as practical and when approved by Architect. Broken concrete, masonry, and other demolished materials and debris shall be removed from the site as soon as possible; such items shall not be permitted to accumulate. Clean up operations shall be carried on constantly. 2. Burning of removed materials from demolished structures will not be permitted on the site. 3. The Contractor shall be responsible for the safe and legal disposal of all demolished materials. 2B-1 SECTION 2B – EARTHWORK AND SITE PREPARATION 1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: a. Refer to Project drawings for location, type, and quantity of earthwork and site preparation required. This Section shall include the removal of designated trees and shrubs, grubbing, site grading, and building excavation – all as indicated on Project Drawings and/or as specified herein for Base Bid Work and Accepted Alternates. Earthwork and Site Preparation shall be performed by the General Contractor. b. Refer to the following listed Sections of Specifications for additional requirements and related work affecting work specified herein. Section 1A – Description of the Work Section 1C – Sequence of Work Section 1E – Existing Utilities Section 1F – Unforeseen Conditions Section 1G – Rock Excavation Section 1H – Allowances Section 1J – Unit Prices Section 1N – Testing Services Section 2A – Demolition Section 2C – Site Drainage Section 2D – Shoring Section 7A – Granular Fill c. Refer to Section 1G – Rock Excavation and to Section 1H – Allowances. The General Contractor shall provide all excavation as required for the installation of Designated Work. Rock if encountered, shall be as defined in Section 1G – Rock Excavation. The General Contractor shall include in his Base Bid an Allowance for Ten (10) cubic yards of rock in open excavation and Five (5) cubic yards of rock in trench excavation. Final adjustment in the Contract amount shall be made on the basis of quantity of rock actually encountered and based upon the appropriate unit price for rock excavation quoted in the Contractor’s Proposal. d. Refer to Section 1J - Unit Prices. The General Contractor shall include in his bid a unit price per cubic yard for the removal and disposal of rock in open excavation and a unit price per cubic yard for the removal and disposal of rock in trench excavation, such that the application of the unit price shall represent the Contractor's total compensation for work that is priced by the unit. e. Maintain all bench marks, monuments and other reference points and obtain accurate replacement of any disturbed, destroyed or moved due to the nature of the work. Furnish a certificate by a professional civil engineer or land surveyor that all such items have been relocated accurately. f. This Contractor shall lay-out work and be responsible for all lines, elevations and measurements. g. Existing utilities encompassing all water systems, storm and sanitary sewer systems, electric systems, telephone and communication systems, etc., and all accessories thereto underground, on the surface or overhead, located in or affected by the construction of the work shall be protected, removed, or relocated as required. 2B-2 h. Give advance notice to Utility Owner of work to be removed or relocated. The work shall be performed by the Contractor or Utility Owner with arrangements and payment for this work being made by the Contractor. i. If existing concealed utilities not shown or correctly indicated by the Contract Documents are encountered, Contractor shall stop work and notify the Architect and Utility Owner. Do not proceed until written instructions are received from the Architect. j. Contractor shall verify all locations, sizes and inverts of all underground utilities before starting the work. k. Visit and examine the site and any available records of investigations pursuant to the character of materials to be encountered. In the absence of subsurface investigations and a geotechnical report, a presumptive soil bearing capacity of 2,000 PSF has been used for foundation design and a minimum CBR of 8.0 has been used for pavement design. It is anticipated that with the application of procedures specified, firm soils suitable for the support of required footings, foundations and pavement or surface course will be encountered or can be achieved at the elevations designated on the Project Drawings. Footings and foundations have been designed for soil conditions as described herein. The contractor shall, upon becoming aware of apparent or latent subsurface conditions differing from those described herein, promptly notify the Architect, both verbally to permit immediate verification of the change and in writing, as to the nature and extent of the differing conditions. No claim by the Contractor for any conditions differing from those anticipated in the plans and specifications will be allowed under the contract unless the contractor has so notified the Architect both verbally and in writing, as required above, of such changed conditions. Under these circumstances, the Contractor shall not proceed further until instructions are given and necessary measurements made for the purpose of establishing the additional amount of work required. l. Material to be excavated is assumed to be earth and other material that may or may not be removed with crawler tractors or power shovels. Neither the Contractor nor the Architect shall be responsible for variations of sub-soil quality or conditions, the exact status of which cannot be determined prior to excavation. m. After clearing the site of trees, underbrush, and groundcover, indicated to be removed, the General Contractor shall strip and store topsoil from all areas requiring earthwork, perform all cuts as required for new construction, proof roll to identify any residual soft spots, repair subgrade as required to meet compaction requirements, process and install fill as required to reach proper subgrade, and excavate to subgrade elevations specified to accommodate the various types of structures, i.e. footings and foundations, slabs and sidewalks, pavement and driveways, etc. Groundwater, if encountered during deep cut operations, shall be controlled with the use of french drains or drainage swales on the uphill side of cuts or by the use of well points. Dewatering as required for earthwork operations shall be the responsibility of this Contractor. If rock is encountered during this process, or if additional work is required to achieve a suitable subgrade condition, then such additional work shall be performed as directed by the soils engineer employed by the Owner. The Contractor shall be compensated for this work based upon the application of appropriate unit prices for the quantity and type of additional work required or otherwise as provided in the Contract General Conditions. n. It is anticipated that existing on-site subsoils, with the control of moisture content, will be suitable for controlled fill. Should additional material be required to reach proper 2B-3 subgrade, such material shall be provided by the General Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. o. Topsoil for use under new lawns shall be stripped from areas to be graded and stored on site for use by Owner. p. Suitable fill material as required to reach proper subgrade shall be taken from existing on-site subsoils, separated from organically contaminated subsoils, and processed as required to achieve efficient compaction. Fill material unsuitalbe for use under structures may be utilized in fill slopes or in other nonstructural areas requiring fill material. q. Grade to elevations shown on Project Drawings and/or as specified herein. Grades not otherwise indicated shall be uniform levels or slopes between points where elevations are given or between such points and existing finished grades. Abrupt changes in slopes shall be rounded. Grades shall be placed to prevent ponding of water. r. At the completion of his work, the Contractor shall certify that all work in connection with foundations, compacted fills, and other elements of the foundation or other support components are in place at the locations, with proper dimensions and plumb, as shown on the plans and specifications for this project. The Contractor shall further certify that the materials used are of the types, quantity, and quality required by the plans and specifications for the project. s. Excavation and backfilling for Plumbing, Mechanical and Electrical Work is included under their respective sections of Divisions 15 and 16. 2. INSPECTION: a. An independent testing laboratory, approved by the Architect and paid by the Owner, shall have a representative observe proofrolling and all cut and fill operations. He shall inspect the area after all cut material is removed and before filling operations are initiated. After confirming the suitability of the subgrade soils, he shall observe and test the compaction of all filling operations. b. The General Contractor shall provide timely notice to the Architect in advance of all earthwork activities and shall coordinate his schedule with that of the soils engineer so that all required inspections and testing can be performed in an orderly fashion. 3. REQUIREMENTS FOR EXISTING ON-SITE SUBSOILS: a. After topsoil has been removed (but before placement of controlled fill), areas to receive fill shall be proof rolled with a heavily loaded dump truck or other pneumatic roller (minimum 25 tons) to confirm the suitability of the subgrade soils and to identify soft spots. Any areas of unsuitable material that are identified by the independent testing laboratory as contaminated by organic material shall be removed by the contractor and replaced with controlled fill, placed in six (6) to eight (8) inch lifts and compacted to a minimum of 95% of the Standard Proctor Maximum Dry Density in accordance with ASTM D-698. Soft spots may be reworked in place and densified with a very heavy vibratory roller to a minimum of 95% of the Standard Proctor Maximum Dry Density. The moisture content of on-site fill materials shall be maintained within the range of optimum moisture content for these subsoils during placement and compaction. Testing shall be by the Sand Cone Method (ASTM D-1556) at the rate of one test per lift or per day. Upon the correction of unsuitable 2B-4 existing subgrade conditions, the contractor shall then provide suitable fill material as required to reach final subgrade, placed and compacted in the manner described above. On-site soils, except subsoils containing organic material, shall be used as fill material. b. Suitable fill materials shall be taken from areas requiring cut and reworked as required to meet the requirement for structural fill. After final subgrade is reached under areas of cut, subgrade shall be proof rolled and repaired in the same manner as described for existing subgrade under fill. The final foot of subgrade material beneath pavements, building foundations, floor slabs, and site structures in both cut and fill shall be compacted to 98% of Standard Proctor Maximum Dry Density. 4. MISCELLANEOUS REQUIREMENTS: a. Except as specifically noted otherwise, all required grading and subgrade preparation shall extend to virgin subgrade material. Where existing underground structures are indicated to be removed, this contractor shall fill all voids caused by removal and repair subgrade to required elevations for the installation of new work. b. Work within public rights-of-way shall comply with the requirements of the regulatory authority having jurisdiction over the work. c. No concrete shall be placed in footing excavations until the structural engineer has inspected and approved the excavation area for placement of concrete. d. Pea Gravel for use in this project shall be mineral aggregate graded 1/4 inch to 5/8 inch; free of soils or foreign matter. e. Sub-slab stone fill shall be clean mineral aggregate approved by the Architect. Refer to Section 7A – Granular Fill. 5. EXECUTION OF THE WORK: a. Site preparation shall begin with the clearing and stripping of all vegetation and other site obstructions within the area of new construction. The topsoil veneer shall then be removed from area to be graded and stored for use under lawns and seeding. Topsoil shall not be contaminated by subsoil and structural fill shall not be contaminated by topsoil or other organic material. b. Only suitable fill material consisting of existing subsoils properly processed shall be used under structures, sidewalks, parking lots, and driveways. c. Where filling is required, it shall be replaced in lifts, or layers, not exceeding six (6) to eight (8) inches loose thickness, and each layer shall be compacted and tested as outlined above. d. Excavate and/or fill to elevations and dimensions indicated, plus sufficient space to permit erection of forms, shoring, masonry, etc., and the inspection of foundations. Excavation for footings and trenches may be cut to accurate sizes and side forms omitted provided soil is stiff enough to permit concrete to be poured in clean-cut trenches without cave-ins. e. Subgrade preparation under structures within public rights-of-way shall be as required by the regulatory authority having jurisdiction over the work. Such requirements shall take precedence over these specifications wherever they differ. 2B-5 f. Remove completely all interfering existing obstructions within the ground areas to be occupied by new structures and surrounding site improvements. g. Fill excess cuts under footings and foundations with concrete and fill any excess cuts under slabs with properly tamped subgrade material. h. Protect the bottoms of excavation from frost. Shore and brace excavation, and if necessary, provide sheet piling to prevent cave-ins. Remove the shoring and piling before backfilling is completed, but not until permanent supports are in place. i. The site shall be kept properly graded during the course of construction to promote rapid drainage of rainwater. Water that accumulates in footing excavations shall be immediately and properly removed. Ground shall be pitched around structures to prevent water from running into the excavated areas. Furnish all pumping equipment required to keep excavated spaces free of water during construction. Water shall not be conducted onto adjacent property. j. Excavated materials unsuitable for fill or backfill and excess excavated materials (except topsoil) shall be removed from the site by this contractor and proper legal disposition made thereof. Remove debris from excavations before backfilling; do not backfill against foundation or retaining walls until directed by Architect. k. Upon completion of the project, the Contractor shall be responsible for the removal of all temporary entrances constructed under the above and the return of all areas of the site involved in construction to their former or final condition, as well as the repair of any other areas damaged during construction. 2C-1 SECTION 2C – SITE DRAINAGE 1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: a. Refer to Project Drawings for location, types, installation requirements, and quantity of storm water and ground water drainage system work required. Include all labor, materials, and equipment as required to install foundation subdrains, downspout extensions, and related work as shown on Project Drawings and/or as specified herein. b. Refer to the following listed sections of specifications for additional requirements and related work affecting work specified herein: Section 1A – Description of the Work Section 1C– Sequence of Work Section 1E – Existing Utilities Section 1F – Unforeseen Conditions Section 1G – Rock Excavation Section 2B – Earthwork and Site Preparation Section 2D – Shoring Section 7A – Granular Fill Section 7C – Foundation Waterproofing c. This Contractor shall be responsible for the layout of all storm drainage system components and the coordination of the storm drainage system with other subsurface work, including required separations. Field elevations and grade slopes shall be verified prior to any installation work, and all conflicts reported to the Architect or his Consulting Engineer. Work shall not begin until all conflicts are resolved. 2. MATERIALS: a. Pipe for foundation subdrains shall be four (4) inch diameter ABS or PVC flexible perforated plastic pipe. b. Filter fabric shall be similar and equal to Mirafi No 140 NL non-woven geotextile drainage fabric. c. Drainage medium shall be as specified in Section 7A – Granular Fill. d. Pipe extensions from designated roof drains, area drains, and extensions from foundation subdrains shall be schedule 40 PVC pipe and fittings with PVC cemented joints, four (4) inch, six (6) inch, or eight (8) inch diameter as noted on drawings. 3. EXECUTION: a. Upon the completion of Foundation Waterproofing, this contractor shall install foundation subdrains in a bed of drainage medium separated from earth backfill by continuous filter fabric. Drainage medium shall surround subdrains and extend vertically to subgrade under concrete slabs or to within twelve inches (12”) of finished grade. Width of drainage medium shall be not less than eight inches (8”). b. Provide continuous layer of filter fabric between drainage medium and earth backfill at all foundation subdrains. c. Unperforated drain line extensions from roof drains, terrace drains, and extensions 2C-2 from foundation subdrains shall be extended to catch basins or grade as indicated on Project Drawings. Piping shall have cemented joints. Provide uniform pitch for proper drainage. Provide clean-outs, downspout adapters, and other devices as indicated. d. After foundation subdrains and drain line extensions are inspected and approved by the Architect, drainage medium and filter fabric shall be installed to specified height and compacted to 95% Standard Procter unless specifically noted otherwise. Trenches and drain line extensions shall be filled and compacted to 95% Standard Procter. e. The Contractor shall protect all work and take the necessary precautions to prohibit debris, soil, trash or sediment from entering the system. 2D-1 SECTION 2D – SHORING 1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: a. Refer to Project Drawings for location, type, and quantity of work requiring temporary shoring or bracing. The Contractor shall be responsible for furnishing and installing all temporary shoring and/or bracing as required to support earth banks during trenching and/or excavation work, as required to support/protect new construction until permanent supports and/or bracing is in place, and otherwise as required until new construction is capable of sustaining various applied earth pressures or structural loads, both static and dynamic. b. Refer to the following listed Sections of Specifications for additional requirements and related work affecting work specified herein: Section 1A – Description of the Work Section 2B – Earthwork and Site Preparation Section 3A – Cast-In-Place Concrete Section 4A – Unit Masonry Division 15 – Mechanical (Sections as applicable) Division 16 – Electrical (Sections as applicable) c. The Contractor under this Section of the Specifications shall include all timbers, cribbing, needles, supports, excavation work, concrete and similar materials as required for the proper installation of his work. d. The design of temporary bracing, shoring and sheeting shall be the responsibility of the contractor. Shoring and sheeting shall meet the requirements of the Associated General Contractor’s Manual of Accident Prevention and OSHA, Part 1926, Subpart P-Excavation. e. All shored trenches shall be braced at intervals as close as necessary for safety, but in no case more than five (5) feet apart. Shoring and sheeting for trenches under eight (8) feet deep shall be of timbers two inches (2”) thick and for deeper trenches three inches (3”) thick. f. In addition to the Safety Provisions specified herein, the Contractor shall assume responsibility for and comply with the Department of Labor’s Safety and Health Regulations for construction promulgated under the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (Part 1926 subpart P – Excavation, Trenching and Shoring). Where the requirements of these acts are in excess of those requirements specified, the requirements of these acts shall govern. Should the Plans and/or Specifications require material or methods in conflict with the Safety and Health Regulations, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to request any changes which may be necessary. 2. PRODUCTS: a. Timbers, cribbing, needles, supports, concrete, excavation work and similar materials as required for the installation of shoring and bracing shall be as required by the applicable Sections of these Specifications – otherwise as required to perform the function intended. 2D-2 3. EXECUTION: a. During excavation, material suitable for backfilling shall be piled in an orderly manner a sufficient distance from the banks of the trench to avoid overloading, prevent slides or cave-ins, and to provide adequate access to the work. The Contractor shall comply with the "Rules and Regulations Governing the Construction Industry" as promulgated for the Health, Safety, and General Welfare of Employees by the Commissioner of Labor under General Statutes of North Carolina, Chapter 95-11. Scope as follows: "The Rules and Regulations shall apply to Trenching, Excavation, Demolition, Building Construction Work, and all operations pertaining thereto." Particular reference is made to the following paragraphs of Article XXI, entitled "Excavations and Trenches": 1. Where stable material is encountered in excavations over five (5) feet in depth, the side of the excavations shall be shored or braced unless the sides are sufficiently sloped to eliminate all possibility of a cave-in. 2. Where unstable material is encountered in excavations over five (5) feet in depth, the sides shall be shored or sheet piled unless the sides are sloped sufficiently to eliminate all possibility of a cave-in. 3. Where workmen are engaged near the edge of the excavation, undercutting of bank or walls is prohibited unless adequately protected. 4. Materials which are excavated shall be placed so that the base of the pile is not less than two feet (2') from the edge of the excavation. 5. Proper and adequate means of egress shall be provided at all times from all excavations and trenches; either by ramps, stairways or ladders. These means of egress shall conform to rules governing ramps, stairways, and ladders and located so as to be accessible to workmen at all times." b. Other shoring and/or bracing shall be as required herein and/or as required under specific Sections of these Specifications. 2E-1 SECTION 2E – GROUND TERMITE CONTROL 1. REQUIREMENTS: a. Refer to Project Drawings for location, area, and general configuration of areas requiring ground termite control treatment. Provide treatment at all footings and foundation walls and under all floor slabs of new construction with an approved chemical solution in accordance with the requirements of the North Carolina Department of Agriculture, Structural Pest Control Division. b. Refer to the following listed sections of Specifications for additional requirements and related work affecting work specified herein: Section 1A – Description of the Work Section 1T – Submittals c. Pest Control Subcontractor and applicators shall be properly licensed by the State of North Carolina, and all material all be stored, used, handled, and protected in strict accordance with the requirements of the licensing agency. d. Prior to the execution of this work, the pest control subcontractor shall submit to the Architect for approval complete descriptive literature including manufacturer's recommendations for the proposed treatment. Submittals shall include name of chemicals, concentrations, method and rate of application, and certifications that proposed treatment is acceptable for use as specified herein. No treatment shall be allowed until submittal data has been approved by the Architect. e. Pest Control Operator shall guarantee this work for a period of five (5) years from the date of final acceptance of the project with annual inspections to insure that no alterations have been made to the building which would make it vulnerable to termite attack. f. If a bond for treatment is required, the cost of the bond shall be borne by the General Contractor. 2. MATERIALS: a. Chemicals for termiticide shall be those acceptable to the Division of Forest Insect Research, Forest Service, United States Department of Agriculture; or those registered with the Pesticide Regulation Section, Plant Pest Control Branch, Agricultural Research Service, United States Department of Agriculture, under the Federal Insecticide, Fungicide, and Rodenticide Act, for use as termite toxicant for which prolonged and sustained effectiveness may be anticipated. Approved chemicals shall be further limited to those approved by the United States Environmental Protection Agency and the Pest Control Division of the North Carolina Department of Agriculture. 3. EXECUTION OF THE WORK: a. Toxicant concentrations and rates and methods of application for the areas to be treated shall be as recommended by the chemical manufacturer on approved submitted data. 2E-2 b. Treat the soil along inside of the main foundation wall; the entire perimeter of all multiple masonry chimney bases, pillars, pilasters, and piers; and both sides of partition or inner walls with a termiticide. If the footing is exposed, apply the termiticide to the soil adjacent to the footing. c. After the building or structure has been completed and the excavation filled and leveled, so that the final grade has been reached along the outside of the main foundation wall, trench and treat the soil adjacent to, along and not more than eight (8) inches from, the outside of the main foundation wall with a termiticide. If the footing is exposed, apply the termiticide to the soil adjacent to the footing. d. Apply a termiticide to all voids of unit masonry foundation walls, piers, pillars, pilasters, chimneys, and other supporting or attached unit masonry structures, except where voids are to be capped with a solid masonry cap consisting of solid concrete or masonry. The termiticide shall be applied to voids therein below the level of application. e. Apply a termiticide to soil within three feet of the main foundation, under slabs, such as patios, walkways, driveways, terraces, gutters, etc., attached to the building. The termiticide shall be applied before slab is poured, but after fill material has been spread. f. Apply an over-all treatment of a termiticide under the entire surface of floor slabs, such as basements, porches, entrance platforms, garages, carports, breezeways, sun rooms, etc. The termiticide shall be applied before slab is poured but after fill material has been spread. g. In addition to treatment outlined above, apply a termiticide to and around all critical areas, such as expansion and construction joints, electrical conduits, air conditioning vents, heating and plumbing outlets, penetration of the slab or floor. h. Treatment shall not be made when the soil or fill is excessively wet or immediately after heavy rains, to avoid surface flow of the termiticide from the application site. Unless the treatment areas are to be immediately covered, precautions shall be taken to prevent disturbance of the treatment by human or animal contact with the treated surface. 3A-1 DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE SECTION 3A – CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE 1. GENERAL: a. Refer to Project Drawings for location, type, and quantity of concrete work required for New Construction. Furnish, install and finish all concrete work as required for designated site structures, terraces, ramps, equipment pads, footings, foundations, aprons, subslabs, floor slabs, and elevated slabs as illustrated on Project Drawings and/or as specified herein. b. Refer to the following listed sections of specifications for additional requirements and related work affecting work specified herein. Section 1A – Description of the Work Section 1N – Testing Services Section 5C – Permanent Concrete Forms Section 6A – Rough Carpentry Section 7A – Granular Fill Section 7B – Vapor Barrier c. All concrete work shall comply with the Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings, ACI 301 and with the Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete, ACI 318-08. d. "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Building (ACI 301-08)" published by the American Concrete Institute is hereby made a part of this specification to the same extent as if bound herein. ACI 301-08 shall be amended, supplemented, or deleted as required by the following paragraphs and as such constitutes the specifications for this project. The Contractor shall obtain and keep in the field office at all times one copy of "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings (ACI 301-08) with selected ACI and ASTM References." SP-15. This publication may be ordered from American Concrete Institute, Post Office Box 9094, Farmington Hills, Michigan 48333. e. Contractor shall inform the Architect of concrete placing schedule in advance of such operations; and not less than 36 hours prior to placing to allow sufficient time to observe footings, formwork, and reinforcing steel. Inspection of reinforcing steel will be made only when section to be placed is completely ready. f. All reinforcing steel is to be tied to prevent displacement during concrete placement. g. All intersecting beams, walls and footings shall have corner bars. h. Unless otherwise noted, slabs on grade shall be four (4) inches thick, reinforced at mid depth with 6 x 6 – W1.4 x W1.4 welded wire fabric. i. Unless otherwise noted, mechanical equipment slabs on grade shall be 6 inches thick, reinforced at mid depth with # 4 diameter rebars at 12 inch centers each way. 3A-2 2. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS - Section 1 Slabs: a. Expansion Joint Fillers where indicated or required shall be asphalt-impregnated fiberboard conforming to ASTM D 1751 for interior work. The filler shall be full width and depth of concrete section and shall be ½” thick where thickness is not noted on drawings. b. Except as otherwise shown on project drawings, keyed construction joints for slabs on grade shall be placed on centerlines of columns and/or as shown on drawings, but no further apart than 15 feet in either direction. Joints shall be "Tongue and Groove Type", Type B, full slab depth, 24 gauge galvanized steel, as manufactured by Key Kold, Inc., Heckmann, Burke, or approved equal. Provide galvanized steel stakes at maximum 2"-0' spacing. c. Provide underslab fill of 4" of crushed stone, graded 3/4 to 1-1/2 as specified in Section 7A – Granular Fill. d. Furnish and install over drainage fill a dampproofing membrane as specified in Section 7B - Vapor Barrier. Lap edges 8". Avoid tearing. Where vapor barrier is punctured by stakes bracing edge forms, seal around puncture with non-setting mastic. Where vapor barrier is punctured otherwise, patch over barrier, extending beyond the hole 4" on all sides. Seal vapor barrier continuously at all laps and patches with roofing cement or adhesive acceptable to manufacturer of barrier. Extend vapor barrier up wall to within 1/2" of surface of slab. Testing: a. Concrete batch tickets shall be furnished to the Designer for confirmation of concrete mix and strength. Concrete testing shall be at the discretion of the Owner. b. The testing agency shall be an independent testing laboratory paid by the Owner and approved by the Architect or Engineer. The testing agency shall be responsible for making, handling, and curing the specimens in addition to testing the concrete. Reports shall be sent to the Owner, the Architect, and the Contractor. c. Five cylinders shall be made from each sample. Two shall be tested at 7 days and two at 28 days. If 28 day tests do not comply with specifications, additional testing will be performed at the Contractor's expense as provided by the General Conditions of the Contract. d. The testing agency as the Owner's representative shall be present whenever concrete is being placed and shall reject any concrete that does not meet these specifications. e. If additional testing, curing, or other measures are required to confirm or verify the strength of any concrete in question, cost shall be paid by the contractor. f. Design mix for each type of concrete used must be submitted by the Contractor as soon as possible to avoid delay of the beginning of the project. Submittal shall be in accordance with 16.7.3 and 3.8. Cost of preparing and testing mix shall be paid by the Contractor. Approval of design mix by the Engineer shall not in any way relieve the Contractor from meeting all requirements of these specifications. 3A-3 3. FORMWORK AND FORMWORK ACCESSORIES - Section 2: Materials: a. Except as otherwise specified, ACI 301 to apply. Refer to Section 2. b. The use of fly ash is not permitted without written permission of the Architect or Engineer. Where permitted, certification must be submitted that fly ash conforms to ASTM C 618, Class F. Substitute 1 pound of Portland Cement with 1.2 pounds of fly ash. A maximum of 20% substitution by weight is allowed. c. Admixtures: Any admixture shall be manufactured by a firm which has had at least three (3) years of field experience with the basic product. Final approval of any admixture shall be made by the Engineer. Calcium chloride, or admixtures containing more than 0.1% chloride ions will not be permitted. Formwork: a. Where earth will permit excavation and placing of concrete to accurate dimensions without cave-ins, side forms of footings may be omitted. b. Forms supporting beams, slabs, and other structural members shall not be removed or stripped until concrete has reached at least 75% of the specified strength, unless the structure is shored. c. No superimposed loads shall be placed on beams, slabs, etc. until concrete has reached 75% of full specified strength unless the structure is shored. Joints and Embedded Items: a. No aluminum conduit or other aluminum items shall be embedded in concrete. b. If, in the judgment of the Engineer, embedded items are located or grouped in a manner that will weaken the structure, the Contractor shall take necessary corrective steps. 4. REINFORCEMENT AND REINFORCEMENT SUPPORTS - Section 3 Reinforcement: a. Typical reinforcing steel shall conform to ASTM A615, grade 60. Welded bars shall conform to ASTM A706 and epoxy coated bars shall conform to ASTM A775. b. Welded wire fabric shall conform to ASTM A185. Minimum size shall be 6/6 x W1.4/W1.4 except as specifically noted otherwise. Welded wire fabric shall be furnished in sheets only. c. Unless otherwise noted, lap all reinforcement splices 48 diameters or 2’-6” minimum. 3A-4 d. All fabrication shall be done in the shop in accordance with ACI 318. Field bending shall be done only with approval of the Engineer. e. Welded wire fabric splices shall be lapped at least 2 crosswires. f. Do not "tack weld" reinforcing steel. g. Submit shop drawings for all reinforcing steel including a complete List of Accessories, bending diagrams, and placing details for approval. No fabrication shall take place prior to approval of shop drawings. 5. CONCRETE MIXTURES - Section 4 Proportioning: a. The concrete compressive strength at 28 days (fc') shall be either 3,000 PSI or 4,000 PSI as designated on the Project Drawings. Where strength is not designated, fc' = 3,000 PSI at 28 days. b. Water/cement ratio shall not exceed 0.53 by weight. c. All concrete shall be air entrained. d. Proportioning shall be by Trial Mix. Materials used for design mix shall be exactly the same as those to be used on the project. Data submitted for approval shall have been prepared by an independent testing laboratory within 9 months of submission date. Submit water/cement versus strength curves. 6. HANDLING, PLACING, AND CONSTRUCTING - Section 5 Production of Concrete: a. No more than one hour shall elapse from the time a concrete truck is loaded at the plant and the concrete is placed in its final position. b. No concrete shall be placed when the temperature of the concrete at time of placement is more than 90 degrees F., or less than 55 degrees F. Placing: a. Concrete shall be deposited vertically, using chutes, elephant trunks, or other suitable devices to limit the free fall to six feet. Care shall be taken to avoid segregation caused by dropping concrete through reinforcing steel or other embedded items. b. No concrete shall be placed under water. c. No concrete shall be placed when the ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees Fahrenheit or when freezing temperatures are expected within 24 hours. For winter concreting, protective measures shall be incorporated per ACI 301 to prevent damage to concrete and are subject to approval of the Engineer. 3A-5 Repair of Surface Defects: a. If in the opinion of the Architect or Engineer, improper consolidation is too extensive or if the structure appears weakened by the voids, complete removal of the concrete in question will be required. b. Where patching is required or permitted due to honeycomb or other defects, an approved bonding agent shall be applied to the hardened concrete in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, prior to patching with a stiff concrete mix. Finishing Formed Surfaces: All concrete exposed to public view, interior or exterior, shall be treated as Architectural concrete and shall receive a grout cleaned finish. All concrete not exposed may receive a rough finish. Curing and Protection: Submit curing method for approval. If curing compound is to be used in areas to receive tile, terrazzo, or any topping to be bonded to the slab, compound shall be such as not to prevent bond or adhesion to concrete surface. 7. ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE - Section 6 Architectural Concrete: All concrete exposed to public view shall be considered Architectural concrete. See Architectural drawings for details of decorative indentations cast in concrete or for special textures. 3B-1 SECTION 3B – GYPSUM CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT 1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: a. Refer to Project Drawings for location, quantity, and installation requirements affecting work specified herein. Include all labor, materials and equipment for the installation of gypsum cement underlayment over designated wood framed floor/ceiling systems with plywood subfloors. b. Refer to the following listed Sections of Specifications for related work affecting work specified herein. Section 1A – Description of the Work Section 1K – Temporary Heating & Ventilation Section 1L – Fire Resistance Requirements Section 1T – Submittals Section 1U – Storage and Protection Section 6A – Rough Carpentry c. The following listed standards are incorporated by reference and made a part of this specification to the same extent as if bound herein: 1. ASTM E336 and E1007 – Field Sound Transmission Class (F-STC), Field Impact Insulation Class (F-IIC). 2. ASTM E 90 and E492 – Sound Transmission Class (STC), Impact Insulation Class (IIC). 3. ASTM C472M – Compressive Strength of Gypsum Concrete. 4. ASTM F2170 – Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete Floor Slab. 5. ASTM F2419 – Standard Test Method for Installation of Thick Poured Gypsum Concrete and Preparation of Surface to Receive Resilient Flooring. d. Specified work shall be furnished and installed only by qualified subcontractors experienced in the application of specified products and approved by the product manufacturer. e. The installed gypsum cement underlayment system shall meet or exceed the following listed requirements: 1. Compressive Strength – Not less than 3,200 PSI when tested in accordance with ASTM C-472M. 2. Density – Not less than 115 pounds per cubic foot. 3. Sound Transmission – 50 STC minimum when tested in accordance with ASTM E90 and E336. 4. Impact Insulation – 50 11C minimum when tested in accordance with ASTM E492 and E1007. f. Materials shall be delivered, stored and handled in their original unopened packages and protected from damage and exposure to adverse environmental conditions. Damaged or deteriorated materials shall be removed from the project. g. Prior to application, all substrates shall be inspected to confirm that they are clean and suitable for the application of the specified underlayment system. Work shall not proceed until substrates are approved. 3B-2 h. Gypsum cement underlayment shall not be installed until the building is enclosed, adequate ventilation is provided to control humidity, and substrates can be maintained at a temperature of not less than 50º F nor more than 80º F. 2. MATERIALS: a. Products specified are as manufactured by Maxxon Corporation. Similar and equal products by USG Corporation, Ardex, or approved equal, shall be approved for use on this project when submitted with complete descriptive and technical product information demonstrating product equality. The Architect shall be the sole judge of product equality. b. Underlayment: Gypsum-cement based, self-leveling product that can be applied in a uniform thickness of not less than ¾ inch over wood substrates to not more than 1 ½ inches and that can be feathered at edges to meet adjacent floor surfaces. c. Cement Binder: Gypsum or blended gypsum cement as defined by ASTM C-219. d. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to ¼ inch; or coarse sand as recommended by underlayment manufacturer. e. Water: Potable and at a temperature of not more than 70º F. f. Reinforcement: Galvanized metal lath or other corrosion-resistant reinforcement as recommended in writing by the underlayment manufacturer. g. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended in writing for substrate conditions and application indicated. h. Sealer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended in writing for specified floor coverings. 3. EXECUTION OF THE WORK: a. Prepare and clean substrate according to manufacturer’s written instruction. Mechanically fasten loose boards and/or panels to eliminate movement and squeaks. Fill substrate voids as required to prevent underlayment from leaking. b. After substrate preparation, test substrate for adhesion with underlayment. c. Apply primer over prepared substrate at manufacturer’s recommended spreading rate. d. Mix and apply underlayment components according to manufacturer’s written instructions and as required to produce a uniform, 1.5 inch thick, level and smooth surface. e. Block out as required for membrane waterproofing under shower stalls. f. Provide and maintain correct environmental conditions during curing and protect underlayment from damage until the application of specified floor finishes. 4A-1 DIVISION 4 – MASONRY SECTION 4A – UNIT MASONRY 1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: a. Refer to Project Drawings for location, quantity, type and installation requirements for masonry construction required under this Section of the Specifications. Include all labor, materials, equipment and accessories as required for the installation of brick and concrete masonry cavity walls, the installation of masonry veneers over structural wood stud framing, the installation of interior concrete masonry partitions, and the closing/infill of designated openings in existing masonry. b. Refer to the following listed sections of specifications for related work affecting work specified herein: Section 1A – Description of the Work Section 1L – Fire Resistance Requirements Section 1N – Testing Services Section 1T – Submittals Section 3A- Cast-In-Place Concrete Section 4B – Mortar and Grout Section 5A – Structural Steel Section 5B – Miscellaneous Iron & Steel Section 7C – Foundation Waterproofing Section 7D – Building Insulation Section 7C – Foundation Waterproofing Section 7H – Flashing and Sheet Metal Section 8B – Hollow Metal Doors and Frames c. All reinforced masonry work shall comply with the Specifications for Masonry Structures, ACI 530.1-95 and the Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures, ACI 530-95. d. "Specification for Masonry Structures (ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602) - 2008 Edition" published by the American Concrete Institute is hereby made a part of this specification to the same extent as if bound herein. ACI 530.1-2008 shall be amended, supplemented, or deleted as required by the following paragraphs and as such constitutes the Masonry Specification for this project. The contractor shall obtain and keep in the field office at all times one copy of "Specification for Masonry Structures (ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602)-2008 Edition”. This publication may be ordered from American Concrete Institute, 22400 West Seven Mile Road, Detroit, Michigan 48219. e. Add Item 1.1C.6 and 1.1C.7 under Part 1-General, Section 1.1 – Summary, to read as follows: 1.1C.6 Refer to Section 1N - Testing Services, to Section 4D - Mortar and Grout, to Division 5 – Metals (all Sections), to Section 7D Building Insulation, to Section 7H – Flashing and Sheet Metal and to Section 8B – Hollow Metal Doors and Frames for work required of this contractor in conjunction with this section of the specifications. 1.1C.7 Only those portions of ACI 350.1-2008 Edition pertaining to materials, products, or assemblies specified herein and/or illustrated on project drawings shall be a part of this specification. 4A-2 f. Add the following to Paragraph "A" under Part 1 - General, Section 1.4 - System Description: Minimum compressive strength for concrete block masonry (F'm) shall be 1,500 PSI. Minimum compressive strength for brick masonry (F'm) shall be 1,500 PSI. g. Add the following to Paragraph "B" under Part 1 - General, Section 1.4 - System Description: Determination of the compressive strength for each wythe of masonry shall be by the "unit strength method". h. Add the following to Paragraph "B" under Part 1 - General, Section 1.5 - Submittals: Submittals shall be required in quadruplicate for Items 2, 3.b, 4, 5, 6, and 7. i. Amend Paragraph "A.1" under Part 1 - General, Section 1.6 - Quality Assurance, to include the following provisions: Field testing services shall be at the discretion of the Owner. The cost of failed tests shall be paid by the Contractor. The cost of testing services and certifications associated with required submittals to prove product/material compliance shall be paid by the Contractor. j. Amend Paragraph "A.3" under Part 1 - General, Section 1.6 - Quality Assurance, to include the following provisions: The Contractor shall prepare daily field reports during the course of masonry work verifying materials on site, method of storage, daily usage and installation, and general observations of the masonry work. Daily field reports shall include minimum and maximum temperatures and other pertinent climatological data affecting the work. k. Amend Paragraph "B" under Part 1- General, Section 1.6 - Quality Assurance, to include the following provisions: Sample wall panels of each wall type (i.e. single wythe, composite, cavity wall, etc.) shall be required of the Contractor prior to beginning any masonry work. Each wall panel type shall illustrate as appropriate the entire wall section including approved facing material, back-up masonry, mortar joint, bond, joint reinforcement, thru-wall flashing, anchorage, insulation installation, and workmanship. Sample wall panels shall be cleaned utilizing the contractor's proposed cleaning methods. No masonry work shall start until the Architect has approved each sample panel, after which the finished work shall match the approved panel. The approved sample panels may be constructed in place, identified, and remain in place as a part of the finished work, all subject to the approval of the Architect. 4A-3 2. PRODUCTS: a. Delete Section 2.1 - Mortar Materials and 2.2 Grout Materials under Part 2 - Products. Mortar and Grout Materials shall be as specified in Section 4B - Mortar and Grout. b. Refer to Section 2.3 - Masonry Materials under Part 2- Products. Delete Paragraphs "C" and "D". Amend Paragraph "A" to include the following provisions: Concrete Masonry Units of the width indicated shall be hollow Load-Bearing, Grade N, Type 1. All concrete masonry units shall be lightweight. Furnish U.L. Listed Units where indicated and/or required. Amend Paragraph "B" to include the following provisions: New face brick shall match existing brick. Refer to Project Drawings for locations of masonry. c. Refer to Section 2.4 - Reinforcement and Metal Accessories under Part 2 - Products. Amend Paragraph "B" to include the following provisions: Standard truss design masonry reinforcing at composite or cavity wall construction shall be "Blok-Trus" as manufactured by AA Wire Products Company, "Lox-All" as manufactured by Cumberland Corporation, "Dur-O-Wall" as manufactured by Dur-O-Wall National, Incorporated, or approved equal. Reinforcement shall be composed of No. 9 deformed steel side rods and No. 9 steel cross rods. Masonry wall anchors at load-bearing wood stud walls shall be similar and equal to Heckmann Building Products, Inc. No. 260 Corrugated Wall Tie, 16 Gage and hot dip galvanized. Corrugated metal ties for abutting masonry shall be not less than 7/8 inch wide, of sheet metal not lighter than 16 gauge, and not less than six (6) inches in length. Finish of all components shall be galvanized. Fasteners shall be stainless steel. d. Refer to Section 2.4 Reinforcement and Metal Accessories under Part 2 - Products. Amend Paragraph "E" to include the following provisions: All joint reinforcement, ties, and anchors shall be galvanized. e. Refer to Section 2.5 Accessories under Part 2 - Products. Amend Paragraphs "A" and "B" to include the following provisions: Contraction and Expansion joint assemblies shall be as illustrated on project drawings. If not illustrated, place contraction and expansion joint assemblies vertically in all masonry wall assemblies not to exceed 30’-0” centers, maximum spacing. Placement of contraction and expansion joints shall be subject to Architect’s approval. 4A-4 f. Refer to Section 2.5 Accessories under Part 2 - Products. Amend Paragraph "C" to include the following provisions: Clean masonry only with an approved cleaning solution applied with a brush, starting at the top of the wall. Approved cleaning solutions are as follows: Sure-Klean 600, Vanatrol, Superior 800, or approved equal. Approved cleaners shall be composed primarily of detergents, wetting agents, buffering agents, and a maximum of 10% muriatic acid. The use of any of the above cleaning agents shall first be approved in writing by the manufacturer of the masonry being cleaned and the Architect. The concentration, method of application of the cleaning solution, and method of scraping shall be as outlined on the container by the manufacturer. Acid solutions shall not exceed 10%. g. Delete Section 2.6 - Mixing under Part 2- Products. Requirements for Mortar and Grout shall be as specified in Section 4B - Mortar and Grout. 3. EXECUTION OF THE WORK: a. Refer to Section 3.1 - Inspection under Part 3- Execution. Amend Paragraph "A" to include the following provisions: Foundation tolerances shall be field verified by registered surveyor, the cost of which shall be paid by the contractor. b. Refer to Section 3.3 - Masonry Erection under Part 3- Execution. Amend Paragraph "A" to include the following provisions: Concrete masonry units shall be laid up in running (stretcher) bond with horizontal joints at eight (8) inch centers, vertical spacing except as required to match existing adjacent coursing. Metal joint reinforcement shall be placed 16 inches on center in typical masonry walls and 8 inches on center at two courses immediately below sills and above lintels. Joint reinforcement shall be 2" less in width than the nominal thickness of the wall, lapped sufficiently at splices to insure continuity, and corners shall be cut and bent as required. Walls of brick masonry shall be laid-up to match the coursing of existing adjoining work, that being every third horizontal joint at approximately eight (8) inch centers. Facing brick at concrete walls and/or veneer walls, masonry cavity walls and/or composite walls shall be laid-up in running (stretcher) bond, except where special coursing (i.e. soldiers, sailors, rowlocks, special shapes, etc.) is indicated or required. Inner and outer wythes of cavity walls and composite walls shall be joined with horizontal joint reinforcement at 16" on center in typical masonry walls and at 8" on center immediately below sills and above lintels. Joint reinforcement shall be 2" less in width than the nominal thickness of the wall, lapped sufficiently at splices to insure continuity, and corners shall be cut and bent as required. Facing brick at wood stud walls shall be secured by veneer anchors at 16” centers horizontal spacing and 24” centers vertical spacing. Face veneers shall be reinforced with horizontal joint reinforcement at 16” centers, 4A-5 vertical spacing. Joint reinforcement shall be 2” less in width than the nominal thickness of the masonry veneer. c. Refer to Section 3.8 - Cleaning under Part 3- Execution. Amend Paragraph "A" to include the following provisions: 1. While laying brick and concrete masonry units, good workmanship and job house keeping practices shall be used so as to minimize the need for cleaning the finished work. Protect the base of the wall from mud splashes and mortar droppings. Protect the wall by setting scaffolds so that mortar is not deflected onto the wall, and at the end of each work day set the scaffolding boards so that they do not deflect rainfall onto newly laid masonry. 2. The block or brick laying technique shall be such that mortar does not run down the face of the wall, or smear the mortar onto the face of the unit. 3. After the joints are tooled, cut off mortar tailings with the trowel and brush excess mortar burrs and dust from the face of the masonry. Do not bag or sack the wall, but use a bricklayer's brush made with medium soft hair. 4. Remove all large mortar particles with a hardwood scraper. 5. If after using the above outlined techniques, additional cleaning of the walls is found necessary, allow the walls to cure one month prior to initiating further cleaning processes. 6. Saturate the wall with clean water. The wall shall be thoroughly saturated prior to and at the time the cleaning solution is applied. 7. Clean the wall only with an approved cleaning solution applied with a brush, starting at the top of the wall. Approved cleaning solutions are as follows: Sure-Klean 600, Vanatrol, Superior 800, or approved equal. Approved cleaners shall be composed primarily of detergents, wetting agents, buffering agents, and a maximum of 10% muriatic acid. The use of any of the above cleaning agents shall first be approved in writing by the manufacturer of the brick being cleaned and the Architect. The concentration, method of application of the cleaning solution, and method of scraping shall be as outlined on the container by the manufacturer. 8. High pressure water and sandblasting shall not be used for cleaning except with the recommendation of the brick manufacturer, and the written approval of the Architect. 9. Immediately after cleaning a small area, the wall shall be rinsed thoroughly with water. 10. Protect adjacent surfaces and materials during brick cleaning operation. 11. After the walls are cleaned, take necessary precautions to insure that other contractors and subcontractors do not damage or soil the walls. Mud protection around the base of walls shall be left in place until the final grading work is done and permanent ground cover established. d. Add Section 3.9 - Miscellaneous Provisions under Part 3- Execution. Include the following provisions: 1. All hollow metal doors jambs in masonry walls shall be anchored to adjoining construction and filled solidly with grout as wall is being laid up. 4A-6 2. Provide reinforced concrete block lintels or steel lintels over square head interior and exterior openings as required or illustrated. Provide 8" bearings at ends or reinforced lintels, unless otherwise specifically noted. 3. Where flashing is laid, in, on or against masonry, the surface of the masonry shall be smooth and free from projections which might puncture the flashing material. Weep holes spaced 18" to 24" on center shall be provided in the head joints at the bottom of the first course immediately above all flashing material, including lintels above openings in exterior walls, the profiles of which perform the same function as flashing. 4. All joints shall be 3/8" uniform thickness, except as required to match existing joint work. 5. To avoid inadvertently "Banding" of the facing brick, every 30 units of brick shall be taken from at least 3 separate packs (10 per pack) and mixed together at any given time during the laying operation. 4B-1 SECTION 4B – MORTAR AND GROUT 1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: a. Refer to Project Drawings for location, quantity, and type of masonry construction required. Mortar as specified herein shall be used for all unit masonry. Masonry cells indicated to be filled shall be filled with grout as specified herein. b. Refer to the following listed sections of specifications for related work affecting work specified herein: Section 1A – Description of the Work Section 1N – Testing Services Section 4A – Unit Masonry c. Masonry Mortars shall comply with the requirements of ASTM C-270 "Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry" except as specifically noted otherwise. d. Grout shall comply with the requirements of ASTM C-476 "Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry". e. "Specification for Masonry Structures (ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602) - 2008 Edition" published by the American Concrete Institute is hereby made a part of this specification to the same extent as if bound herein. ACI 530.1-2008 shall be amended, supplemented, or deleted as required by the following paragraphs and as such constitutes the Mortar and Grout Specification for this project. The contractor shall obtain and keep in the field office at all times one copy of "Specification for Masonry Structures (ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602)-2008 Edition". This publication may be ordered from American Concrete Institute, 22400 West Seven Mile Road, Detroit, Michigan 48219. f. Revise Section 1.1 - Summary under Part 1 - General to include the following provisions: The application of ACI 350.1-2008 as it relates to this section of work shall be limited to the requirements for masonry mortars and grout. g. Add the following to Paragraph "B" under Part 1 - General, Section 1.5 - Submittals: Submittals shall be required in quadruplicate for Items 1, 2.a, and 3.a. h. Amend Paragraph "A.1" under Part 1 - General, Section 1.6 - Quality Assurance, to include the following provisions: Except as otherwise indicated or required, Field Testing Services shall be at the discretion of the Owner. The cost of failed tests shall be paid by the Contractor. The cost of testing services and certification associated with required submittals to prove product/material compliance shall be paid by the Contractor. 2. PRODUCTS: a. Refer to Paragraph "A" under Part 2 - Products, Section 2.1 - Mortar Materials. 4B-2 Add the following: 1. Mortar for concrete masonry shall be type "S" mortar with a compressive strength of 1,800 PSI minimum at 28 days when tested in accordance with ASTM C-270. 2. Refer to Paragraph 4.1.4 under Section 2 - Materials of ASTM C-270. Calcium chloride may not be used as an admixture. Anti-freeze compounds, accelerators, or retarders shall be subject to the specific approval of the Architect before they are allowed. 3. Mortar shall be portland cement lime (PCL) mortar, either pre-packaged or job mixed. 4. Mortar may be proportioned either by the Proportion Specification method or the Property Specification method as described by ASTM C-270. The requirements of the two methods shall not be mixed. 5. The Contractor shall provide certification that the masonry mortar meets the requirements of ASTM C-270. b. Refer to Paragraph "A" under Part 2 - Products, Section 2.2 - Grout Materials. Add the following: Grout may be either "fine" or "course" to the extent that the requirements of Table 5 - Grout Space Requirements can be satisfied. c. Mix mortar in compliance with Paragraph "A" under Part 2 - Products, Section 2.6 - Mixing. d. Mix grout in compliance with Paragraph "B" under Part 2 - Products - Section 2.6 - Mixing. Tests for grout slump shall be at the discretion of the Owner. 3. EXECUTION OF THE WORK: a. The use of mortar and grout with unit masonry shall be as specified under Section 4A - Unit Masonry except as specifically noted otherwise. 5A-1 DIVISION 5 – METALS SECTION 5A – STRUCTURAL STEEL 1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: a. Refer to Project Drawings for location, size, shape, arrangement and quantities of structural steel required for use on this project, including fabrication requirements, joint connections, and installation requirements. b. Work Included: Furnish and install all columns, girders, beams, trusses, angles, lintels, bearing plates, anchor bolts, channels, assembly bolts, and other items of structural steel shown on or required by the project drawings and as herein specified or reasonably implied. c. Work Not Included: See other sections for concrete reinforcing steel and miscellaneous metal not classed as structural steel, except deformed reinforcing bars shop welded to items of structural steel which shall be furnished with the structural shape. d. Refer to the following listed Sections of Specifications for related work affecting work specified herein: Section 1A – Description of the Work Section 1N – Testing Services Section 1T – Submittals Section 4A – Unit Masonry Section 5B – Miscellaneous Iron and Steel Section 9G – Painting e. Steel lintels and other fabricated items indicated to be incorporated into masonry shall be provided as indicated on Project Drawings and either set or furnished to the masonry subcontractor as required for the prosecution of his work. All steel lintels shall be hot-dipped galvanized. f. Standards Included by Reference: Except as otherwise specified, the following standards are hereby incorporated in this specification: AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION: MANUAL (THIRTEENTH EDITION): "Code for Structural Steel Design, Fabrication and Erection” ANSI/AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY: "Structural Welding Code, D 1.1" All industry standards and ASTM Designations refer to the latest edition, as of the date of the contract for this job. g. Shop Drawings: Submit for approval to the Architect/Engineer five (5) sets of shop drawings plus additional copies as required by the contractor. Manufacturing or fabricating of any material prior to the approval of shop drawings will be at the risk of the Contractor. Shop Drawings returned "Approved as Noted" need not be resubmitted unless they are so noted, but four sets of corrected shop drawings are to be furnished to the Architect. 5A-2 h. Approval of shop drawings is for design only. Contractor is responsible for dimensions, quantities, and coordination with other trades. Approval does not authorize changes to contract requirements unless stated in a separate letter or change order. i. Delivery and Storage: Material shall be handled in such a way as to prevent distortion or bending of main members and attachments. Steel should be stored in such a way as to be kept relatively dry and free from conditions which would aggravate rusting, corrosion, or distortion, unless such storage is for a very short time. 2. MATERIALS: a. Wide Flange Members and other shapes as noted: ASTM A992 – Grade 50. b. Angles, Channels, Plates, Bars, Anchor Bolts and Rods: ASTM A36 c. Square and Rectangular HSS: ASTM A500 – Grade “B”, Fy = 46 KSI. d. Pipe: ASTM A53 – Type “E”, Grade “B”, Fy = 35 KSI e. Structural Bolts (3/4 Diameter unless noted otherwise on Details or Schedules): ASTM A325-N f. Headed stud shear connectors: ASTM A108, Grade 1015 or 1020. g. Welding Electrodes: AISC and AWS Specification for type weld and base metal used. Min. quality electrodes to be E70XX. No E60 Series electrodes shall be used without special permission. 3. CONNECTIONS: a. Connections not shown and detailed on the drawings shall be designed as simple shear connections for the loads given on the drawings. Where loads are not given, design for the full load given in the AISC allowable load tables for the given section, span, and strength specification, proportioned for two-thirds (2/3) the load at each end of the span. b. Bolted Connections: Connections using high strength bolts are designed for bearing-type action unless otherwise noted on drawings. See drawings for connections requiring special provisions as per AISC Specifications for friction type connections. c. Welded Connections: All welding in shop and field to be by operators who have been qualified previously by tests in accordance with the American Welding Society "Standard Qualification Procedure", to perform the type of work required and who have been continuously engaged in this type of welding since qualification with a lapse of no more than 3 months. Evidence of certificate of field welder shall be submitted by the General Contractor, and welders shall be approved by the Architect before start of erection. d. All welds shall be in accordance with ANSI/AWS D1.1 Specifications. e. All groove butt welds are for full penetration unless otherwise noted on drawings. Provide back-up plates, extension bars, or run-off plates if required. 5A-3 f. Return all fillet welds twice the nominal size where possible. Preheat high strength steel to 100 degrees F., if air or steel temperature is 50 degrees F. Handle, store, and dry low hydrogen electrodes according to the manufacturer's recommendations. g. One-sided connections shall not be used except by special permission from the Architect/Engineer, unless specifically note on Drawings. 4. FABRICATION: a. Workmanship: AISC Specification. b. Shop Connections: Welded, unless otherwise noted. c. Beams that require camber are noted on the drawings, Camber shall be identified on Shop Drawings and applied under controlled shop conditions. d. All copes in beam webs shall be made to a one inch minimum radius. e. Shop Paint: Unless otherwise noted on drawings, clean all steel by hand wire-brushing, or equivalent method, and solvents. Steel to receive headed studs, spray-on fireproofing, or to be encased in concrete or masonry shall not be painted. Other steel, including steel encased in 4" or less of masonry, shall be painted with a shop coat of Fabricator's standard primer, or approved equal, except surfaces within 3" of field welds shall not be painted. Do not paint over high strength steel marking symbol. No steel shall be shipped until shop painting has dried sufficiently to preclude injuries from shipping or handling. 5. ERECTION: a. Methods of Erection: AISC Specification and Code Practice. Method of erection and bracing of steel is erector's responsibility and he must furnish and install all necessary guys, struts shims, braces, etc., required. Consult Architect/Engineer in case of questions concerning erection of unusual members. All safety regulations to be strictly followed. b. Field Connections: Unless otherwise shown on the drawings, bolt with 3/4" A325-N diameter bolts. c. Field Fabrication for Misfits and other trades: Approval of Architect/Engineer required unless details are shown on drawings. No holes shall be burned or reamed for fit up without specific approval for each joint. d. Cooperation: AISC Code of Practice. e. All Lintels supported by masonry shall bear 8” minimum at each end, u.o.n. f. Field Painting: Unless otherwise specified in Painting Division, all steel receiving a shop coat shall be field painted with at least one coat of Fabricator's standard primer, or approved equal. Touch up field welds, bolt heads, and scratches before applying field coat. Tint successive coats with varying amount of carbon black to identify coats. Do not paint over strength identification symbol until steel has been inspected. Steel below finished floor shall be painted with coal tar epoxy - Two coats @ 8 mils DFT. Shop apply to shapes and plates, field apply to anchor bolt projections and units. 5A-4 g. Do not paint structural steel that is to receive headed studs, spray-on fireproofing, or that will be in direct contact with concrete or masonry. 6. TESTING AND INSPECTION: a. General: In addition to inspections by the Designer, a qualified independent testing laboratory, approved by the Architect, and paid for by the Owner, shall make field and shop inspections of the structural connections during and upon completion until they are satisfactory. The representative of the independent testing laboratory shall hereafter be called the inspector. The inspector shall furnish complete and accurate reports to the Architect, the Engineer and the General Contractor periodically during shop fabrication and field erection and a complete report upon completion of the work. Final report shall contain a statement that the items requiring inspection have been found to be satisfactory. b. High Strength Bolts: Inspection shall conform to requirements and procedures of Section 6, "Specifications for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts". Verify size and number of bolts, ASTM spec and tightness, Verify "threads excluded" where designated. c. Field Welds: Fillet welds shall be inspected visually for type, size, profile, length, returns, and location. Insofar as they may be checked by visual examination of their surface appearance, Welds shall be evaluated for completeness of penetration and fusion, avoidance of undercutting, freedom from slag inclusion, porosity, cracks, and general appearance. Butt welds shall be checked for proper procedure and shall be inspected by ultrasonic, or other method approved by the Architect/Engineer. d. The Engineer or Inspector shall verify that welders are certified in accordance with the AWS "Standard qualification Procedure" as specified under connections. The Engineer or Inspector shall be present during all field welding of the main structural frame. 5B-1 SECTION 5B – MISCELLANEOUS IRON AND STEEL 1. SCOPE: a. Refer to Project Drawings for location, illustration, and quantity of work to be furnished and installed as a part of this section of the specifications. Include all labor, materials and equipment as required for the fabrication and installation of elevator pit ladder, stair nosings at exterior stairs, exterior handrails, and other miscellaneous metal work as required for the completion of work specified herein. b. Refer to the following listed Sections of Specifications for related work affecting work specified herein: Section 1A – Description of the Work Section 1T - Submittals Section 3A – Cast-In-Place Concrete Section 4A – Unit Masonry Section 5A – Structural Steel Section 9G - Painting Section 14A – Hydraulic Elevators c. Cast iron grates and frames, manhole covers and steps, and other metal fabrications required for site utilities and storm drainage; anchors, bolts, sleeves and supports required for the installation of plumbing, heating, air conditioning, and electrical equipment; metal cramps, anchors, ties and dowels for masonry and concrete work; and metal doors, door bucks and trim are not included in this section of the work. 2. REQUIREMENTS: a. All items shall be installed at their proper elevation and plane and located in proper alignment with all adjacent work, according to details. b. All ferrous metal shall be properly cleaned and given one shop coat of zinc chromate or other approved rust resisting paint. Anchors that are built into masonry or concrete shall be coated with asphalt paint unless specified to be galvanized. Where hot-dip galvanized or zinc-coated metal is required it shall not be shop primed unless specifically called for; but all abraded places and weldings shall be touched up with aluminum paint. Where hot-dip galvanizing or hot zinc coating is specified, it shall be done in accordance with the Standard Specifications of the American Hot Dip Galvanizers Association. c. Steel and wrought iron shall be well formed to shape and size; with sharp lines or angles. Shearing and punching shall leave clean, true lines and surfaces. Weld or rivet permanent connections. Do Not use screws or bolts where they can be avoided; where used, heads shall be countersunk, screwed up tight and threads nicked to prevent loosening. Curved work shall be evenly sprung. d. Castings shall be sound and free from warp, holes, and other defects that impair their strength or appearance. Exposed surfaces shall have a smooth finish and sharp, well defined lines and arises, Machined joints, where required, shall be milled to a close fit. Provide necessary rabbets, lugs and brackets so that work can be assembled in a neat and substantial manner. e. All railings and handrails shall be designed and constructed to support a lateral load of fifty (50) pounds per linear foot applied at the top of the railing and a concentrated load of Two Hundred (200) pounds applied at any point and in any direction. 5B-2 f. Fastenings shall be concealed where practicable. Thickness of metal and details of assembly and supports shall give ample strength and stiffness. g. Joints exposed to weather shall be formed to exclude water. Provide holes and connections for the work of other trades. h. At proper time, deliver and set in place items of metal work to be built into adjoining construction. i. Submit shop drawings of all fabricated items for Architect's approval prior to fabrication. 3. MATERIALS: a. Cast Iron: Shall be of soft gray iron, true to pattern, smooth and straight and free from defects impairing strength, durability or appearance. b. Malleable Iron: High grade white iron castings, fully annealed and of uniform ductile structure throughout. c. Wrought Iron: Genuine Wrought Iron conforming to ASTM Specifications A41 for bolts, rods and bars, A42 for plates, and A162 for sheets. d. Steel: Conform to ASTM Specifications A36 for structural steel and A27 for cast steel. Architectural and miscellaneous steel not otherwise indicated or specified shall be mild steel. e. Except as specifically noted otherwise, exterior wall mounted handrails and/or railings shall be fabricated from nominal 1.25" diameter (1.660" O.D.) structural steel tubing, as shown on drawings. Ends of tubing shall be closed with bullet shaped terminal caps and all welds ground smooth. f. Handrail brackets for wall-mounted exterior railings shall not exceed 6'- 0" measured along the handrail. Brackets shall support railings at 1-1/2 inch clearance from wall surface and shall be similar and equal to Julius Blum No. 306 malleable iron wall brackets, J.G. Braun No. 4403 malleable iron wall brackets, Wagner round top malleable iron wall brackets, or approved equal. g. Exterior railings shall be fabricated from the following components: 1. Intermediate rail posts where indicated or required shall be 1 ½ inch x 1 ½ inch steel bar stock. 2. Horizontal bottom, intermediate and top rails (except at rail caps) – 1 ½ inch x ½ inch steel bar sock punched to receive vertical pickets. 3. Top rail at rail caps shall be 1 ½ inch x 1 ½ inch x 0.120 inch thick steel tubing. 4. Rail caps where indicated shall be Julius Blum & Co., Inc., No 4435 steel handrail moulding. 5. Pickets where indicated shall be hot rolled steel bars with Julius Blum & Co., Inc., No. 54 picket. 6. Circular rings – nominal 3” diameter extra strong steel pipe cut into ½” lengths. h. Elevator pit ladder shall be fabricated from ½ inch by 2 inch steel bars for brackets and standards and ¾ inch diameter steel dowels for rungs. Elevator pit ladder shall extend from elevator pit floor to 4’-0” above lowest floor served. Provide brackets at 5B-3 bottom (floor mounted) and top (wall mounted) of each standard. i. Metal safety nosings for concrete steps shall be one of the following, or an approved equal: 1. American Abrasive Metals Company, Amcolun Safety Nosing, type DSA4, or Altred Safety Nosing type 241-A. 2. Safe-T-Metal Company, Inc., type 131S (with 3/4" anchor): or type A3S (with 5/8" anchor). 3. Wooster Products, Inc. Supergrit Safety Tread, type 241 (with Surehold Anchor). Nosings shall be protected during installation and concrete curing by a factory applied protective tape. Architect will choose color from manufacturer's standard colors. j. Include all sleeves, anchors, bolts, angles, hangers, supports and other accessories needed for complete assembly and installation. 4. INSTALLATION: a. Installation shall be as recommended by manufacturer of item being installed, except as specified herein, or as specifically indicated on Project Drawings. b. Coordinate location and installation of elevator pit ladder with elevator installer to insure appropriate location and proper equipment clearances. c. Top railings and wall-mounted handrails at steps shall be mounted at 34 inches above the nosings of each tread. Provide 1'-0" horizontal extensions of wall mounted railings and handrails at top of flights of steps. Provide 11 inch wall mounted handrail extension following pitch of steps beyond last nosing at bottom of flights of steps plus 1' - 0" horizontal extension. Railing heights at landings shall be as noted on drawings. d. Fastening methods of components shall be as illustrated on approved shop drawings, suitable for the use intended, and sufficient to meet the requirements of the North Carolina State Building Code for load carrying capacity, lateral stability, etc. e. Metal nosings shall be installed at each tread of cast-in-place concrete steps. The nosings shall be of single piece construction and shall terminate 3" from the end of each step. 6A-1 DIVISION 6 – CARPENTRY SECTION 6A – ROUGH CARPENTRY 1. REQUIREMENTS: a. Refer to Project Drawings and these Specifications for location, type, and quantity of work required by this section of the specifications. Rough Carpentry shall include the wood framing as required for new construction and the renovation of designated existing facilities. b. Include the furnishing and installation of all floor/ceiling framing systems with both dimensional and engineered wood framing members including subfloors, the furnishing and installation of both interior and exterior wood framed wall systems including sheathing, and the furnishing and installation of ceiling/roof framing systems including roof sheathing and fascia/soffit/mansard framing. c. Work specified herein shall comply with the requirements of the North Carolina State Building Code, Chapter 23 – Wood. d. No finish work is included in this section of the specifications. All finish carpentry shall be installed as specified under Section 6B - Finish Carpentry. e. Prefabricated wood trusses where indicated or required shall be furnished under Section 6D-Prefabricated Wood Trusses and installed under this section (Rough Carpentry) of the specifications. f. Refer to the following listed Sections of Specifications for related work affecting work specified herein: Section 1A – Description of the Work Section 1L – Fire Resistance Requirements Section 6B – Finish Carpentry Section 6D – Prefabricated Wood Trusses Section 7D – Building Insulation Section 9E – Gypsum Wallboard g. Provide proper storage and protection from the elements and dampness after delivery to job site for all items listed and required under this division of the work. Provide temporary doors and weather proof closures for all exterior wall openings and roof openings during construction and until the building is dried out or until permanent closures have been installed. h. Furnish all rough lumber, engineered wood, rough hardware (nails, spikes, screws, bolts and similar items), all form work, templates, etc., and all rough carpentry work as may be required under this division of the specifications. i. The grade, species and types of lumber, engineered wood, and plywood shall bear the recognized official grade stamp and trade mark of the Association under whose rule it is graded. Code for Member Design shall be ANSI/APA National Design specification and supplement. j. Where connecting hardware is shown on drawings, the types, size, spacing, and 6A-2 alignment are critical and must be as shown. Do not under cut wood. Prebore holes where required to prevent splitting. Connections must pull and hold members being joined into close contract. k. Wood members shall bear on the full width of supports (wall, beam, ledger, plate, etc.). Wood members that do not bear directly on supports shall be connected with approved, prefabricated metal hangers. l. All wood members that support roof construction shall be secured with approved hurricane clips at 16 inch centers, maximum spacing. m. Keep a competent foreman in charge at all times. Lay out all work, be responsible for all measurements, assist other crafts in anchoring their work, and receive and be responsible for all items of rough and finish carpentry, millwork items, and hardware items. 2. MATERIALS: a. Except as specifically noted otherwise, Framing Lumber shall be Spruce Pine Fir (SPF) #2 or approved equal, S4S, at 15% moisture content, kiln dried and used at l5% maximum moisture content. b. Treated lumber shall be Southern Yellow Pine (SYP) #2. c. Wood Studs for load-bearing wall construction shall be Spruce Pine Fir (SPF) #2. Wood studs for interior non-bearing partitions shall be Utility Grade. Plate material shall be Spruce Pine Fir (SPF) #2. d. All engineered wood framing (LVS’s, PSL’s, LSL’s, I-Joists and glulams) shall be sized, sealed, and furnished as required to meet the minimum strength requirements indicated on Project Drawings. e. Wood sizes shown on drawings are nominal sizes, before dressing on four sides, unless otherwise noted. f. Plywood for concrete forms shall be 3/4 inch Plyform Class 1, B-B grade EXT-APA. g. Plywood Subfloors shall be APA Rated “Sturd-i-floor” panels, or approved equal, not less than 19/32 inch thick with sanded face. h. Wall Sheathing at exterior walls shall be APA Rated Plywood Sheathing not less than 7/16 inch thick. i. Roof Sheathing shall be APA Rated Plywood Sheathing not less than 7/16 inch thick. j. All other plywood shall be exterior type graded A-C EXT-APA, thickness as noted on drawings. k. Construction lumber not otherwise specified shall be S4S and be seasoned dried to a moisture content of 19% or less before dressing at the mill. If kiln dried, the moisture content shall be 15% or less before dressing at the mill and shall be kept dry afterwards. 6A-3 l. Interior construction finish lumber less than 2" thick shall be Grade "B and Better" Southern Pine or Douglas Fir. m. Wood Treatment: 1. All loadbearing wood plates, ledgers, nailing strips, bucks, grounds, furring, etc., embedded in or attached to masonry, concrete and similar construction shall be pressure-treated with Chromated Copper Arsenate (CCA) as produced by Wolman, Osmose, Boliden, or approved equal and shall conform to FED. SPEC.TT-W-550 and TT-W-571. Retention of preservative shall be 0.25 pcf. Each piece of material shall bear the AWPB Quality Mark LP-2. All material shall be kiln dried after treatment to 19% or less moisture content. Field cuts and holes shall be treated at job site during construction in accordance with AWPA Standard M-4 when lumber thicknesses exceed 2 inches. 2. Under no circumstances shall creosote oil or any other material which may bleed be used. n. Steel shapes connecting wood members to be ASTM A36, unless otherwise noted. Refer to Section 5B - Miscellaneous Iron and Steel. o. Splice straps, connectors and anchors shall be as noted on Drawings. Steel shapes connecting wood members shall be fabricated as specified under Section 5B - Miscellaneous Iron and Steel or Section 6D - Prefabricated wood trusses. 3. EXECUTION OF THE WORK: a. Furnish, install, and secure wood framed construction as indicated on Project Drawings and described herein. The requirements of the North Carolina State Building Code, Chapter 23 –Wood shall be the minimum standard with respect to materials, grades, spans, installation requirements, and fastening requirements for the work of this project and shall take precedence over these specifications when in conflict. b. Keep a competent foreman in charge at all times. Lay out all work, be responsible for all measurements, assist other crafts in anchoring their work, and receive and be responsible for all items of rough and finish carpentry, millwork items and hardware items. c. Erect and remove all guard rails and barricades which might be required for job safety. Erect and remove all form work including all temporary bracing and supports. Erect and remove all temporary doors and closures for all exterior wall openings. d. Install all required bracing and supports, wood bucks, furring, grounds, and plywood mounting boards for electrical and telephone equipment. Install all rough hardware required for the proper installation of all work under this division of the specifications. Nails, spikes, screws, bolts and similar items shall be of size and type to rigidly secure the members in place. e. Installation of prefabricated roof trusses shall be in accordance with the recommendations of the truss manufacturer and as specified in Section 6D - Prefabricated Roof Trusses. 6A-4 f. Construct floor and roof framing in accordance with the type, size and spacing of members illustrated on Project Drawings. In general, framing members (except for lintels, beams, and girders) will be spaced at 16 inch centers, maximum spacing. g. Construct stud walls in accordance with the size and spacing shown on the Project drawings. In general, both loadbearing and non-loadbearing 2x4 or 2x6 studs will be spaced at 16 inch centers, maximum spacing. h. Except as specifically noted otherwise, lintels at framed openings shall be supported by not less than one (1) jack stud at each end for openings up to 6’-0” wide and not less than two (2) jack studs at each end for openings greater than 6’-0” wide. i. Plywood subflooring, underlayment and sheathing as specified herein shall be installed as recommended by the American Plywood Association, except as specifically noted otherwise. j. Nailing requirements for subfloors shall be as follows: Use No 6d ringshank nails spaced at 6 inch centers along panel edges and No. 6d ringshank nails spaced at 12 inch centers along intermediate supports. k. Except as otherwise indicated on project drawings, nailing requirements for wall sheathing shall be as follows: Use No. 8d common nails spaced at 6 inch centers along panel edges and No. 8d common nails spaced at 12 inch centers each way for intermediate nailing. l. Roof and mansard sheathing shall be attached with No. 8d coated or deformed shank nails. Space nails at 6 inch centers along panel edges and along intermediate supports. m. Install all plywood subfloors and underlayment and plywood roof and mansard sheathing with face grain perpendicular to supports. Arrange panels so that end joints occur over supports. Stagger end joints approximately 4"-0" in adjoining courses of panels. n. Where connecting hardware is shown on drawings, the types, size, spacing, and alignment are critical and must be as shown. Do not reduce the cross-sectional area of wood members. Prebore holes where required to prevent splitting. Connections must pull and hold members being joined into close contact. o. Nailing and framing requirements for all wood construction shall be not less than required by Chapter 23 – Wood of the North Carolina State Building Code. Where conflicts exist with respect to minimum requirements, the N.C. State Building Code shall govern. 6B-1 SECTION 6B - FINISH CARPENTRY 1. REQUIREMENTS: a. Refer to Project Drawings and these Specifications for location, type, arrangement, and quantity of finish carpentry work required. Include the furnishing of all labor, materials, and equipment as required for the proper installation of all interior items of finish carpentry including standing and running trim, casings, storage shelving, other items of millwork, finish hardware, and thresholds. b. Exterior work shall include the furnishing and installation of composite Fascias and Soffits, composite Panels, and other composite trim elements as indicated on Project Drawings and/or as specified herein. c. Coordinate finish work specified herein with the work of Section 8A –Wood Doors, Section 8C – Wood Windows, and Section 12A – Manufactured Casework. d. Refer to the following listed sections of specifications for related work affecting this section of specifications. Section 1A – Description of the Work Section 1T - Submittals Section 6C - Millwork Section 8A –Wood Doors Section 8C – Wood Windows Section 8E - Thresholds Section 8F – Hardware Section 9G - Painting Section 12A – Manufactured Casework e. As it relates to composite panels and planks, the following listed standards of the American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) are incorporated by reference and made a part of these specifications to the same extent as if bound herein: 1. ASTM E 72 – Standard Test Methods for Conducting Strength Tests of Panels for Building Construction. 2. ASTM E 84 – Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 3. ASTM E 119 – Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 4. ASTM E 136 – Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace at 750º C. 5. ASTM E 1185 – Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Non-Asbestos Fiber Cement Flat Sheet, Roofing and Siding, Shingles and Clapboards. f. Submit Physical samples of composite panels and boards along with Shop Drawings showing details of proposed installation and manufacturer’s product descriptions for each proposed component of material. g. Where items are furnished under other sections of specifications for installation as specified herein, such installation shall be as indicated on approved shop drawings, according to manufacturer's recommendations, and subject to the approval of the 6B-2 Architect. h. Provide only those carpenters who are competent and thoroughly experienced with fabrication and installation of finish work. i. Receive, handle, store and fabricate materials specified herein as recommended by the product manufacturer. 2. MATERIALS: a. Composite Fiber Cement Products specified herein are non-asbestos fiber cement boards and panels as manufactured by NICHIHA USA, Inc. Similar and equal products of other manufacturers will be approved for use on this project when submitted with complete technical and descriptive literature illustrating and confirming product equality. The Architect will be the sold judge of product equality. b. Standing and running trim shall be as specified in Section 6C-Millwork. c. Composite Fiber Cement Products shall include the following: 1. Soffit Boards – Minimum 1/4 inch thickness Nichi Soffit fiber cement boards. 2. Fascias and Trim – Minimum 3/4 inch thickness Nichi Trim fiber cement boards. 3. Panels – Minimum 5/16 inch thickness Nichi Panel fiber cement panels. d. Fasteners, sealants, and adhesives required for the finished installation of composite fiber cement products shall be as recommended by the composite manufacturer on approved shop drawings. Fasteners shall be of stainless steel. e. Interior Plywood to be exposed both sides shall be interior type, grade A-A INT. - DFPA, thickness as noted on Drawings. f. Interior Plywood exposed one side shall be interior type grade A-D INT - DFPA, thickness as noted on Drawings. g. Exterior plywood and plywood not otherwise noted shall be exterior type, graded A-C EXT. - DFPA, thickness as noted on Drawings. h. Items of prepared or prefabricated millwork shall be as specified in Section 6C-Millwork. i. All lumber shall be surfaced 4 sides (S4S) and kiln-dried to a range of not less than 5% or more than 10%. j. All lumber shall be treated with materials and by methods having a fungicidal efficiency equivalent to 5% Pentachlorophenol. 3. EXECUTION OF THE WORK: a. Install all items of finish carpentry, millwork, and hardware. Prepare openings to 6B-3 receive and coordinate the installation of doors, windows and manufactured casework. b. Install and finish items of composite fiber cement products as illustrated on project drawings and recommended by product manufacturer on approved shop drawings. Do not leave installed product exposed to weather prior to prime painting. c. Install all finish hardware including metal thresholds. The location of hardware shall be as specified within Section 8F - Hardware. d. Properly tag, index and file all keys as directed. Apply hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, fit accurately, apply securely and adjust carefully. Use care not to injure work when applying hardware. Where necessary remove and replace doors so they may have tops and bottoms painted. e. Cover door knobs and pulls with heavy cloth until painting is completed. Prior to completion of building, examine all doors and other movable parts; adjust as required and leave hardware in good working order. f. Installation of work specified herein shall be as recommended by the manufacturer of the item being installed, as indicated on Architectural Drawings, and/or subject to the approval of the Architect as indicated on approved shop drawings. 6C-1 SECTION 6C – MILLWORK 1. REQUIREMENTS: a. Refer to Project Drawings for location, type, quantity and installation requirements for work to be furnished and installed under this Section of the Specifications. Provide all labor, material, equipment and services necessary for and properly attributable to the fabrication, delivery and installation of designated millwork. b. Refer to the following listed Sections of Specifications for additional requirements and related work affecting work and/or products specified herein: Section 1A – Description of the Work Section 1T - Submittals Section 6B – Finish Carpentry Section 8A –Wood Doors Section 8C – Wood Windows Section 9E – Gypsum Wallboard Section 9G – Painting Section 12A – Manufactured Casework Section 12B - Countertops c. The final setting, placement, and installation of work described herein shall be as specified under Section 6B - Finish Carpentry. All items shall be well secured in positions as illustrated on Project Drawings. d. Backpriming, painting and/or finishing of all work specified herein shall be as specified under Painting. Refer to Division 9-Finishes. e. Shop Drawings shall be drawn in related and/or dimensional positions with sections shown at not less than l-1/2 inch scale. Separate shop drawings shall be used to properly separate the work as it will be produced and used. f. The mill worker will be responsible for details and dimensions not controlled by job conditions. The General Contractor will be responsible for and furnish to Millwork Manufacturer, all dimensions which he alone controls, including wall-to-wall, ceiling heights, wall thicknesses, and dimensions controlled by other crafts, etc. g. All hardware used in conjunction with millwork shall be furnished under this section of the specifications. Hardware shall be appropriate for the use and function illustrated on Project Drawings. Furnish samples of proposed hardware for selection of color, material, and style by Architect. h. The Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) “Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards”, latest edition shall form the basis of reference and standard for defining acceptability of material and construction methods for work required of this Section. i. Any item not given a specific quality grade shall be Custom grade as defined in the latest edition of the AWI "Quality Standards." 6C-2 j. The approved millwork manufacturer must have a reputation for doing satisfactory work on time and shall have successfully completed comparable work. The Architect reserves the right to approve the millwork manufacturer selected to furnish work specified herein. k. Submit shop drawings of all items of millwork. Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature of specialty items not manufactured by the millwork manufacturer, as requested by the Architect. l. Submit physical samples of all standing and running trim for Architect's approval prior to fabrication or delivery to job site. 2. MATERIALS: a. Wood materials: 1. Natural finished standing and running trim shall meet AWI Manual Section 300, Custom grade. Painted trim may be of custom or utility grade. 2. Painted trim members shall be poplar, maple, ash, or birch milled to required profiles. Finger splicing will be allowed. 3. Wood shall be sound and dry, selected for compatibility of grain and color and containing no defects that cannot be concealed by finishing methods for stained transparent finish. 4. Scribing and joining shall accomplish hair-line joints. Finish trim corners shall be mitered, trim other than finish may be butted. 5. Softwood lumber: PS 20 Graded in accordance with: AWI Economy. Average moisture content per AWI paragraph 100-S-3. 6. Hardwood lumber: Graded in accordance with: AWI Custom or economy as noted. Average moisture content of 6 percent. b. All storage shelving shall be opaque (painted) finish. AWI quality grade shall be “Economy” grade. Details of construction shall be as illustrated on Architectural Drawings and/or as specified in AWII section 600, utility grade. Provide intermediate support for spans exceeding 48 inches. 1. Plywood shall be edge banded and glued on exposed edges. Minimum thickness of plywood shelving shall be 3/4 inch. 3. EXECUTION OF THE WORK: a. Prefabricated items shall be stored, handled, and installed as recommended by the manufacturer, subject to the approval of the Architect. b. Temperature of materials - surfacing, core and adhesive and the area in which fabrication of millwork is done shall be not less than 65°F, with a relative humidity of not less than 35 per cent, and not more than 80 per cent. 6C-3 c. The millwork manufacturer and the General Contractor shall be jointly responsible to make certain that millwork is not delivered until the building and storage areas are sufficiently dry to avoid damage from excessive changes in moisture content. d. Verify that surfaces are acceptable and ready to receive work. e. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing. 6D-1 SECTION 6D - PREFABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES 1. GENERAL: a. Work Included: Furnish all materials, equipment and labor necessary for the prefabrication, delivery and permanent setting of wood trusses as shown and/or required by the project plans and specifications. Include all miscellaneous parts, such as: bridging, temporary and permanent bracing, and all related items of hard-ware, metal hangers, anchors, and special metal shapes deemed by the Architect, Structural Engineer or the Truss Design Engineer to be necessary for the proper prefabrication, erection, assembly, supporting, and anchoring of the wood trusses. b. Refer to the following listed Sections of Specifications for related work affecting work specified herein: Section 1A – Description of the Work Section 1U – Storage and Protection Section 1T - Submittals Section 6A - Rough Carpentry c. Work Not Included: Anchors and items embedded in concrete or masonry to be furnished and set by General Contractor. Metal parts attached to structural steel by Steel Fabricator. d. Standards Included by Reference: Except as otherwise specified, the following standards are hereby incorporated in this specification, the same as if those specifications and all their references were set out in full herein. Standards referred to are latest edition. "National Design Specifications for Stress Grade Lumber and its Fastenings" by National Forest Products Association. "Timber Construction Standards" by the American Institute of Timber Construction. "Design Specifications for Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses" by Truss Plate Institute. e. Design of trusses and connections shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the Truss Plate Institute "Design Specification for Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses". f. Design: Design shall be as shown on the drawings and/or for loads given. Alternate configurations and designs will be considered only if accompanied by complete drawings and design notes. g. All lumber shall be graded in accordance with the Southern Pine Inspection Grading Rules and shall bear an approved Grade Stamp. h. Truss manufacturer shall submit five (5) copies of shop drawings and design calculations of all trusses sealed by a professional engineer registered in North Carolina. These drawings shall show truss member configuration, member sizes, member forces, lumber grade, connection plate sizes and location, lateral bracing members, and an erection plan. 6D-2 i. All members shall be Southern Pine, grade to be selected by the Truss Manufacturer except “no grade” shall not be used. j. The minimum connection plate size shall be 3"x5". Do not splice chord members at a web member joint except at a change in slope of the chord member. k. Trusses shall comply with all provisions of the Truss Plate Institute "Quality Control Manual (Appendix P)". l. Anchor all trusses with an approved prefabricated metal anchor. 2. MATERIALS: a. Lumber: All lumber shall bear the appropriate grade mark. Stress grade shall be as called for on the drawings or a grade of equal or better stress capacity and modulus of elasticity. Sizes are nominal before dressing. b. Steel Plates: Steel Plates shall conform to ASTM A36. c. Bolts: Bolts shall be ASTM A307 or A36 steel threaded rods. d. Truss Connector Plates: Truss Connector Plates shall be manufactured by a member of the Truss Plate Institute from only prime commercial quality galvanized sheet steel of no less than 20 gauge thickness which has a minimum yield of 33,000 psi and a minimum ultimate tensile strength of 45,000 psi conforming to ASTM A446, latest edition. 3. WORKMANSHIP: a. Fabrication: Trusses shall be fabricated by a qualified, experienced fabricator using an approved system of construction, such as "Gang Nail" system or equal, in a properly equipped manufacturing facility of a permanent nature. They shall be manufactured by experienced workmen, using precision cutting and truss fabricating equipment under the direct supervision of a qualified foreman. All trusses shall be fabricated under strict rules of inspection and quality control. All truss members shall be accurately cut to length and angle, and be true to line to assure tight joints for finished truss. All truss members and connector plates shall be properly placed in special jigs and the members tightly clamped in place, remaining in that position until the connector plates have been pressed into the lumber simultaneously on both sides of the joints. b. Connections: Connections between truss members shall be the sole responsibility of the truss manufacturer and shall be designed in accordance with the requirements of "Design Specifications for Light Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses" published by the Truss Plate Institute, and "National Design Specifications for Stress Grade Lumber and its Fastenings"' by National Forest Products Association. Design connections for forces shown on the drawings. Where connecting hardware is shown on the structural drawings, the types, sizes, spacing, and alignment are critical and must be as shown. Do not undercut wood. Pre-bore holes where required to prevent splitting. Connections must pull and hold members being joined into close contact. 6D-3 c. Handling and Erection: Fabricated trusses and sub-assemblies shall be handled with care so that they are not subject to damage. If the trusses are to be stock piled or stored prior to erection, they shall be set in vertical positions, resting upon temporary bearing supports and braced so that they will be subjected to no unusual bending or tipping over. During erection, bracing shall be exercised to prevent horizontal bending of the trusses. Proper erection bracing shall be installed to hold the trusses true and plumb and in safe condition until permanent truss bracing and bridging can be solidly nailed in place to form a structurally sound roof framing system. All erection and permanent bracing shall be installed and all components permanently fastened before the application of any loads. Anchorage to support structure shall be as detailed. Field erection of the trusses, including items such as proper handling, safety precautions, temporary bracing to prevent toppling or dominoing of the trusses during erection, and any other safeguards or procedures consistent with good workmanship and good building erection practices, shall be the responsibility of the General Contractor. Framing anchors and/or truss hangars shall be provided by the Contractor in accordance with the project drawings. During the entire construction period, all contractors shall provide means for adequate distribution of concentrated loads so that the carrying capacity of any one truss and/or other component is not exceeded. 7A-1 DIVISION 7 – MOISTURE PROTECTION SECTION 7A – GRANULAR FILL 1. REQUIREMENTS: a. Refer to Project Drawings for location and quantity of Work to be furnished and installed under this section of the specifications. Furnish and install granular fill as required for stone base course at new interior concrete slabs on grade, drainage medium at below grade wall waterproofing, and elsewhere as indicated on Project Drawings or specified herein. b. Refer to the following listed sections of specifications for related work affecting work specified herein: Section 1A – Description of the Work Section 1N – Testing Services Section 2B – Earthwork and Site Preparation Section 2C – Site Drainage Section 3A – Cast-In-Place Concrete Section 4A – Unit Masonry Section 7B – Vapor Barrier Section 7C – Foundation Waterproofing Section 7D – Building Insulation 2. MATERIALS: a. Granular fill for use under slab on grade floors shall consist of clean crushed stone graded ¾ inch to 1 ½ inches. b. Course aggregate granular fill where required as a drainage medium at below grade wall waterproofing shall be clean crushed gravel or washed stone with a maximum size of one (1) inch and a maximum of 5% passing the No. 200 sieve. 3. EXECUTION OF WORK: a. Granular fill as base course under interior concrete slabs on grade shall be placed to a uniform depth of four (4) inches and compacted to a minimum density of 98% of the Standard Proctor Density in accordance with ASTM D-698. b. Granular fill as a drainage medium at below grade wall waterproofing shall form a bed upon which foundation subdrains are placed. After subdrains have been inspected and approved by the Architect, subdrains shall be covered with select drain material approximately twelve inches (12”) wide and extending to within twelve inches (12”) of finished grade. Install filter fabric between granular fill and earth backfill. 7B-1 SECTION 7B - VAPOR BARRIER 1. REQUIREMENTS: a. Refer to Project Drawings for location, size and arrangement of slabs requiring vapor barrier. Furnish and install vapor barrier between granular fill and all new interior concrete slab on grade floors and elsewhere as indicated on Project Drawings or specified herein. b. Refer to the following listed sections of specifications for related work affecting work specified herein: Section 1A – Description of the Work Section 3A - Cast-In-Place Concrete Section 7A - Granular Fill Section 7D-Building Insulation 2. MATERIALS: a. Vapor barrier shall be "Moistop" by American Sisalkraft Corporation, "Ply-Bar +" by Glas-Kraft, Inc., "TU-TUF 4" by Sto-Cote Products, Inc., or approved equal. b. Adhesives, for sealing laps and punctures, shall be as recommended by the vapor barrier manufacturer. 3. EXECUTION: a. Base for concrete shall be leveled and well tamped. b. Vapor barrier under concrete slabs shall be placed after perimeter insulation is installed. c. Vapor barrier shall have edges lapped 6" and shall be continuous over the entire slab area and be carried up the inside of walls to within 1/2 inch of the finished floor level. Moisture resistant adhesive shall be used in attaching barrier to wall surface. d. Avoid tearing vapor barrier. Where barrier is punctured by stakes, seal around puncture with non-setting mastic. Where vapor barrier is punctured otherwise, patch with vapor barrier material, extending beyond hole 4" on all sides. Seal continuously at all laps and patches with roofing cement or adhesive acceptable to manufacturer of barrier. 7C-1 SECTION 7C – FOUNDATION WATERPROOFING 1. REQUIREMENTS: a. Refer to Project Drawings for locations of surfaces to be waterproofed. Waterproofing shall be applied vertically to the exterior face of designated below grade wall surfaces of the new elevator shaft. b. Refer to the following listed sections of specifications for related work affecting work specified herein: Section 1A – Description of the Work Section 2A – Earthwork and Site Preparation Section 2B – Site Drainage Section 2C – Shoring Section 3A – Cast-In-Place Concrete Section 4A – Unit Masonry Section 7A – Granular Fill c. Products specified herein are as manufactured by the Construction Products Division of W.R. Grace and Company. Similar products as manufactured by Carlisle, Koppers, Poly-Guard, J & P Petroleum, or approved equal, shall be acceptable for use on this project when submitted with complete manufacturer’s data substantiating that the products are equal in every respect to those specified herein. d. Prior to the beginning of waterproofing work, this contractor shall submit samples of each component of the waterproofing system to the Architect for approval. Samples shall be accompanied by complete technical data and proposed installation techniques. Only those materials submitted to and approved by the Architect shall be used on this project. e. Materials for waterproofing shall be delivered, stored and handled as recommended by the manufacturer. Combustible materials shall be adequately protected and proper precautions taken during both storage and installation operations. 2. MATERIALS: a. Waterproofing membrane shall be Bituthene 3100. b. Primer for waterproofing membrane shall be Bituthene Primer P-3000. c. Mastic shall be Bituthene Elastomeric Mastic EM-3000. d. Liquid membrane for filling holes in substrates and for forming fillets shall be Liquid Membrane LM-3000. e. Protection Board for vertical wall surfaces shall be Bituthene Protection Board PB-3000 applied with Protection Board Adhesive PBA-3000. 3. EXECUTION OF THE WORK: a. Surfaces shall be cleaned and scraped to a sound and smooth substrate. Remove sharp protrusions and clean all surfaces of substances that will prevent proper 7C-2 adhesion of primer. Fill voids with Liquid Membrane LM-3000. b. Expansion, construction, and control joints within surfaces to be waterproofed shall be stripped with an eight (8) inch wide strip of waterproofing material prior to the application of the material to the entire surface. c. Inside corners shall be filled with Liquid Membrane LM-3000 to form a fillet with a minimum 3/4 inch face. Both inside and outside corners shall be covered with an initial eleven (11) inch strip of waterproofing material centered on the axis of the corner and followed by the application of the material to the entire surface. d. Cover entire surface of waterproofing with protection board prior to the installation of drainage medium/backfill material. e. Except as specified herein, application of the waterproofing system shall be as recommended by the manufacturer on approved descriptive literature submitted with the waterproofing materials. 7D-1 SECTION 7D – BUILDING INSULATION 1. REQUIREMENTS: a. Refer to Project Drawings for location, thickness, type, and quantity of material to be furnished and installed under this section of the specifications. Include all labor, materials, and equipment as required for the complete installation of perimeter slab insulation, insulation within wood stud framing, foamed-in-place masonry insulation, attic insulation and other insulation as indicated on drawings and/or as specified herein. All work shall be base bid work. b. Refer to the following listed sections of specifications for related work affecting the work and/or products specified herein: Section 1A – Description of the Work Section 1I - Alternates Section 1U – Storage and Protection Section 4A – Unit Masonry Section 6A – Rough Carpentry Section 7B – Vapor Barrier Section 9E – Gypsum Wallboard c. Materials shall be delivered in their original unopened packages and shall be stored in an enclosed shelter which will provide protection from damage and from exposure to the elements. Damaged, deteriorated, or wet materials shall be removed from premises. d Rigid Board Insulation material shall not be exposed to open flame or other ignition sources during shipping, storage, or installation. Where foam is expected to be exposed to sun for prolonged periods of time, it shall be protected with a light colored opaque covering. During storage and/or installation, foam board stock shall be protected from mechanical damage. Damaged portions of installation shall be replaced. e. Rigid Board building insulation shall be installed at the perimeter of all interior slab on grade construction and within the cavities of designated exterior masonry cavity walls, all as indicated on Project Drawings and/or as specified herein. f. Foamed-in-place insulation shall be installed within the cells of designated concrete masonry walls. g. Kraft-faced fiberglass insulation shall be installed between the studs of all exterior wall assemblies composed of either stucco or simulated stone masonry veneers attached to wood stud framing. h. Unfaced fiberglass insulation shall be installed between the bottom cords of all roof structures. 2. MATERIALS: a. Kraft-faced blanket insulation at exterior wall systems of wood stud construction and Unfaced blanket insulation over the floors of mansard roof structures shall be fiberglass insulation as manufactured by one of the following, or approved equal: 1. Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corporation. "Fiberglas" building insulation. 7D-2 2. Johns-Manville Fiber Glass Insulation for light frame construction. 3. Gold Bond Building Products, National Gypsum Company, fiberglass blanket insulation. b. Minimum "R" values for blanket insulation shall be as follows for the thicknesses listed: 6" R-19 9" R-30 c. Perimeter slab insulation and cavity wall insulation shall be rigid board stock as manufactured by one of the following, or approved equal: 1. Dow Chemical Company, Styrofoam "SM" or "TG" brand plastic foam. Apply to vertical surfaces with Styrofoam brand mastic #11. 2. CPR Division of Upjohn Company, "Trymer" CPR 9545 plastic foam. Apply to vertical surfaces with Armstrong No. F1450 adhesive. 3. W. R. Grace and Company "Zonolite" styrene foam with a minimum density of 2.0 lbs./cu. ft. Apply to vertical surfaces with Zonolite General Purpose Adhesive. d. Foamed-in-place insulation shall be OLIGOMERIC METHYLENE CARBONATE (RAPCO BLUE) as manufactured by Rapco Foam, Inc., Tripolymer Foam Insulation as manufactured by C.P. Chemical Co., Thermco Foam Insulation as manufactured by Thermal Corporation of America, or approved equal. 3. EXECUTION: a. Kraft-faced fiberglass insulation in exterior wood stud wall assemblies and unfaced fiberglass insulation within attic space shall be installed as follows: 1. All batt or blanket insulation shall be installed with the vapor barrier (Kraft-faced) toward the warm side (inside) of the assembly. 2. Blanket insulation in exterior wood stud walls shall be nominal six (6) inch thickness Kraft-faced fiberglass blankets secured to studs with staples to prevent sagging. 3. Unfaced blanket insulation at soffits and roof assemblies shall be nominal nine (9) inch thickness fiberglass blankets laid with ends and edges tight. b. Rigid board insulation in slab-on-grade floor assemblies shall be installed as follows: 1. Installation of perimeter slab insulation shall be positioned as illustrated on Project Drawings and/or as specified herein. 2. Perimeter slab insulation shall be installed vertically at exterior walls 7D-3 from the top of footings to the underside of the floor slab (or 2'-0" maximum) and horizontally from the inside face of exterior walls a distance of 2'-0". 3. Vapor barrier under concrete slabs shall be placed after perimeter insulation is installed. 4. Installation, except as specific herein, shall be according to manufacturer's recommendations. All joints shall be tight and insulation shall be protected until concrete slabs on grade or concrete topping slabs are in place. 5. Thickness of perimeter slab insulation shall be two (2.0) inches. c. Rigid board insulation in cavity wall construction shall be installed as follows: 1. Rigid board insulation in cavity wall construction shall be secured to the inner wythe of masonry with mastic. Width of panels shall be the same as the vertical distance between horizontal joint reinforcement. All joints shall be tight and insulation shall be protected from damage until enclosed by construction. 2. Thickness of cavity wall insulation shall be one and one-half (1.5) inches. d. Foamed-in-place insulation shall be installed as follows: 1. Designated concrete block masonry construction shall be filled in lifts not exceeding approximately half the distance between floors or six(6) feet maximum in height. 2. All cells of designated assemblies shall be filled completely. e. No insulation specified herein shall be covered or enclosed until inspected by the Architect and approved. 7E-1 SECTION 7E – WEATHER BARRIERS 1. REQUIREMENTS: a. Refer to Project Drawings and these Specifications for location, quantity of material to be furnished and installation requirements related to weather barriers and related flashings. Furnish and install weather barriers and related flashings and accessories at all exterior wall surfaces of the wood framed building envelope. b. Refer to the following listed sections of specifications for related work affecting the work and/or products specified herein: Section 1A – Description of the Work Section 1L – Fire Resistance Requirements Section 1T – Submittals Section 1U – Storage and Protection Section 1V – Products and Substitutions Section 4A – Masonry Section 6A – Rough Carpentry Section 7H – Flashing and Sheet Metal Section 9H – Exterior Stucco c. Work shall comply with the requirements of the North Carolina State Building Code, Chapter 14 – Exterior Walls, Section 1403 – Performance Requirements. d The following listed standards of the American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM), the American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists (AATCC), and TAPPI are incorporated by reference and made a part of this specification to the same extent as if bound herein. 1. ASTM C920; Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants 2. ASTM C1193; Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants 3. ASTM D882; Test Method for Tensile Properties of Thin Plastic Sheeting 4. ASTM D1117; Standard Guide for Evaluating Non-woven Fabrics 5. ASTM E84: Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials 6. ASTM E96; Test Method for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials 7. ASTM E1677; Specification for Air Retarder Material or System for Framed Building Walls 8. ASTM E2178; Test Method for Air Permeance of Building Materials 9. ASTM E2357; Standard Test Method for Determining Air Leakage of Air Barrier Assemblies 10. AATCC Test Method 127 Water Resistance: Hydrostatic Pressure Test 11. TAPPI Test Method T-410; Grams of Paper and Paperboard (Weight per Unit Area) 12. TAPPI Test Method T460; Air Resistance (Gurley Hill Method) e. Refer to Section 1T – Submittals. Submittals shall include Product Data, Samples, Design Data and Test Reports, and Manufacturer’s written installation instructions. f. Product manufacturer shall be an established manufacturer of code compliant weather barrier systems. Installer shall be qualified by at least two years of previous experience in the installation of weather barrier products on projects of similar or larger size and complexity. 7E-2 g. Refer to Section 4A – Unit Masonry. Sample wall panels required under masonry shall be expanded to include all components of the exterior wall system including weather barriers. Sample panel shall include a typical window opening. Work shall not proceed until sample panel has been approved by product manufacturer and Architect. h. A pre-installation conference shall be held approximately two weeks prior to start of weather barrier installation. Attendees shall include Contractor, Architect, Engineer, Consultant, Installer, Owner’s Representative, and Weather Barrier Manufacturer’s Designated Representative. Topics of discussion shall include a review of all related project requirements and submittals, status of substrate work and preparation, areas of potential conflict and interface, availability of weather barrier assembly materials and components, installer’s training requirements, equipment, facilities and scaffolding, and coordinate methods, procedures and sequencing requirements for full and proper installation, integration and protection. i. Delivery and Storage: All materials shall be delivered in their original unopened packages and stored as required to provide protection from damage and exposure to the elements. Damaged or deteriorated materials shall be removed from the premises. j. At the completion of this project the weather barrier manufacturer shall provide a ten (10) year manufacturer’s warranty beginning on the date of substantial completion. This warranty shall be subject to the approval of the Architect. 2. PRODUCTS: a. Weather Barrier shall be Dupont “Tyvek Commercial Wrap” and related assembly components or approved equal. Accessories shall include seam tape, fasteners, sealants, adhesives, primers, and flashings as required by Weather Barrier manufacturer and illustrated on approved submittals to meet project requirements. 3. EXECUTION: a. Prior to installation, this Contractor shall examine all substrates to which weather barriers will be attached. Do not proceed with installation until unacceptable conditions have been corrected. b. Comply with the requirements of the North Carolina State Building Code and the installation instructions provided by the manufacturer as illustrated/directed in approved submittals for each substrate type. c. Include opening preparation and the furnishing and installation of all flashing material as required to produce a finished weather barrier system that can be warranted by the product manufacturer. 7F-1 SECTION 7F – CAULKING AND SEALANTS 1. REQUIREMENTS: a. Refer to Project Drawings for location, type and quantity of work specified herein. This section shall include all labor, materials, and equipment as required for the weatherproof installation of all exterior caulking and/or sealing of joints as indicated on Drawings and/or as specified herein. Include the caulking of masonry control joints; the caulking at the perimeters of door and window frames; the caulking of perimeters at louvers; the caulking of all other construction joints requiring the application of sealants; and the caulking of thresholds. b. Also include all labor, materials, and equipment as required for the installation of all interior caulking. Interior caulking shall include caulking at all framed openings, caulking at joints separating wall finishes or changes in wall direction, caulking at expansion joints, and all other caulking as required by the Architect to produce a finished building interior. c. Refer to the following listed sections of specifications for additional requirements affecting work specified herein: Section 1A – Description of the Work Section 4A – Unit Masonry Section 8B – Hollow Metal Doors and Frames Section 9B – Ceramic Tile Section 9E – Gypsum Wallboard Section 9G – Painting Section 9H – Exterior Stucco d. All surfaces to be sealed shall be treated with surface conditioner as required for proper adhesion of sealant. e. All surfaces to which caulking or sealant is to adhere shall be clean, dry, frost free and sound. Surface conditioner if required shall be applied with a brush. When materials are protected with a factory applied coating, remove coating at area to be sealed with a cloth soaked in lacquer thinner or other solvent that will not damage material. f. Joints greater than 3/8" in depth shall be partially filled with Ethafoam tube joint filler or a compatible rubber gasket or tape before application of sealant. Back-up materials shall be non-staining to sealant specified and shall conform according to ASTM D925. Areas adjacent to joints shall be masked if necessary to obtain a neat sealer line. 2. MATERIALS: a. Sealants for exterior use and for interior use where painting is not required shall be one component Pecora, or approved equal, No. 895NST silicone sealant (Type I or II as required). Similar and equal products as manufactured by Sonneborn, Bostik, or approved equal, will be allowed for use on this project when submitted with complete descriptive and technical information demonstrating product equality. The architect shall be the sole judge of product equality. Primers for sealants shall be as recommended by the sealant manufacturer for the application 7F-2 indicated. b. Caulking compound for interior areas to be painted shall be one of the following or approved equal. 1. DAP Acrylic Latex Caulk 2. Eternaflex Acrylic Latex Sealant 3. Pecora No. AC-20 Acrylic Latex Caulk c. Backers rods where required shall be Ethafoam Tube Joint Filler, compatible rubber gasket, or tape. Back-up materials shall be non-staining to sealant and shall conform to ASTM D925. d. Color of sealants, except paint grade sealants, shall be as selected by the Architect. Submit samples for Architect's selection and approval. 3. EXECUTION OF THE WORK: a. Joints and spaces to be caulked shall be clean, free from dust and dry. Prime surfaces that are in contact with caulking, before applying caulking. Joints more than 3/8 inch deep, and joints where a suitable backstop has not been provided, shall be suitably fitted with tube joint filler to within 1/2" of surface before application of caulking. b. Installation of caulking and sealants shall be as follows: l. The caulking and sealant shall be applied in accordance with manufacturer's specifications with a minimum exposure to air. 2. No solvent, diluent, thinning filler or other additive shall be added to caulking or sealant. 3. Application shall be by hand gun or pressure equipment following the manufacturer's specifications. All joints shall be filled solidly with the specified sealing compound forced into place under pressure. 4. If necessary, joints shall be tooled within ten minutes of application and masking tape shall be removed immediately. 5. Excess caulking or sealant shall be cleaned off non-porous surfaces while in uncured state with a commercial solvent. 6. On porous surfaces, excess sealant should be allowed to cure and then be removed by abrasion or other mechanical means. 7. Sealed joints shall not be disturbed for at least 48 hours to allow for cure. c. Exterior thresholds shall be set in a solid bed of sealant specified for exterior use. 7G-1 SECTION 7G – SHINGLE ROOFING 1. REQUIREMENTS: a. Refer to Project Drawings for location, size, and arrangement of areas to receive shingle roofing. Include all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to complete the installation of a self-sealing U.L. Rated Class "A" shingle roofing system as shown on project drawings and/or as specified herein for designated parapet walls. b. Include the furnishing and installation of double felt underlay over plywood deck, metal drip edges, flashings, and other accessories as required for a complete and functional weatherproof roof system at designated sloped roofs of new construction. c. Refer to the following listed sections of specifications for related work affecting work specified herein: Section 1A – Description of the Work Section 1L – Fire Resistance Requirements Section 1T – Submittals Section 7H – Flashing and Sheet Metal Division 15 – Mechanical (sections as Applicable) d. The following listed Standards are incorporated by reference and shall have the same force and effect as if bound herein: “NRCA Steep Roofing Manual” – latest edition e. Items involving roof penetrations, including plumbing vents, exhaust vents, and other prefabricated items of mechanical or electrical work shall be set in place and properly mounted before the installation of work specified herein. f. The Roofing Contractor shall examine all roof decks on which his work is to be applied and shall notify the Architect in writing, prior to starting work, of any defects which he considers detrimental to the proper installation of his materials. g. At the completion of the work, the roofing contractor shall furnish to the Owner a 25-year Shingle Bond issued by the shingle manufacturer and guaranteeing the instal-lation against material defects resulting in roof leaks. h. Submit color samples of shingle roofing to Architect for selection and approval prior to installation. 2. MATERIALS: a. Products specified are as manufactured by Certainteed. Similar and equal products as manufactured by Celeotex Corporations, GAF Materials Corporation, Owens Corning, or approved equal, are acceptable substitutes subject to color, style and warranty requirements. b. Underlayment shall be No. 15 asphalt saturated felt (non-perforated) as manufactured by Certainteed Corporation, or approved equal. c. Self-sealing U. L. Rated Class "A" shingles shall be as manufactured by the following, or approved equal: 7G-2 Certainteed “FungusBuster 25” self-sealing U.L. Class “A” glass fiber asphalt shingle, color to match existing roof. d. Fasteners shall be of 11 or 12 gauge galvanized wire with 3/8” – 7/16” diameter heads minimum, and length of 7/8” to 1”. e. Hot asphalt or mastic for use in underlayment installation shall be as per manufacturer’s recommendation for starter course and headlap application. 3. EXECUTION OF THE WORK: a. Underlayment shall be double layer application of 15# asphalt saturated felt (non-perforated). Comply with Figure 1 of NRCA Steep Roofing Manual. b. Metal drip edge shall be 24 gauge paint grip galvanized iron applied at all roof edges. Comply with Figure 4 of NRCA Steep Roofing Manual. c. Shingle installation over double felt underlayment shall consist of triple tab square butt strips with cut-outs centered. Comply with Figure 15 and Figure 17 of NRCA Steep Roofing Manual. d. Valleys shall be woven. Comply with Figure 21 of NRCA Steep Roofing Manual. e. Hip and ridge covers shall consist of individual shingle tabs applied shingle fashion with 5” exposure. f. Provide and install step flashings at shingle roof juncture with vertical surfaces. Comply with Figure 26 of NRCA Steep Roofing Manual. g. Each shingle shall be securely nailed as per manufacturer's recommendations and/or as recommended in the NRCA Steep Roofing Manual. h. Application of shingle roofing shall be in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions on shingle wrapper for low slope application except as specifically noted otherwise. i. Flash roof penetrations for vent pipes and other mechanical penetrations, provide metal drip edges at roof perimeter, provide step and cap flashings where roof surface abuts vertical surfaces, and coordinate roof installation with installation of other roof related work. 7H-1 SECTION 7H – FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: a. Refer to Project Drawings for location, type, quantity, and installation requirements for flashing and sheet metal work. Include all flashings and sheet metal work as required for the finished and weatherproof installation of cap flashings, counter flashings, step flashings, gutters and downspouts, metal drip edges and other exposed metal trim, as well as all concealed flashings. Work specified herein shall be Base Bid work. b. Refer to the following listed sections of specifications for additional requirements affecting work specified herein: Section 1A – Description of the Work Section 1T – Submittals Section 4A – Unit Masonry Section 7F – Caulking and Sealants Section 7G – Shingle Roofing Section 9G – Exterior Stucco Division 15 – Mechanical (sections as Applicable) c. Submittals 1. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. 2. Product Data, Flashing, Sheet Metal, and Accessories: Manufacturer's technical product data, installation instructions and general recommendations for each specified sheet material and fabricated product. Include data substantiating that materials to be furnished comply with specification requirements. 3. Samples of the following flashing, sheet metal, and accessory items: a) 8-in-square samples of specified sheet materials to be exposed as finished surfaces. b) 12-inch-long samples of factory-fabricated products exposed as finished work. Provide complete with specified factory finish. 4. Shop drawings showing layout, profiles, methods of joining, and anchorage details, including major exposed flashings, concealed flashings, and expansion joint systems. Provide layouts at 1/4-inch scale and details at 3-inch scale. d. Project Conditions Coordinate work of this section with interfacing and adjoining work for proper sequencing of each installation. Ensure best possible weather resistance and durability of work and protection of materials and finishes. All flashing and sheet metal associated with roof installation shall be compatible with roofing system and roofing warranty. 7H-2 2. MATERIALS: a. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Materials (cap flashing, counter flashing, and step flashings). 1. Copper: ASTM B 370; temper H00 (cold-rolled) except where temper 060 is required for forming; 16 oz. (0.0216-inch thick) except as otherwise indicated. Provide lead coating of 0.06 psf on exposed copper surfaces. 2. Lead-Coated Copper: ASTM B 101, Type I or II, Class A, not less than 0.06 psf on exposed surfaces. b. Metal Drip Edge 1. Fabricate from 24 gauge paint grip galvanized iron. c. Laminated Composition Sheet Flashing (thru-wall flashing, head flashing, and sill flashing) 1. Copper/Paper Flashing: 3-oz. copper sheet laminated between 2 sheets of bituminous impregnated creped Kraft paper or saturated fabric. 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a) Afco Products, Inc.; "Cop-R-Bond Duplex". b) Phoenix Building Products, Inc.; "Duplex Cop-R Flash". c) York Manufacturing, Inc.; "Cop-R-Tex Duplex". d. Gutters and Downspouts 1. Fabricate from 24 gauge paint grip galvanized iron. 2. Refer to project drawings for profiles and sizes. e. Miscellaneous Materials and Accessories. 1. Solder: For use with steel or copper, provide 50 - 50 tin/lead solder (ASTM B 32), with rosin flux. 2. Fasteners: Same metal as flashing/sheet metal or other non-corrosive metal as recommended by sheet manufacturer. Match finish of exposed heads with material being fastened. 3. Bituminous Coating: SSPC - Paint 12, solvent-type bituminous mastic, nominally free of sulfur, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. 7H-3 4. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene; non-hardening, non-skinning, non-drying, non-migrating sealant. 5. Elastomeric Sealant: Generic type recommended by manufacturer of metal and fabricator of components being sealed and complying with requirements for joint sealants as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers". 6. Epoxy Seam Sealer: 2-part non-corrosive metal seam cementing compound, recommended by metal manufacturer for exterior/interior non-moving joints including riveted joints. 7. Adhesives: Type recommended by flashing sheet manufacturer for waterproof/weather-resistant seaming and adhesive application of flashing sheet. 8. Paper Slip Sheet: 5-lb. rosin-sized building paper. 9. Polyethylene Underlayment: Minimum 6-mil carbonated polyethylene film resistant to decay when tested in accordance with ASTM E 154. 10. Reglets: Metal or plastic units of type and profile indicated, compatible with flashing indicated, non-corrosive. 11. Metal Accessories: Provide sheet metal clips, straps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units as required for installation of work, matching or compatible with material being installed, non-corrosive, size and gauge required for performance. 12. Elastic Flashing Filler: Closed-cell polyethylene or other soft closed-cell material recommended by elastic flashing manufacturer as filler under flashing loops to ensure movement with minimum stress on flashing sheet. 13. Roofing Cement: ASTM D 2822, asphaltic. f. Fabricated Units (cap flashing, counter flashings and metal edge drips) 1. General Metal Fabrication: Shop-fabricate work to greatest extent possible. Comply with details shown and with applicable requirements of SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and other recognized industry practices. Fabricate for waterproof and weather-resistant performance, with expansion provisions for running work, sufficient to permanently prevent leakage, damage, or deterioration of the work. Form work to fit substrates. Comply with material manufacturer instructions and recommendations for forming material. Form exposed sheet metal work without excessive oil-canning, buckling, and tool marks, true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 2. Seams: Fabricate non-moving seams in sheet metal with flat-lock seams. For metal other than aluminum, tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder. Form aluminum seams with epoxy seam sealer; rivet joints for additional strength where required. 7H-4 3. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in work cannot be sued or would not be sufficiently water/weatherproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints). 4. Sealant Joints: Where movable, non-expansion type joints are indicated or required for proper performance of work, form metal to provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant, in compliance with SMACNA standards. 5. Separations: Provide for separation of metal from non-compatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating concealed surfaces at locations of contact, with bituminous coating or other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer/fabricator. 3. EXECUTION: a. Installation Requirements 1. General: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations and with SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual". Anchor units of work securely in place by methods indicated, providing for thermal expansion of metal units; conceal fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weatherproof. 2. Underlayment: Where stainless steel or aluminum is to be installed directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a slip sheet of red rosin paper and a course of polyethylene underlayment. 3. Bed flanges of work in a thick coat of bituminous roofing cement where required for waterproof performance. Ensure that roofing cement or other bedding sealant is compatible with adjacent materials. 4. Install counterflashing in reglets, either by snap-in seal arrangement or by welding in place for anchorage and filling reglet with mastic or elastomeric sealant, as indicated and depending on degree of sealant exposure. 5. Install flashing material as indicated on Architectural Drawings and in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations or industry standards for each type and in each situation indicated. 6. Flashing material shall be preformed, insofar as practical, and shall be installed with full regard for expansion, contraction, and weathertightness. 7. Flashings set in masonry shall be set in a slurry of fresh mortar with a full bed of mortar above the flashing. Make end joints watertight by overlapping. 8. Sill and lintel flashings shall be turned up at the ends to form an end dam. All corners shall be folded; do not cut. 9. All through-wall flashings at the head of wall openings, at sills, and at the 7H-5 bottom of walls shall drain to the exterior through weep holes located in head joints at 16" on center. Keep weep holes free of mortar. 10. Provide straps or spikes for gutter support not to exceed 3’-0” centers. Secure downspouts with straps not to exceed 10’-0” centers, maximum spacing. b. Cleaning/Protection 1. Clean exposed metal surfaces, removing substances that might cause corrosion of metal and deterioration of finishes. 2. Protection: Advise Contractor of required procedures for surveillance and protection of flashings and sheet metal work during construction to ensure that work will be without damage or deterioration other than natural weathering at time of Substantial Completion. 8A-1 DIVISION 8 – DOORS, WINDOWS, AND GLASS SECTION 8A – COMPOSITE WOOD DOORS 1. REQUIREMENTS: a. Refer to Project Drawings for location, type, size, and quantity of interior doors to be furnished and installed under this Section of the Specifications. Furnish and install prehung raised panel doors and frames in sizes and thicknesses indicated on Project Drawings and/or as specified herein. b. Refer to the following listed sections of specifications for related work affecting the work and/or products specified herein: Section 1A – Description of the Work Section 1L – Fire Resistance and Sound Attenuation Requirements Section 1T – Submittals Section 6B – Finish Carpentry Section 6C - Millwork Section 8B – Hollow Metal Doors and Frames Section 8F – Hardware Section 9G – Painting c. Refer to Section 6B – Finish Carpentry and to Section 6C – Millwork. Installation of work specified herein shall be coordinated with Finish Carpentry. Casings shall be as specified under Millwork. d. Refer to Section 8F – Hardware for coordination of Hardware with door preparation to receive hardware. e. Prior to fabrication or delivery, the Contractor shall furnish complete shop drawings of all wood doors furnished under this section of the specifications for the Architect's review and approval. Shop drawings shall show sizes, thickness, location, construction, style, and glazed or louvered openings if required. Where glazing and/or louvers are required, provide details of installation. 2. MATERIALS: a. Products specified are as manufactured by Masonite. Similar and equal products of other manufacturers will be approved for use on this project when submitted with complete technical and descriptive literature confirming product equality. The Architect will be the sole judge of product equality. b. Pre-hung Doors and Frames shall be Masonite Molded Panel Series Doors and Frames. Doors shall be Masonite’s Safe ‘N Sound Solid Core 2 Panel Square Top Door, 1 3/8 inch thickness and sized as indicated on Project Drawings. 3. EXECUTION OF THE WORK: a. Doors shall be installed by experienced door installers according to manufacturer's recommendations and instructions. 8A-2 b. Installation tolerances shall meet the requirements of NFPA-80 “Standard For Fire Doors And Fire Windows”, Latest Edition. c. Doors that are damaged during the course of construction or doors that become damaged during the installation of finish hardware shall be removed by the General Contractor and replaced free of charge. 8B-1 SECTION 8B – HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 1. REQUIREMENTS: a. Refer to Project Drawings for location, type, arrangement, and quantity of work to be furnished and installed under this section of the specifications. Furnish and install hollow metal doors and frames, all as indicated on Project Drawings and/or as specified herein. All metal doors and frames shall be by the same manufacturer. b. Refer to the following listed sections of specifications for related work affecting the work and/or products specified herein: Section 1A – Description of the Work Section 1L – Fire Resistance Requirements Section 4A – Unit Masonry Section 6A – Rough Carpentry Section 7F – Caulking and Sealants Section 8D – Glass and Glazing Section 8F – Hardware Section 9G – Painting c. All materials used in the fabricating of steel doors shall be free from defects impairing their strength, durability or appearance. Doors shall conform to Commercial Standard CS 242-62 or PS4-66. d. Tops and bottoms of doors shall be closed with not less than 16 gauge channels. Tops of doors shall be completely closed. e. All materials used in the fabrication of pressed steel frames shall be free from defects impairing their strength, durability or appearance. Frames shall conform to Commercial Standard CS 242-62 or PS4-66. f. All hollow metal frames shall be 14 gauge and face sheets of all hollow metal doors shall be 16 gauge. All hollow metal doors and frames to the building exterior shall be entirely of galvanized steel. g. Prior to fabrication or delivery, the Contractor shall furnish complete shop drawings of all hollow metal doors and frames, including frames with sidelights, and window frames furnished under this section of the specifications for the Architect's review and approval. Shop drawings shall show sizes, thickness, location, construction, style, anchorage or attachment requirements, hardware preparation and glazed or louvered openings if required. Where glazing and/or louvers are required, provide details of installation. 2. MATERIALS: a. Hollow metal door frames with or without sidelights shall be Amweld Series 400 (Masonry) and Series 2600 (Drywall); Republic Steel Universal Door Frames-Series "FE" (Masonry) and Series "FH/MH" (Drywall); Kewanee "F-Line" Frames; or approved equal. 1. All Metal Frames shall be fabricated from 14 gauge steel. Frames shall be combination type with integral stop and trim. Head assemblies to be 8B-2 reinforced internally at each miter joint with 16 gauge channel shaped reinforcements. Provide Underwriter's Laboratories Labels with appropriate fire resistance and temperature rise ratings as required. 2. Multi-Purpose Headers and Jambs shall have self aligning tabs and slots for secure locking and shall be mitered, continuously arc welded on the frame face, and ground smooth to form a one-piece, neat mitered corner assembly. Frames shall be provided with removable spreaders securely fastened to bottom of jambs for rigidity during shipping and setting. 3. Door Frames shall be equipped with one welded-in floor anchor in each jamb. Three field inserted steel snap-in anchors (maximum of 24" o.c.) shall also be provided for each jamb. Window frames shall be provided with two field inserted steel snap-in anchors (maximum 24” o.c.) for each jamb. Anchors shall be of the proper type for the particular construction involved (i.e. steel stud, concrete, masonry, etc.). 4. Hardware Preparation: Frames shall be mortised, reinforced, drilled and tapped at the factory to receive full mortised hinges and strikes as specified in the hardware schedule. See Section 8F -Hardware. Plaster guards shall be installed in back of all applicable hardware cut outs. Frames shall be reinforced for surface applied hardware. Strike jambs shall be punched to receive three (3) rubber bumper silencers. Furnish glazing stops at framed openings as required to accommodate glazing materials. 5. Provide reinforcing for all butt hinges and closers on hollow metal frames. Provide reinforcing for all mortised and surface mounted hardware. Drill and tap at factory for all mortised hardware. Drill and tap at factory for surface mounted hardware. Metal door and frame shop details shall positively identify size and location of required steel reinforcing for surface mounted hardware as well as for mortised hardware. 6. Exterior hollow metal door frames shall be constructed entirely of hot-dip galvanized sheet steel conforming to ASTM-525-A-60. 7. Workmanship: All work shall be shop fabricated to required profiles by forming and welding with corners, angles, and edges straight and sharp unless covered by bull nose, etc. Fit and fabricate accurately with corners, joints, seams and surfaces free from warp, wave, buckle or other defects. 8. Shop Painting: All exposed surfaces shall be cleaned, bonderized and given one baked-on shop coat of gray synthetic primer. 9. Storage: Frames shall be stored in an upright position under cover on the building site, on wood sills, or on floors in a manner that will prevent rust and damage. Avoid creating a humidity chamber by using a plastic or canvas shelter and not venting the area covered. b. Hollow metal Doors shall be Amweld Building Products 1500 Series (Standard) and 2500 Series (Galvanized) "Supercore" Steel Doors; Kewanee "D" Series Doors; Republic Series "DE" steel doors; or approved equal. All metal doors shall have face sheets of 16 gauge steel. 1. Doors shall be mortised, reinforced, drilled and tapped to receive mortise hardware as specified in the hardware schedule. Doors shall be 8B-3 reinforced and drilled and tapped for specified surface applied hardware. Hinge reinforcing plates shall be No. 10 gauge. Reinforcing for surface and mortised hardware shall be 14 gauge except for closer reinforcings which shall be 12 gauge. All locks shall have flat faces. 2. Where noted or required, provide for the doors Underwriter's Laboratories labels with appropriate fire resistance and temperature rise ratings for the class of openings indicated. Construction details and hardware applications authorized by the labeling authorities shall take precedence over project details or specifications. 3. Doors to be glazed shall be furnished with formed glazing strips of the snap-in type (no screws allowed), to permit selection of secure side in the field. Glazing arrangements shall accommodate ¼ inch or ½ inch thick glazing material as noted on Drawings. 4. Unless otherwise specified, the location of locks, latches, push-pull plates and bars, exit devices, handle sets, closer reinforcings, roller latches and arm pulls shall conform to the recommendations of the National Builders Hardware Association. 5. All work shall be shop fabricated to required profiles by forming and welding with corners, angles and edges straight and sharp. Fit and fabricate accurately with corners, joints, seams and surfaces free from wave, warp, buckle or other defects. 6. All exposed surfaces shall be cleaned and given one baked on shop coat of gray synthetic primer. 7. All doors shall be individually packaged in cartons completely covering entire door to prevent damage or marring of the finish. Doors shall be stored in an upright position under cover on the building site, on wood sills or on floors in a manner that will prevent rust and damage. Avoid creating a humidity chamber by using a plastic or canvas shelter and not venting the area covered. 3. EXECUTION OF THE WORK: a. Pressed steel frames and entrance doors and frames shall be installed by the General Contractor. Installation shall be plumb, straight and true, rigidly secured in place, and properly braced. Frames shall be anchored to concrete floors with powder actuated bolts. The frame installer shall be responsible for the squareness of the frames in place. b. Installation tolerances shall meet the requirements of N.F.P.A.-80 “Standard For Fire Doors And Fire Windows”, Latest Edition. c. Doors shall be installed by a competent door erector and in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 8C-1 SECTION 8C - GLASS AND GLAZING 1. REQUIREMENTS: a. Refer to Project Drawings for location and quantity of Work described herein. Furnish and install all glass or glazing material as indicated on drawings and/or specified herein except those items which are specifically noted otherwise. Include the installation of glass and glazing materials at designated wood and hollow metal door and the glazing of designated hollow metal windows – all as indicated on Project Drawings and/or specified herein. b. Refer to the following listed sections of specifications for related work affecting work specified herein: Section 1A – Description of the Work Section 1L – Fire Resistance Requirements Section 7D – Caulking and Sealants Section 8A – Wood Doors Section 8B – Hollow Metal Doors and Frames Section 8F – Overhead Sectional Doors c. In addition to Glass and Glazing, this Section of the Specifications shall include the installation and performance of work specified in the following listed Sections of Specifications: Section 8A – Wood Doors Section 8B – Hollow Metal Doors and Frames Section 8F – Overhead Sectional Doors d. Upon completion of work specified herein and installed under this section of the specifications, this contractor shall deliver to the Owner a written guarantee covering this work. The guarantee shall commit this contractor to the prompt repair or replacement, at no expense to the Owner, of any part of the work which may prove to be defective during a period of two years from the date of acceptance of installation. This guarantee shall cover the weathertightness, as applicable, of all work installed herein, including the perimeters of this work where it abuts other work such as concrete, brick, etc. e. In addition to the Contractor’s Two Year Warranty stipulated above, insulated glass shall be warranted against visual obstruction due to seal failure (excluding glass breakage), for a period of ten (10) years from date of project acceptance. f. Glass and glazing shall comply with the requirements of the North Carolina State Building Code, Chapter 24 – Glass and Glazing, Section 2406 – Safety Glazing, Table 2406.1, Category II, and with the requirements of C.P.S.C. 16CFR-1201. g. All glass or glazing material shall be labeled. Labels shall not be removed prior to inspection and approval of glass or glazing material by the Architect. h. Responsibility for glass or glazing material sizes rests with the glazing contractor. All glass or glazing material sizes shall be obtained from the manufacturer of the items to be glazed or from field measurement. i. All glass or glazing material breakage during execution of work or breakage caused by faulty installation shall be replaced without additional cost to Owner. 8C-2 j. In all locations where glass stops are indicated or required, they shall be carefully removed and reset to avoid any marking or defacing. k. Glass and Glazing material which does not fully meet the requirements of its grade, or is improperly set, will not be accepted. Such glass shall be reset or replaced to the Architect's satisfaction and without additional cost to Owner. l. All insulated glass units will be manufactured using hot melt extruded butyl seals to afford the lowest possible Moisture Vapor Transmission Rate (MTVR). m. Fire-rated doors shall be single glazed with ¼” clear 20 minute, CPSC Cat. II, clear specialty tempered glazing. n. Other wood and/or hollow metal doors shall be single glazed with ¼ tempered glass as noted on project drawings and/or specified herein. o. Windows shall be double glazed with insulating glass as noted on drawings and/or specified herein. 2. MATERIALS: a. Clear tempered glass at single glazed openings shall be ¼” clear Herculite Tempered Safety Glass, glazing quality, as manufactured by Pittsburg Plate Glass Industries, Inc.; ¼” glazing quality Clear Starlux Float Tru-Temp Tempered Safety Glass as manufactured by ASG Industries, Inc.; ¼” glazing quality clear float Tuf-Flex Tempered Safety Glass as manufactured by Libbey-Owens-Ford Company; or approved equal. b. Insulating glass shall be a one inch (1.0”) thick assembly consisting of 3/16 inch clear exterior light and a 3/16 inch clear interior light. No. 3 surface shall be low E coated. Glass adjacent to doors shall be tempered. c. Perimeter caulking shall be as specified within Section 7B – Caulking and Sealants. Other caulking shall be as recommended by the manufacturer of the materials being installed, subject to the approval of the Architect. d. Glazing compound or gaskets where required shall be of a type suitable for the use intended and shall remain elastic under extreme conditions of exposure, unaffected by vibration and not injurious to window sashes and/or frames to be glazed. 3. EXECUTION OF THE WORK: a. All glass or glazing material shall be set as detailed or in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications for items to be glazed. b. Where double glazing is required, furnish such units preassembled as “Thermopane” units by Libbey-Owens-Ford, “Twindow” units by Pittsburg Plate Glass, or approved equal. c. In the event of discrepancies or inconsistencies between this section of the specifications and Chapter 24 of the N.C. State Building Code, the requirements of the State Building Code shall govern. d. At the completion of the work, all glazing installed under this section of the specifications shall be properly cleaned and made ready for use by the Owner. 8C-1 SECTION 8C – WOOD WINDOWS 1. REQUIREMENTS: a. Refer to Project Drawings for location, quantity, size, arrangement and style of windows and trim. This section of the specifications shall include all labor, material, equipment, and services necessary for and properly incidental to the fabrication and delivery to jobsite of double hung windows and trim illustrated on project drawings and/or as specified herein. b. Refer to the following listed sections of specifications for related work affecting the work and/or products specified herein: Section 1A – Description of the Work Section 1I - Alternates Section 1T – Submittals Section 6A – Rough Carpentry Section 6B - Finish Carpentry Section 6C - Millwork Section 9E – Gypsum Wallboard Section 9H – Exterior Stucco c. Refer to Section 6A – Rough Carpentry for coordination requirements. Provide rough opening requirements for each window type to framing contractor for his use in preparing rough openings to receive windows. d. Refer to Section 6B – Finish Carpentry. Installation of work specified herein shall be coordinated with Finish Carpentry Work. e. Submit Shop Drawings showing proposed assembly, operation, and installation of each window type; including hardware, accessories, and trim, for Architect's approval prior to fabrication or shipment of window units. 2. MATERIALS: a. Products specified are as manufactured by Anderson Corporation. Similar and equal products of other manufacturers will be approved for use on this project when submitted with complete technical and descriptive literature confirming product equality. The Architect will be the sole judge of product equality. b. Windows shall be similar and equal to Anderson Series 400 Tilt-wash Double Hung Wood/Composite windows in the sizes and assemblies illustrated on Project Drawings. All windows shall be factory preglazed with low-E insulating glass. Grille type shall be simulated divided light with colonial grille pattern. Provide manufacturer’s standard framed insect screens at operating sections of windows. Furnish complete with trim, operating hardware, sash lock, and other accessories as required for a functional and finished window installation. 3. EXECUTION OF THE WORK: a. Installation of Windows shall be coordinated with the work of Section 6B-Finish Carpentry. 8C-2 b. Prior to installation, this contractor shall inspect all rough openings into which his work will be installed. Verify that rough openings are properly prepared and flashings properly installed to receive window assemblies. Do not proceed with window installation until satisfactory conditions exist. c. Window units shall be installed with sills and heads level and jambs plumb and properly blocked and anchored. Check for squareness of unit before final anchoring in wall. d. Protect and finish paint exposed wood members promptly. Lap paint onto glass, both inside and out. Keep paint off weatherstrips and interior hardware finish. e. Protect units during construction; check units for proper operation before installing interior trim. f. Units damaged during shipment, storage, or the course of construction shall be replaced by the Contractor free of charge to the Owner. g. Installation of units not otherwise specified or indicated shall be as recommended by the manufacturer and as illustrated on approved shop drawings. h. At completion of work, clean all glass, adjust all hardware, and leave operating units in sound and free operating condition. 8D-1 SECTION 8D - GLASS AND GLAZING 1. REQUIREMENTS: a. Refer to Project Drawings for location and quantity of Work described herein. Furnish and install all glass or glazing material as indicated on drawings and/or specified herein except those items which are specifically noted otherwise. Include the installation of glass and glazing materials at designated wood and hollow metal doors – all as indicated on Project Drawings and/or specified herein. b. Refer to the following listed sections of specifications for related work affecting work specified herein: Section 1A – Description of the Work Section 1L – Fire Resistance Requirements Section 7F – Caulking and Sealants Section 8A – Wood Doors Section 8B – Hollow Metal Doors and Frames c. In addition to Glass and Glazing, this Section of the Specifications shall include the installation and performance of work specified in the following listed Sections of Specifications: Section 8A – Wood Doors Section 8B – Hollow Metal Doors and Frames d. The glazing of prefabricated wood windows is not included in this section of the work. Refer to Specifications Section 8C – Wood Windows for glazing requirements related to factory glazed windows. e. Upon completion of work specified herein and installed under this section of the specifications, this contractor shall deliver to the Owner a written guarantee covering this work. The guarantee shall commit this contractor to the prompt repair or replacement, at no expense to the Owner, of any part of the work which may prove to be defective during a period of two years from the date of acceptance of installation. This guarantee shall cover the weathertightness, as applicable, of all work installed herein, including the perimeters of this work where it abuts other work such as concrete, brick, etc. f. In addition to the Contractor’s Two Year Warranty stipulated above, insulated glass shall be warranted against visual obstruction due to seal failure (excluding glass breakage), for a period of ten (10) years from date of project acceptance. g. Glass and glazing shall comply with the requirements of the North Carolina State Building Code, Chapter 24 – Glass and Glazing, Section 2406 – Safety Glazing, Table 2406.1, Category II, and with the requirements of C.P.S.C. 16CFR-1201. h. All glass or glazing material shall be labeled. Labels shall not be removed prior to inspection and approval of glass or glazing material by the Architect. i. Responsibility for glass or glazing material sizes rests with the glazing contractor. All glass or glazing material sizes shall be obtained from the manufacturer of the items to be glazed or from field measurement. j. All glass or glazing material breakage during execution of work or breakage caused by faulty installation shall be replaced without additional cost to Owner. 8D-2 k. In all locations where glass stops are indicated or required, they shall be carefully removed and reset to avoid any marking or defacing. l. Glass and Glazing material which does not fully meet the requirements of its grade, or is improperly set, will not be accepted. Such glass shall be reset or replaced to the Architect's satisfaction and without additional cost to Owner. m. Fire-rated doors shall be single glazed with ¼” clear 20 minute, CPSC Cat. II, clear specialty tempered glazing. n. Other wood and/or hollow metal doors shall be single glazed with either ¼” clear wire glass or ¼ tempered glass as noted on project drawings and/or specified herein. 2. MATERIALS: a. Clear tempered glass at single glazed openings shall be ¼” clear Herculite Tempered Safety Glass, glazing quality, as manufactured by Pittsburg Plate Glass Industries, Inc.; ¼” glazing quality Clear Starlux Float Tru-Temp Tempered Safety Glass as manufactured by ASG Industries, Inc.; ¼” glazing quality clear float Tuf-Flex Tempered Safety Glass as manufactured by Libbey-Owens-Ford Company; or approved equal. b. Clear wire glass where indicated shall be ¼” Diamond Polished Neuweld as manufactured by ASG Industries, Inc.; ¼” Mississippi Polished Misco Wire Glass as manufactured by Combustion Engineering, Inc.; 1/4” Misco Polished Wired Glass as manufactured by Libbey-Owens-Ford Company; or approved equal. All wire glass shall be U.L. rated. c. Perimeter caulking shall be as specified within Section 7B – Caulking and Sealants. Other caulking shall be as recommended by the manufacturer of the materials being installed, subject to the approval of the Architect. d. Glazing compound or gaskets where required shall be of a type suitable for the use intended and shall remain elastic under extreme conditions of exposure, unaffected by vibration and not injurious to window sashes and/or frames to be glazed. 3. EXECUTION OF THE WORK: a. All glass or glazing material shall be set as detailed or in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications for items to be glazed. b. In the event of discrepancies or inconsistencies between this section of the specifications and Chapter 24 of the N.C. State Building Code, the requirements of the State Building Code shall govern. c. At the completion of the work, all glazing installed under this section of the specifications shall be properly cleaned and made ready for use by the Owner. 8E-1 SECTION 8E – THRESHOLDS AND WEATHERSTRIPPING 1. REQUIREMENTS: a. Refer to Project Drawings and these specifications for location, quantity and type of thresholds and weatherstripping required. Include the furnishing and installation of thresholds and weatherstripping at all doors separating environmentally controlled space from unconditioned space. b. Refer to the following sections of specifications for related work affecting work specified herein: Section 1A – Description of the Work Section 1I – Alternates Section 1T – Submittals Section 7F – Caulking and Sealants Section 8B – Hollow Metal Doors and Frames Section 8F – Hardware c. Submit shop drawings and samples of proposed products for Architect’s approval of type and finish. d. Thresholds and Weatherstripping shall be installed at all new door openings separating conditioned space from unconditioned space. 2. MATERIALS: a. Products specified herein are as manufactured by Reese Enterprises, Inc., except as otherwise noted. Similar and equal products of the same profile, finish and thickness as manufactured by National Guard Products, Inc., Pemko Manufacturing Co., or approved equal, shall be acceptable substitutes for the products specified. b. Threshold for offset applications shall be Reese No. S239A Half Saddle Threshold. c. Weatherstripping at exterior door openings shall be as follows: Reese No. 798 Polyprene Weatherstripping – Top and sides Reese No. 964C Door Sweep – Door Bottom 3. INSTALLATION: a. Installation of thresholds and sweeps shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, subject to the approval of the Architect. b. Thresholds shall be cut to fit snugly between the jambs of openings in which they occur. Scribe and cut ends to match profiles of jambs at each opening. Only single pieces of thresholds shall be allowed at each opening. c. Thresholds at exterior openings shall be bedded in weatherproof mastic to form a positive waterstop at thresholds. d. Weatherstripping at each side and top of door opening shall be of single piece construction and installed the full length or width of the opening. Door sweeps shall 8E-2 also be of single piece construction and installed the full width of the door bottom. 8F -1 SECTION 8F – HARDWARE 1. GENERAL: a. Description of Work 1. It is the intention of this specification to include the complete finishing hardware requirements for this project except for units which are specifically mentioned hereinafter as being furnished by others. Any unit not specifically mentioned herein must be furnished and should be consistent with the specifications for similar units. 2. Refer to the following listed sections of specifications for additional requirements affecting this section of the work: Section 1A – Description of the Work Section 1H – Allowances Section 1L – Fire Resistance Requirements Section 6B – Finish Carpentry Section 8A – Wood Doors Section 8B – Hollow Metal Door and Frames 3. Installation of finished hardware is included in the General Contract. Refer to Section 6B - Finish Carpentry. The contractor shall provide competent craftsman skilled in the installation of hardware. Each workman shall demonstrate his proficiency by installing hardware on one door. This door will be inspected and approved by the Architect before further hardware installation continues. 4. The hardware supplier shall have available locally a qualified hardware consultant who shall be available to the contractor and the architect so that consultation and installation problems can be promptly handled. Minimum job site visitation by the hardware consultant shall be as specified herein. This requirement is not intended to shift the responsibility of inspection of the work away from the architect nor to relieve the contractor of the responsibility of providing competent craftsmen and making proper installation of the hardware. b. Details 1. After award of contract, the Architect and the Owner will meet with the hardware supplier to select the hardware for this project and to develop a specific schedule of finish hardware requirements. The hardware supplier shall consult the project drawings and details and familiarize himself with the work to the end that all items of hardware furnished shall conform to the units to which they are to be applied and shall not conflict with each other in their normal operation. 2. The hardware supplier shall coordinate his work with other involved trades such as the millwork supplier, wood door supplier, metal door and/or frame supplier, aluminum door and storefront supplier, electrical subcontractor, etc. 8F -2 c. Quality Assurance 1. The hardware supplier shall, in the opinion of the architect, have sufficient experience and be connected with an organization consisting of member of THE AMERICAN SOCIETY OF ARCHITECTURAL HARDWARE CONSULTANTS who shall oversee the proper handling, servicing and detailing of the finish hardware in a satisfactory manner. 2. The project shall be visited by the supplier at least three (3) times during the course of the construction. He shall instruct the installers in the proper application of all hardware items and at completion of the construction shall check all items for proper functioning. A letter shall be written to the architect before final inspection stating that the above has been performed. 3. The hardware supplier shall submit for approval a minimum of five (5) detailed schedules of the finish hardware as soon as possible after the award of the construction contract. Each schedule shall include a folio containing cut sheets and other descriptive data describing in detail all items which the contractor proposes to furnish. 4. If required by the architect to assure that any item of hardware proposed to be furnished by the supplier is consistent with the quality of the item specified, the supplier shall furnish exact sample at no expense to the owner or architect. 5. All similar items shall be furnished from the same manufacturer. 2. PRODUCTS: a. Finish Hardware: The General Contractor shall include in his Proposal an allowance of Two Thousand Five Hundred and no/100 ($2,500.00) dollars for the purchase and delivery of all finish hardware and other miscellaneous items as directed. b. The above listed Hardware Allowance includes all applicable sales taxes. c. Installation of Finish Hardware is not included in the specified allowances for Finish Hardware and shall be performed without additional cost to the Owner. 3. EXECUTION: a. Hardware Locations Mount hardware at heights and locations in "Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware" by NBHA, except as required by local governing regulations, handicapped code, or as directed by the Architect. b. Installation 1. Install all hardware in compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 8F -3 2. Where cutting and fitting is required to install hardware in or on material which is later to be painted or finished, all hardware shall be removed before said painting or finishing and re-installed after finishing process. 3. Drill and/or countersink units which are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners in accordance with industry standards. 4. Thresholds where required shall be of one piece and seated in full bed of sealant. 5. At the completion of hardware installation, all hardware shall be adjusted and left in proper working order. 8G-1 SECTION 8G – ACCESS DOORS 1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS a. Refer to the Project drawings for location and quantity of access doors required. Furnish and install either rated or non-rated ceiling and/or wall access doors as indicated on drawings and/or as required to access in-wall or above ceiling devices. Rated doors shall be required only in rated assemblies. b. Refer to the following sections of specifications for related work affecting work specified herein: Section 1A – Description of the Work Section 1L – Fire Resistance and Sound Attenuation Requirements Section 1T – Submittals Section 1V – Products and Substitutions Section 9E – Gypsum Wallboard c. Finishing of access doors shall be as specified in Division 9 - Finishes. d. Shop Drawings shall be submitted to show elevations of each proposed door type, detail of frame installation, location in the building, size, and requirements for hardware. 2. MATERIALS a. Metal Access Panel for Access to Attic from shall be Global Industrial Fire-Rated and Insulated Metal Access Panel No. T9AB193291, size 36” W x 36” H and finished with white finish. Similar and equal products of other manufacturers may be approved for use on this project when submitted with complete descriptive and technical data confirming product equality. The Architect shall be the sole judge of product equality. b. All other wall or ceiling access doors shall be either rated or non-rated as required by the assembly into which it will be installed. Each panel shall be of the minimum size required to access the in-wall device which it serves and of the proper type to blend with the surrounding wall or ceiling surface. Suitable manufacturers are Acudor, Cesco, J.L. Industries, or approved equal. c. Access doors shall be keyed alike and access door finish shall match the surrounding wall or ceiling finish. 3. EXECUTION a. Access doors shall be installed according to the manufacturer's recommendations as illustrated on approved shop drawings. b. Position doors to accommodate intended access function. 8H -1 SECTION 8H - COILING COUNTER SHUTTERS 1. REQUIREMENTS: a. Refer to the Project Drawings for the location and size of coiling counter shutters. Work of this section is Base Bid Work and includes the furnishing and installation of one (1) coiling counter shutter at designated wall opening between Kitchen and Fellowship Hall b. Refer to the following listed sections of specifications for related work affecting the work and/or products specified herein: Section 1A – Description of the Work Section 1L - Fire Resistance Requirements Section 1T - Submittals Section 1U – Storage and Protection Section 1V – Products and Substitutes c. Provide product data, manufacturer's installation specifications and shop drawings, if applicable, for work installed under this section. 2. MATERIALS: a. Provide coiling counter shutters constructed in accordance with the requirements of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. for a class "B" label (1-1/2 hour rating) and sized as indicated on project drawings. Shutters shall be manufactured by one of the following (or by an approved equal): Atlas Door Corporation, Edison, NJ Kinnear (Harsco Corporation), Columbus, OH Mahon Door Corporation, Warren, MI b. Curtain shall be formed of stainless steel interlocking flat slats, no lighter than 22 gauge. Each end of each slat shall be fitted with end locks. Bottom bar is to be of angles equipped with slide locking bolts. c. Guides shall be stainless steel, fabricated to details as approved by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. d. Counterbalance Assembly springs to be helical torsion type with a safety factor of 25%. Springs to be mounted on a steel torsion shaft, and housed in a steel pipe. Furnish sealed ball bearings to minimize wear of pipe shaft rotation around inner shaft. e. Bracket plates shall be 1/8" thick minimum steel, to carry counterbalance assembly and curtain. Brackets shall form end closures, and support hood. f. Automatic closing is to be by release of a fusible link. Bracket is to be equipped with a starting device which when released permits the shutter to automatically close. Governor controls are to be provided as required by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. g. Hood shall be stainless steel of 24 gauge minimum. 8H -2 3. EXECUTION OF WORK: a. The Contractor shall verify that openings for shutters are square and plumb before installation of work. He shall provide sufficient blocking around the openings for attachment of the guides and brackets. b. The rolling shutters shall be installed plumb and level; shutters shall be face mounted on the kitchen side of the opening. Follow the manufacturer's fastening schedule. c. The General Contractor shall protect shutters from damage and soiling until completion of the Project. 9A-1 DIVISION 9 – FINISHES SECTION 9A – TILE CARPETING: 1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: a. SUMMARY OF WORK: 1. Tile carpeting is not included in base bid work. Refer to Refer to Specifications Section 1I – Alternates. If Alternate G-2 is accepted, this section shall include all work required to complete the installation of tile carpeting, edge strips and accessories as indicated by project drawings and/or as specified herein. Furnish supplementary items necessary for its proper installation. 2. Refer to the following listed Sections of Specifications for additional requirements and related work affecting work and/or products specified herein: Section 1A – Description of the Work Section 1H – Allowances Section 1I – Alternates Section 1L – Fire Resistance Requirements Section 1T – Submittals Section 2A – Demolition Section 6B – Finish Carpentry b. REFERENCES: 1. All carpeting shall conform as applicable to “The Carpet and Rug Institute’s Standard for Installation of Commercial Carpet CRI-104”. c. Submittals shall include the following: 1. Product data for selected tile carpeting. Include manufacturer’s written data on physical characteristics, durability, static resistance and fade resistance. 2. Shop drawings showing proposed layout, patterns, and accessories. 3. Full size sample of selected carpet tile. 4. Manufacturer’s warranties, installation instructions and maintenance instructions. 5. Product test reports based on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. d. QUALITY ASSURANCE: 1. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer shall submit evidence of having not less than five (5) years documented experience in manufacturing specified carpet. 2. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is a member of the Floor Covering Installation Contractors Association (FCICA) and/or certified by the Certified Floorcovering Installers Association (CFI), or who can demonstrate compliance with its certification program requirements. Installer shall be a specialty contractor normally engaged in this type of work with a minimum of three (3) years documented experience in commercial installation of these materials. e. Provide minimum ten (10) year warranty on manufacturer’s standard form in which 9A-2 manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. f. Deliver carpeting materials in original mill protective wrapping, with mill register numbers and tags attached. Store inside, in well ventilated area, protected from weather, moisture, and soiling. Comply with CRI-104. 2. MATERIALS: a. Refer to Section 1H – Allowances. The General Contractor shall include in his Base Bid an allowance of $4.00 per square foot for the purchase and delivery (tax included) of all carpet tile to be installed as specified herein. This allowance is for material only. All other costs related to installation (subfloor preparation, adhesives, etc.) shall be included in contractor’s base bid. Any difference between the actual cost of carpet tile delivered to the jobsite and this allowance shall be adjusted in the Contract Amount by Change Order. b. Include the following listed installation accessories: 1. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or recommended by carpet manufacturer. 2. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet and that is recommended by carpet manufacturer. 3. Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of width shown, of height required to protect exposed edge of carpet, and of maximum lengths to minimize running joints. Edge strips shall be in compliance with the requirements of the Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG). 4. Resilient Edge Strips, tapered to meet abutting materials as indicated on Drawings. Edge Strips shall be in compliance with the requirements of the Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG). 3. EXECUTION OF THE WORK: a. EXAMINATION: 1. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet performance. Examine carpet for type, color, patterns, and potential defects. 2. Do not proceed with tile carpeting installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. b. PREPARATION: 1. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 7.3, “Site Conditions; Floor Preparation:, and with carpet manufacturer’s written installation instruction for preparing substrates. 2. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer’s written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks, holes and depressions 1/8 inch wide or wider, and protrusions more than 1/32 inch unless more stringent requirements are required by manufacturer’s written instructions. 3. Remove coating, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by carpet 9A-3 manufacturer. 4. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet. c. INSTALLATION: 1. Comply with CRI 104 and carpet manufacturer’s written installation instructions for Direct-Glue-Down Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 9 “Direct Glue-Down Installation”. 2. Comply with carpet manufacturer’s written recommendation and Shop Drawings for seam/joint locations and direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways, center seams under the door in closed position. 3. Cut and fit carpet to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings and thresholds. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet manufacturer. 4. Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings. 5. Maintain reference markets, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, non-staining marking device. d. CLEAN-UP 1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet manufacturer. 2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet surface. 3. Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face-beater element. 4. Protect installed carpet to comply with CRI 104, Section 16, “Protection of Indoor Installations”. 5. Protect carpet against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet manufacturer and carpet adhesive manufacturer. 9B-1 SECTION 9B – CERAMIC TILE 1. REQUIREMENTS: a. See Project Drawings for areas requiring ceramic tile. Furnish and install all ceramic tile work including all labor, materials, and equipment as indicated and/or required for a complete and functional installation of ceramic tile in designated kitchen floor. b. Refer to the following listed sections of specifications for related work affecting the work and/or products specified herein: Section 1A – Description of the Work Section 1H – Allowances Section 1T – Submittals Section 6A – Rough Carpentry Section 7F – Caulking and Sealants Section 9E – Gypsum Wallboard c. The following listed standards are incorporated by reference and are hereby made a part of this specification to the same extent as if bound herein: 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) ANSI A10.20 Safety Requirements for Ceramic Tile, Terrazzo and Marble Work ANSI A108.5 Ceramic Tile installed with Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex Portland Cement Mortar ANSI A108.10 Installation of Grout in Tilework ANSI A108.13 Installation of Load Bearing, Bonded, Waterproof Membranes for Thin-Set Ceramic Tile and Dimension Stone ANSI A118.1 Dry-set Portland Cement Mortar ANSI A118.4 Latex Portland Cement Mortar ANSI A118.6 Standard Cement Grouts for Tile Installation ANSI A118.7 Polymer Modified Tile Grouts for Tile Installation ANSI A137.1 Specifications for Ceramic Tile 2. American Society for Testing and Materials ASTM C144 Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar ASTM C150 Standard Specification for Portland Cement ASTM C920 Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants 9B-2 3. Tile Council of America, Inc. "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation”, latest Edition. Installation Method F113 Dry-Set Mortar or Latex-Portland Cement (Over Concrete Slab-on-grade floors) Installation Method EJ171 Vertical and Horizontal Joint Design Essentials (Expansion Joints) d. Ceramic Tile Work shall be installed by qualified and skilled tile setters thoroughly experienced in the installation of designated tile systems. Evidence of experience, qualifications and competency may be required as a condition precedent to the initiation of work specified herein. e. Following selection of tile, provide three (3) full size physical samples of each selected tile color, type and shape including accessories for Architect’s verification of intent. Also include complete descriptive product data for Architect’s approval of each type of product specified. f. Deliver, store and handle specified materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Prevent damage or contamination of materials by water, temperature, foreign matter or other causes. Immediately remove damaged or non-compliant materials from project site. g. Maintain proper environmental conditions during and after installation of ceramic tile systems. Minimum environmental standards during ceramic tile installation and for a minimum of seven (7) days following completion of tile work require temperatures within the building to be maintained within the range of 55 degrees to 70 degrees F. During this time adequate ventilation shall be provided to carry off excess moisture. Refer to Ceramic Tile installation Standards and manufacturer’s recommendations for specific and/or additional requirements. h. At the completion of work specified, this contractor shall deliver to the Owner full size units equal in quantity to approximately three percent (3%) of each type, composition, color, pattern, and size of ceramic tile used. Extra materials shall be packaged for storage and labeled to identify contents. i. Before setting tile, furnish Architect with Tile Manufacturer's Association Standard Form of Master Grade Certificate signed by contractor and manufacturer and stating grade, kind of tile and identification marks for packages of tile delivered to job. j. All surfaces shall be free of dust, deleterious film and all non-compatible matter. Floors shall be level or properly sloped as indicated on Project Drawings and true. Report any defective surfaced backing materials and underbeds to the Architect before starting on tile work. Do not begin tile work until defective substrates are corrected. k. Cooperate with other trades and give sufficient advance notice to allow a reasonable time for the installation of related work to avoid cutting or patching. l. It will be the responsibility of this Contractor to protect tile work during the period of installation. Broken, chipped, cracked or otherwise faulty tile will not be accepted. No traffic shall be allowed on the floors after installation for at least 48 hours. 9B-3 m. Tile shall be selected by Architect after bids are received. Until such time as specific tiles, including colors and shapes, are selected, this contractor shall include in his Base Bid on allowance for the purchase and delivery (tax included) of tile material to be furnished and installed under this section of the specifications. 2. MATERIALS: a. Materials for thin-set installation of ceramic mosaic tile over properly prepared concrete subfloors shall be as follows: 1. Mortar – ANSI A118.1 –Dry-set – Portland Cement or ANSI A118.4 – Latex Portland Cement 2. Grout – ANSI A118.6 – Standard Cement Grouts or ANSI A118.7 Polymer Modified Tile Grouts. b. Materials for installation of expansion joints in tile floors and walls shall be as follows: 1. Backer rod shall be of flexible and compressible closed cell from polyethylene, butyl rubber, or closed cell polyurethane 1. Bond-breaker tape for use between backer rod and sealant 2. Sealants shall be urethane sealants, color to be selected by Architect c. Refer to Section 1H – Allowances. The General Contractor shall include in his Base Bid an allowance of $4.00 per square foot for the purchase and delivery (tax included) of glazed porcelain and ceramic tiles to be installed as specified herein. Any difference between this allowance and the actual cost of glazed porcelain and ceramic tiles delivered to the jobsite shall be adjusted in the Contract Amount by Change Order. d. Tile Trim Shapes: Make interior corners of floors and walls field butted square. Use bullnose strips at finished edges exposed to view. e. Thresholds: Provide thresholds or transition strips at the edges of new tile floors where these abut other floor materials and at other transitions illustrated on Drawings. Shape and type of thresholds shall be as illustrated on Project Drawings. Each threshold shall be a single piece of material. f. Colors and Patterns: Refer to Project Drawings for tile patterns, colors, shapes, and accessories required. 3. EXECUTION OF THE WORK: a. Installation of ceramic mosaic tile over Slab-On-Grade Concrete floors. 1. Install Latex-Portland Cement Mortar bond coat over existing prepared concrete floor. 2. Set tile in Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex- Portland Cement Mortar. 3. Grout with Latex Portland Cement or Polymer Modified Tile Grouts 9B-4 4. Installation shall be in accordance with Method F-113 (Thin-Set) b. Installation of expansion joints in tiled floors. 1. Provide expansion joints at perimeter of all tiled floors abutting tiled wainscots, tiled walls, or other vertical surfaces; at all expansion and control joints in substrate; and in the field of tile work not to exceed 16'-0" in any direction. 2. Install vertical and horizontal joints in all tilework in accordance with Method EJ171. Use Type "S" or "M" sealant grade "P" for horizontal surfaces and grade "NS" for vertical joints. c. Fabricate thresholds to shapes indicated and install so that surface does not exceed one-half inch above adjoining finished floor surfaces. Transition edges shall be beveled on a slope not greater than 1:2. d. Laying Out Work: Lay out tile on floors so that no tile less than half size occurs. . e. Color of cement for grouting floor tile shall be selected by Architect. f. Set, grout and clean tile as specified herein and in accordance with applicable provisions of ANSI specification A108.5. g. Protect finished tile work while other work is in progress. Leave finished tile work clean and free from cracked, chipped or broken tile. 9C-1 SECTION 9C – ENGINEERED WOOD FLOORING 1. REQUIREMENTS: a. Refer to Project Drawings and Room Finish Schedules for location of areas to receive work specified herein. This section of the Specifications shall include the furnishing and installation of engineered hardwood flooring, wood shoe molds, and prefinished trim pieces, all as indicated on drawings and/or as specified herein for Base Bid Work and accepted alternates. b. Refer to the following listed sections of specifications for related work affecting the work and/or products specified herein: Section 1A – Description of the Work Section 1L – Fire Resistance Requirements Section 1H – Allowances Section 1I - Alternates Section 1T – Submittals Section 3A – Cast-In-Place Concrete Section 6B – Finish Carpentry c. Refer to Specifications Section 1I – Alternates. If alternate No. G-1 is accepted, this section shall include the removal of existing carpet in the First Floor Corridor and the installation of engineered hardwood flooring to match new floors in the Fellowship Hall. d. Engineered hardwood flooring, wood shoe molds, and prefinished trim pieces shall be installed by qualified workmen in strict compliance with the manufacturer's specifications. e. Each color of engineered hardwood flooring, wood shoe molds, and prefinished trim pieces shall be of one lot and shall be delivered to the job site in unopened, undamaged cartons or pallets. f. The Owner shall be provided with one (1) box of each type, color, pattern, and thickness of engineered hardwood flooring, and a factory sealed container (one gallon minimum) of the adhesive used in applying the engineered wood flooring and the trim. g. Materials shall be packed, stored and handled carefully to prevent damage. Temperature shall be maintained at 70 degrees F. minimum for 48 hours before, during, and for one week after installation. A minimum temperature of 55 degrees F shall be maintained thereafter. h. Engineered hardwood flooring and trim finishes shall be as illustrated on Project Drawings and/or as selected by the Architect. Provide samples for selection and approval. 2. MATERIALS: a. Refer to Section 1H – Allowances. The General Contractor shall include in his Base Bid an allowance of $4.00 per square foot for the purchase and delivery (tax included) of engineered hardwood flooring to be installed as specified herein. Any 9C-2 difference between this allowance and the actual cost of the selected hardwood flooring material delivered to the jobsite shall be adjusted in the Contract Amount by Change Order. b. Installation of Engineered Hardwood Flooring shall be included in the Contractor’s Base Bid – not in the Allowance. c. Trim pieces shall include hardwood shoe molds finished to match engineered hardwood floors as well as reducer strips and other trim pieces required to provide a complete and finished installation. d. Adhesives, leveling compounds, and floor primers shall be as recommended by floor finish manufacturer. 3. EXECUTION OF THE WORK: a. Prior to the start of any work, this Contractor shall inspect the subfloors and shall notify the Architect in writing of any discrepancies that will not permit proper installation of finished work. No work shall be installed until these discrepancies have been corrected. The starting of any installation work signifies the acceptance of the subfloors by this Contractor. b. Subfloors shall be broom clean, dry, and free from grease and oil. c. Small holes, depressions, and expansions joints shall be filled with an approved water resistant, nonshrinking, non-crumbling compound and troweled to the proper level. d. Coverings shall be laid true, level and even with tight joints. Patterns shall be as illustrated on drawings. Work shall be accurately fit to and around all permanent fixtures. Base shall be scribed to doors and other trim. All surplus adhesive shall be cleaned off in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. e. After the installation of all engineered hardwood floor covering has been completed, all surfaces shall be cleaned as recommended by the covering manufacturer and left ready for use by Owner without further preparation. 9C-3 9D-1 SECTION 9D - RESILIENT FLOORING 1. REQUIREMENTS: a. Refer to Project Drawings and Room Finish Schedule for location of Areas to receive work specified herein. This section of the Specifications shall include the furnishing and installation of vinyl composition tile flooring and vinyl bases, all as indicated on drawings and/or as specified herein. b. Refer to the following listed sections of specifications for related work affecting the work and/or products specified herein: Section 1A – Description of the Work Section 1L – Fire Resistance Requirements Section 1T – Submittals Section 3A – Cast-In-Place Concrete c. Resilient tile floor coverings and vinyl base shall be installed by qualified workmen in strict compliance with the manufacturer's specifications. d. Each color of resilient floor coverings, and vinyl base shall be of one lot and shall be delivered to the job site in unopened, undamaged cartons or rolls. e. The Owner shall be provided with one (1) box of each type, color, pattern, and thickness of tile and one roll (50 foot length min.) of base used, and a factory sealed container (one gallon minimum) of the adhesive used in applying the vinyl flooring and the vinyl base. f. Materials shall be packed, stored and handled carefully to prevent damage. Temperature shall be maintained at 70 degrees F. minimum for 48 hours before, during, and for one week after installation. A minimum temperature of 55 degrees F shall be maintained thereafter. g. Vinyl Base Colors and vinyl composition tile colors and patterns shall be as illustrated on Project Drawings and/or as selected by the Architect. Provide samples for selection and approval 2. MATERIALS: a. Resilient floor tiles shall be Armstrong, Azrock, Flintkote, or approved equal, Vinyl Composition Tile, 1/8” thick, and in sizes of l2" x 12". Tile shall conform to Fed. Spec. SS-T 3l2B-Type IV. Architect will furnish Contractor schedule showing location of colors and patterns selected. Furnish tile samples for selection and for confirmation of color. b. Vinyl base shall be extruded "set-on" type of flexible vinyl, 1/8" thick and 4" high as indicated on Room Finish Schedule. Bases shall be coved and furnished in continuous rolls. Exterior corners shall be premoulded. c. Reducer strips, color to be selected by Architect, shall be furnished and installed at exposed edges of resilient floor coverings. 9D-2 d. Adhesives, leveling compounds, and floor primers shall be as recommended by floor finish manufacturer. 3. EXECUTION OF THE WORK: a. Prior to the start of any work, this Contractor shall inspect the subfloors and shall notify the Architect in writing of any discrepancies that will not permit proper installation of finished work. No work shall be installed until these discrepancies have been corrected. The starting of any installation work signifies the acceptance of the subfloors by this Contractor. b. Subfloors shall be broom clean, dry, and free from grease and oil. c. Small holes, depressions, and expansions joints shall be filled with an approved water resistant, nonshrinking, non-crumbling compound and troweled to the proper level. d. Coverings shall be laid true, level and even with tight joints. Patterns shall be as illustrated on drawings. Work shall be accurately fit to and around all permanent fixtures. Base shall be scribed to doors and other trim. All surplus adhesive shall be cleaned off in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. e. After the installation of all resilient floor covering has been completed, all surfaces shall be thoroughly stripped and cleaned as recommended by the covering manufacturer and given one coat of wax appropriate for the specified covering and as recommended by the covering manufacturer. 9E-1 SECTION 9E – GYPSUM WALLBOARD 1. GENERAL: a. Refer to Project Drawings for location, quantity, type, and arrangement of work specified herein. Include all labor, materials, accessories, and scaffolding as required to completely install all gypsum board assemblies including both loadbearing and non-loadbearing partitions and/or chases with gypsum board surfaces, gypsum board ceilings and subceilings, fire-rated wall assemblies, bulkheads, suspended gypsum board ceiling systems, and soffits with gypsum board surfaces. b. Refer to the following listed sections of specifications for related work affecting work specified herein: Section 1A – Description of the Work Section 1L – Fire Resistance Requirements Section 1U – Storage and Protection Section 4A – Unit Masonry Section 6A – Rough Carpentry Section 6B – Finish Carpentry Section 7E – Building Insulation Section 7D – Caulking & Sealants Section 8B – Hollow Metal Doors and Frames Section 8C – Wood Windows Section 8G – Access Doors Section 9G – Painting c. Work specified herein shall comply with the requirements of the North Carolina State Building Code, Chapter 25 – Gypsum Board and Plaster. d. Where door frames and windows, handrails, casework and other devices or assemblies are indicated to be mounted on or in gypsum wallboard and wood stud or furred wall assemblies, this subcontractor shall co-ordinate his work with that of the other subcontractors and install wall reinforcing, rough openings, and framing supports properly sized and correctly positioned to accommodate required mountings or installations. e. Where methods, materials, or installation requirements as specified herein differ from specific Underwriter's Laboratories requirements for specific fire ratings, the Underwriter's Laboratories requirements shall govern; otherwise these specifications shall govern. f. Materials and their application as specified and/or required herein shall conform as applicable to the following listed standard specifications including the American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) and the American National Standards Institute(ANSI), hereby incorporated by reference: ASTM C 36 –Specification for Gypsum Wallboard ASTM C 79 – Specification for Gypsum Sheathing Board. 9E-2 ASTM C 442 – Specification for Gypsum Backing Board, Gypsum Coreboard, and Gypsum Shaftliner Board. ASTM C 630 – Specification for Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board ASTM C 840 – Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. ASTM C 931 – Specification for Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board. ASTM C 1280 – Specification for Application of Gypsum Sheathing Board. ASTM C 1395 – Specification for Gypsum Ceiling Board. ASTM C 1396 – Specification for Gypsum Board. ANSI A 108.11 – Standard for Interior Installation of Cementitious Backer Units g. Exterior gypsum panels and interior panels in areas of high humidity or exposure to moisture shall be constructed of moisture resistant gypsum board assemblies as specified herein. h. Where Gypsum Board edges are exposed as a part of reveals, as finished edges, as caulked edges, or where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials, such edges shall be treated with metal trim as specified herein. i. Gypsum Board shall be installed only by those mechanics thoroughly trained and experienced in the application of gypsum drywall materials. j. Substitutions: Materials, systems, and methods of installation specified herein are as manufactured and/or recommended by Gold Bond Building Products Division of National Gypsum Company, except as noted otherwise. Equal materials, systems, and methods of installation as manufactured and/or recommended by Flintkote, Georgia Pacific, or approved equal, may be used in lieu of those specified herein. k. Delivery and Storage: All materials shall be delivered in their original unopened packages and stored in an enclosed shelter providing protection from damage and exposure to the elements. Damaged or deteriorated materials shall be removed from the premises. l. Humidity and Temperature Control: In cold weather and during gypsum panel application and joint finishing, temperatures within the building shall be maintained within the range of 55 degrees to 70 degrees F. Adequate ventilation shall be provided to carry off excess moisture. 2. PRODUCTS: a. Interior gypsum panels, except moisture resistant panels, shall be 1/2 inch or 5/8 inch Fire Shield wall boards as required for assembly rating with "Sta-Smooth" edges in lengths as long as practical to minimize number of joints. Use high strength gypsum boards at ceiling applications. b. Interior Moisture Resistant gypsum panels shall be 1/2 inch or 5/8 inch Fire-Shield Moisture Resistant Board. c. Gypsum panels for all exterior work (ceilings, soffits, etc.) shall be Fire-Shield Exterior Soffit Board. 9E-3 d. Shaftliner for fire-rated wall assemblies shall be one inch fire-shield shaftliner. e. Metal Furring Channels – Galvanized, furring depth of 7/8” width of 1-3/8”. f. Drywall screws shall be 1-1/4 inch type "W" for single layer attachment to wood studs. Screws for other assemblies shall be as required to achieve assembly fire rating or as recommended by manufacturer. g. Joint treatment materials shall be Gold Bond Joint Tape, ready-mixed Joint Compound, Sta-Smooth Fast-Hardening Joint Compound, ready-mixed topping compound. h. Corner beads for exterior corners shall be 1-1/4" x 1-1/4" galvanized steel standard corner beads. i. Inside corners shall be formed with Multi-Flex Tape Bead. j. Casing beads and trim shall be No. 100 or No. 200 galvanized steel casing beads for 5/8" gypsum board. k. Control and/or expansion joints shall be fabricated by placing U.S.G. No. 100 or No. 200 metal trim back-to-back and spacing approximately 3/8"apart or by using E-Z stamp expansion joint. l. Accessories and components not listed shall be furnished and installed as required to meet assembly ratings in the case of fire and/or acoustical ratings or as recommended by the manufacturer of the assembly being installed. 3. EXECUTION: a. General: Gypsum Board Systems shall be installed only by those applicators thoroughly trained and experienced in the application of gypsum drywall materials. b. Furnish, install, and secure Gypsum Board Materials as indicated on Project Drawings and described herein. The requirements of the North Carolina State Building Code, Chapter 25 – Gypsum Board and Plaster (Section 2506 – Gypsum Board Materials and Section 2508 – Gypsum Construction) shall be the minimum standard with respect to materials, grades, installation requirements, and fastening requirements for the work of this project and shall take precedence over these specifications when in conflict. c. Except as specifically noted otherwise, gypsum board installation shall comply with the requirements of ASTM – C840 and manufacturer’s recommendations as described in the “National Gypsum Construction Guide”. d. Gypsum Panel Application: 1. Position all ends and edges of all gypsum panels over framing members, except when joints are at right angles for framing members as in horizontal application. 2. Apply Gypsum Panels first to ceilings and then to walls. Extend ceiling board into corners and make firm contact with top plate. To minimize end 9E-4 joints, use panels of maximum practical lengths. Fit ends and edges closely, but not forced together. Stagger end joints in successive courses. 3. Single layer wall panels shall be installed vertically. 4. Attach panels to framing supports by Power-driven USG Brand Screws, Space fasteners not less than 3/8" from edges and ends of panels and drive as recommended for specified fastening method. Drive fasteners in field of panels first, working towards ends and edges. Hold panel in firm contact with framing while driving fasteners. Drive fastener heads slightly below surface of gypsum panels in a uniform dimple without breaking face paper. 5. Cut ends, edges, scribe or make cut outs within field of panels in a workmanlike manner. 6. Install trim as indicated on Project Drawings, as specified herein, or as required to produce a finished installation. Space control joints as illustrated, otherwise not to exceed 30'-0" centers in any direction. 7. Install corner reinforcement as specified at all external angles of intersecting gypsum panels. e. Fastener Application: Power-drive screws with an electric screw-driver so screw heads provide a slight depression below surface of gypsum panels without breaking face paper. Do not drive screws closer than 3/8 inch from edges and ends of board. Space fasteners not to exceed 12 inch centers at ceiling supports and 16 inch centers at supporting wall studs. f. Interior Pre-Fill Application: 1. Mix Joint Compound according to directions on bag. Do not over mix, or use extremely cold water or cold joint compound. 2. Pre-fill all "V" grooves formed by abutting eased edges of Gypsum Panels with Joint Compound using a flexible 5" or 6" joint finishing knife or Ames Pre-Fill Tool. Fill "V" joint flush and wipe off excess compound beyond the "V" groove, leaving a clear depression to receive tape. Allow prefill to harden prior to the next application (tape or embedding coat). g. Interior Joint Treatment Application: 1. Mix joint compound in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Apply taping or embedding compound in a thin uniform layer to all joints and angles to be reinforced. Immediately apply Reinforcing Tape centered over joint and seated into compound. Sufficient compound – approx. 1/64" to 1/32" – must remain under the tape to provide proper bond. Follow immediately with a thin skim coat to embed tape, but not to function as a second coat. Fold and embed tape properly into all interior angles to 9E-5 provide a true angle. The tape or embedding coat must be thoroughly dry prior to application of second coat. 3. Apply second coat of joint compound over embedding coat, filling panel tape flush with surface; cover tape and feather out slightly beyond tape. On joints with no taper, cover the tape and feather out at least 4" on either side of tape. No second coat is necessary on interior angles. Allow second coat to dry thoroughly prior to application of finish coat. 4. Spread finish coat evenly over and extend slightly beyond second coat on all joints and feather to a smooth uniform finish. Over tapered edges, do not allow finished joint to protrude beyond plane of the surface. Apply a finish coat to cover tape and taping compound at all taped angles, and provide a true angle. Where necessary, sand between coats and following the final application of compound to provide a smooth surface ready for decoration. h. Interior Finishing Fasteners: Apply a taping or all-purpose type compound to fastener depressions as the first coat. Follow with a minimum of two additional coats of topping or all-purpose compound, leaving all depressions level with the plane of the surface. Use Joint Compound only for the first coat on fasteners. i. Interior Finishing Beads and Trim: 1. Apply first coat to all bead and trim and properly feather out from ground to plane of surface. Compound must be thoroughly dry prior to application of second coat. 2. Apply second coat in same manner as first coat, extending compound slightly beyond onto face of panel. Compound must be thoroughly dry prior to application of finish coat. 3. Apply finish coat to all bead and trim, extending compound slightly beyond the second coat and properly feathering from ground to plane of surface. Sand finish coat as necessary to provide a flat smooth surface ready for decoration. j. Exterior Joint System Application: 1. Mix Durabond XL Joint Compound according to directions on the bag. Do not over mix, nor use in temperatures below 45 degrees F. 2. Pr-Filled joints of U.S.G. Exterior Gypsum Ceiling Board with Durabond XL Compound. After Pre-fill has hardened, embed Perf-A-Tape Reinforcing Tape centered over joint. When compound has hardened, immediately apply fill coat of Durabond XL. 3. Apply Durabond XL Compound over flanges of metal beads and trim. Spot fastener heads. 4. After fill coat has hardened, apply finishing coat of Durabond XL 9E-6 Compound. Completely cover all joints, angles, and beads, control joints and fasteners. k. Completion and Clean-up: 1. At the completion of this work, inspect all joints, trim, etc. Any discernible joints or irregularities in finished work (except work above finished ceilings or behind plywood paneling) shall be reworked as required to form a suitable base for the application of finishes specified in other sections of this specifications. 2. After all touch-up work is complete, and gypsum board surfaces have been left suitable for the application of finishes, this Contractor shall remove all debris caused by his work and properly dispose of same. 9F-1 SECTION 9F – ACOUSTICAL LAY-IN CEILINGS 1. REQUIREMENTS: a. Refer to Project Drawings for location, type, quantity, arrangement, and installation details of all acoustical lay-in ceiling panels and suspension systems, wire hangers, main tee runners, cross tees and angle molding included in the work of this project. Provide all labor, material, and equipment required for the installation of new suspended acoustical lay-in ceiling systems – all as indicated on Project Drawings and/or as specified herein for base bid work and accepted alternates. b. Refer to the following listed sections of specifications for related work affecting work specified herein: Section 1A – Description of the Work Section 1C – Sequence of Work Section 1I – Alternates Section 1L – Fire Resistance Ratings Section 1K – Temporary Heating & Ventilation Section 1T – Submittals Section 1U – Storage and Protection Section 2A - Demolition Section 9E – Gypsum Wallboard & Metal Studs Division 15 – Plumbing and HVAC (Sections as Applicable) Division 16 – Electrical (Sections as Applicable) c. Refer to Section 1C – Sequence of Work. At the completion of this work, this contractor shall deliver to the Owner a quantity equal to 5% of ceiling finish materials used on this project. These materials shall be stored by the Owner and used as replacement material when needed. d. Refer to Specifications Section 1I – Alternates. If alternate No. G-3 is accepted, this section shall include the removal and disposal of designated first floor corridor ceilings as well as the furnishing and installation of new ceiling systems as specified herein. e. Refer to Section 1L – Fire Resistance Requirements for additional requirements affecting work specified herein. Where acoustical lay-in ceiling systems are part of a specified assembly rating, furnish and install components as required to achieve rating requirements. f. Refer to Section 1T – Submittals. The following listed submittals shall be required of this contractor for approval by the Architect prior to the initiation of work specified herein: 1. Shop drawings of proposed layouts and details of acoustical ceilings showing locations of items that are to be coordinated with or supported by the ceiling system. 2. Acoustical Panels, one piece of each type, not less than 12” x 12” size. 3. Main runners and cross tees, one each of each type, approximately 12” long. 4. Wall Molding, one each of each type, approximately 12” long. 9F-2 5. Manufacturer’s product data for each item submitted. g. All acoustical materials and suspension systems shall be installed by a subcontractor thoroughly experienced with this type of installation and approved by the manufactur-er. The acoustical contractor shall have all necessary licenses, secure all necessary permits, and pay all costs and fees for the prosecution of his work. h. At the completion of this work, contractor shall provide manufacturer’s standard written warranty agreeing to repair or replace panel or grid components that fail within ten (10) years of the date of substantial completion. i. Job Conditions: Acoustical material shall be installed under conditions as outlined in the current bulletin of the Acoustical and Insulating Materials Association, "Job Conditions". j. Preparation of Work: Examine the building before beginning work to determine that it is properly enclosed and the structure is in proper condition to receive acoustical materials and suspension system. Areas shall be broom-cleaned and uninterrupted for free movement of rolling scaffold. Do not proceed until satisfactory conditions prevail. k. Installation of suspension system: The acoustical contractor shall furnish and install suspension system as specified. The system shall be installed as indicated on Project Drawings. All members shall be aligned for true, level surface and straight lines. l. Installation of acoustical material: The acoustical contractor shall furnish and install acoustical material in the types, sizes, and surface designs specified. The acoustical units shall be installed in strict accord with the manufacturer's recommendations, subject to Architect's approval. m. For the purpose of designating type and quality for work included in this section of the specifications, drawings and specifications are based upon the products of Armstrong World Industries, Inc. Similar products of U.S. Gypsum Company, Celotex Corporation, or approved equal, shall be approved for use on this project when presented with supporting technical literature, samples, drawings, and certified performance data indicating that these products are equal in design, performance, and appearance to those specified herein. The Architect shall be sole judge of product equality. 2. MATERIALS: a. Ceiling Panels shall be Armstrong World Industries, Inc. Type “AP” Mineral Fiber Panels, sized 24” x 24” x manufacturer’s standard thickness. Surface texture shall be “fine”, finish shall be White, and edges shall be Beveled Regular Edge Profile for interface with Prelude XL 15/16” Exposed Tee Grid. b. Grid System shall consist of Armstrong World Industries, Inc. Prelude XL 15/16” Exposed Tees of galvanized steel with Blizzard White baked Polyester painted finish. 9F-3 c. Wire for hangers and ties shall be of Class 1 size conforming to the requirements of ASTM – 641 and sized for a yield stress load of not less than three times design load. Minimum size of wire shall be not less than 12 gauge. d. Edge molds, trim, and other accessories shall be furnished as required for a complete ceiling system installation. 3. INSTALLATION: a. The suspended ceiling installation shall be made by an acoustical contractor approved by the manufacturer of the acoustical materials as thoroughly experienced in this work. b. Proceed with ceiling system installation only when environmental conditions are suitable for installation of ceiling panels and can be maintained following the completion of ceiling system installation. c. Specific grid arrangements for each room and/or space shall be subject to the Architect’s approval. Ceiling heights shall be as indicated on Project Drawings. d. Horizontal components of ceiling system shall be installed level and in true plane. Hangers shall be placed so that deflection does not exceed 1/360 of the span of any component. Ceiling grid receiving recessed lighting fixtures shall be supported at all four corners of grid by ceiling contractor. e. Ceiling systems shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, subject to Architect's approval. f. Following installation of ceiling systems, clean soiled or discolored surface of units. g. Remove and replace units which are damaged or improperly installed and deliver to Owner replacement stock of each type of ceiling panel equal to five (5) per cent of installed panels. 9G-1 SECTION 9G – PAINTING 1. GENERAL a. Work Included: Refer to Project Drawings for locations, types, and quantity of work required for Base Bid Work and each Alternate. This section of the specifications shall include the furnishing and application of all materials indicated on Project Drawings and/or specified herein, including all labor, equipment, and accessories as required to finish new surfaces requiring a painted finish. Work shall be coordinated with the work of other trades; surfaces which are left unfinished by the requirements of other sections of the specifications shall be painted or otherwise finished as a part of the requirements of this section. Existing surfaces to be painted shall be cleaned, patched, sanded and prepared to receive finish coatings specified. The primer may be omitted at previously painted or shop primed surfaces. Work shall include backpriming of all millwork prior to installation. b. Reference to Other Sections: 1. Refer to Section 1L – Fire Resistance Requirements for interior finish requirements. 2. Refer to Section 5A – Structural Steel for requirements related to finish painting of structural steel. 3. Refer to Section 5B – Miscellaneous Iron and Steel and to Section 5D – Metal Stairs for painting requirements related to miscellaneous metals and metal stairs. 4. Refer to Section 6B – Finish Carpentry and Section 6C – Millwork for finishing requirements related to standing and running trim, casework, etc. 5. Refer to Section 8A – Wood Doors for finishing requirements related to wood doors. 6. Refer to Section 8B – Hollow Metal Doors and Frames for requirements related to finish of hollow metal doors and frames. 7. Refer to Section 9E – Gypsum Wallboard for requirements related to finish of gypsum board assemblies. 8. Refer to Section 9H – Exterior Stucco for requirements related to finish of exterior stucco. c. Colors and Samples: Contractor shall prepare sample panels showing proposed finishes as specified herein. Sample panels shall be prepared at Job Site and shall illustrate surface finish, uniformity of color, texture, and coverage of proposed finish. Sample panels shall be subject to Architect's approval, and when approved, shall become the standard for application of all similar work. 9G-2 In lieu of preparing sample panels to show finish and color, the Contractor may, at his option, prepare a room (complete or in part) to serve as a standard for workmanship and appearance of finish for each type of finish required. d. Storage and Protection: Materials to be used on the project shall be stored in an area approved by the Architect. Storage spaces shall be protected against damage from spilled or carelessly handled materials, and shall be safeguarded against fires. Used rags shall be kept in closed metal containers; paints and other liquids shall be kept covered. e. Environmental Conditions: No exterior painting shall be done during freezing weather or when the weather is foggy, damp, or rainy. Surfaces to be painted shall be thoroughly dry and free of dust or other contaminants. For interior work, the temperature of spaces in which painting is being done, or where paint and finish are drying, shall be maintained above 60 degrees F. Floors shall be broom clean. f. Inspection of Surfaces: Surfaces to be finished under this section shall be examined before work is begun to determine if they are in condition to receive the finish specified. Improper conditions shall be reported to the Architect, in writing; work shall not proceed until proper conditions have been obtained. The application of paint or other coating to any surface shall constitute acceptance of that surface. g. Approval of Coating Application: The contractor shall report to the Architect the application of each coat on each surface painted or otherwise finished. After a coat has been applied, it shall be inspected and approved by the Architect before the application of the succeeding coat; failure to comply with this provision will result in the Contractor's being required to recoat any areas not so reported and approved; no additional compensation will be allowed for such recoating work. h. Surfaces Left Unpainted: No field painting will be required on the following surfaces: 1. Brick masonry 2. Exterior concrete 3. Exposed concrete floors (except for elevator equipment room) 4. Factory finished or prefinished items 5. Concealed surfaces (except for back-priming of millwork) i. Mechanical and Electrical Equipment: Within spaces to be painted, items of mechanical and electrical equipment, together with supporting construction of frames, except those pieces of apparatus furnished with baked or glazed factory finish, such as motors and motor starters, or polished metal finishes, such as chrome plated valve bodies and control devices, shall be painted under the requirements of this section. 9G-3 Exposed steel pipe, copper pipe, cast iron pipe, electrical conduit, fittings, hangers, and supports shall be primed as specified elsewhere for the particular surface or material involved. Finish coats shall match those specified for surfaces against which the pipe, conduit, related accessories, etc., occur. 2. MATERIALS: a. General: In order to establish the type and quality of materials required for work covered by this section, manufacturer's names and brands are listed. Reference to products of a particular manufacturer other than those names listed below which are, in the opinion of the Architect, similar and equal in quality and in suitability for the usage intended, will be acceptable. Requests for approval of substitutions shall be accompanied by supporting technical literature, samples, and performance data as required in order to make valid comparisons of the products involved. Paint materials shall be of the proper type for the application indicated and shall be as manufactured by one of the following or approved equal. 1. Benjamin Moore Paint Company 2. Duron, Inc. 3. Pittsburg Paints 4. Glidden Paints 5. Tnemac Company, Inc. 6. The Sherwin-Williams Company Materials for which no brand names are listed, such as thinners, shellac, linseed oil, and turpentine shall be of highest quality and shall have identifying labels on containers. Materials shall be delivered to the site in their original containers with seals intact and labels undamaged. 3. EXECUTION: a. Qualification of Mechanics: Work performed under this section of specifications shall be executed by skilled mechanics and experienced supervision shall be maintained. b. Protection of Adjacent Areas: Furnish and lay drop cloths in all areas where work is being done. Carefully protect work that is not being finished. Factory or prefinished items shall not be painted. These items shall be properly protected from damage during painting of contiguous surfaces. c. Surface Preparation: Surfaces to be finished shall be free of imperfections or contaminators which would interfere with the uniform appearance, adhesion, and quality of the coating. Remove mildew and neutralize surface prior to application of any coatings. Wood surfaces shall be sanded smooth and dust removed before the application of any coating. Knots or sap spots shall be sealed with 2-pound cut shellac prior to application of prime coat. Nail and screw holes shall be puttied or filled with plastic wood after priming or undercoating is applied, then sanded smooth. 9G-4 Drywall must be clean and dry, nail heads must be set and spackled, joints must be taped and covered with joint compound, surfaces must be sanded smooth, and all dust removed prior to the application of paint. Fill all minor irregularities in drywall with spackling paste and sand to a smooth, level surface. Exercise care to avoid raising nap of paper. Concrete and concrete masonry surfaces shall have salts, dirt, grease, oil, and other foreign matter removed by wire brushing. Previously coated surfaces must have surface contamination removed, glossy surfaces of old paint films must be clean and dull before repainting, bare areas must be spot primed, and sanding dust removed. New coatings should be checked for compatibility and adhesion. Metal surfaces shall have rust, grease, oil, and mill scale removed; after removal of rust and scale, cleaned areas shall be primed. Abraded areas of shop coats shall be primed. Galvanized surfaces shall be solvent cleaned; oil and grease shall be completely removed. d. Application: 1. Methods: Block filler shall be applied by brush or roller. Other materials may be applied to surfaces of large areas by roller or spray, provided that the final coatings shall be rolled and have solid hiding and uniform appearance. Brush applied coatings shall be brushed out uniformly, to eliminate laps, skips, and excess brush marks. Cutting in with a brush on surface adjoining roller or spray coated areas shall be done carefully so that finish will be of same texture, color, and hiding as adjacent areas. Roller coated areas shall show no signs of lapping or excess paint lines from edges of roller. Spray painting shall be done prior to installation of fixtures, hardware, flooring, and other finish items, unless all such items are thoroughly protected. Spraying equipment shall be suitable in type and of adequate capacity for the work re-quired. It shall be operated only by skilled and experienced painters, to assure a uniform finish of acceptable quality. Follow the manufacturer's recommendations concerning the method of application; adhere to the spreading rate to obtain recommended dry mil thickness, and to the recommended interval between successive coats. 2. Mixing and Tinting: Job site tinting of finish coats shall be done only with the approval of the Architect. Primer, undercoating, and intermediate coats shall each be visibly different in color from preceding coats. Tinting colors are to be of the type recommended by the manufacturer; wet mil thickness shall be increased to provide manufacturer's recommended dry mil thickness. 9G-5 3. Block Filler: Block filler shall be applied in a manner and quantity which will retain only slight surface texture without pinholes. At the beginning of painting operations, a sample wall shall be filled; when the sample wall has been brought to an accept-able smoothness and is approved by the Architect, it shall be used as a standard for subsequent filling operations. 4. Final Coatings: Finished work shall show no runs, sags, curtains, excessive brush marks, holidays, or other evidence of poor application. Spot painting to correct soiled or damaged paint surfaces shall be blended into surrounding finish so that it will not be visible to normal viewing; if it is not, entire sections shall be recoated between corners or other approved stopping points. Edges of paint adjoining other materials or colors shall be sharp and clean, without overlapping. Sanding between coats, with fine sandpaper, shall be done as required to achieve even, smooth finishes on wood and metal surfaces. Should the number of coats specified to be applied to surfaces herein listed not cover, additional coats shall be applied until a satisfactory finish is produced. e. Protection and Cleaning: Splatters or spills of paints or other coatings on floors, adjacent coatings, glass, hardware, and other finished surfaces shall be carefully removed. f. Schedule of Colors: To be furnished by Owner prior to application of finishes. g. Systems and Application Rates: 1. Exterior Painting: a. Ferrous Metals: Primer: Rust Inhibitive Primer – MWF 3.6 mils Second and Third Coat: Semi-gloss Oil Type Enamel – MWF 3.6 mils per coat. b. Galvanized Metals: Primer: Galvanized Metal Primer – MWF 3.2 mils Second and Third Coat: Semi-gloss Oil Type Enamel – MWF 3.2 mils per coat. c. Exterior Gypsum Board: Primer: Exterior Latex Primer – DFT 1.4 mils. Second and Third Coats: - Exterior Latex – Flat - DFT 1.3 mils. per coat d. Wood (Painted): Primer: Exterior Oil Primer – DFT 2.3 mils. Second and Third Coats: - Exterior Gloss Oil Base - DFT 2.1 mils. per coat 9G-6 e. Exterior Stucco: Primer: Exterior Acrylic Masonry Primer – DFT 3.6 MILS. Second and Third Coats: Elastomeric Coating – DFT 4.8 mils per coat. 2. Interior Painting: a. Painted Masonry: Primer: Latex Block Filler – No pinholes in block surface Second and Third Coats – Egg Shell Latex Enamel – DFT1.5 mils per coat b. Painted Drywall: Primer: Latex Wall Primer – DFT 1.1 mils Second and Third Coats – Latex Egg Shell Enamel – DFT 1.5 mils per coat c. Epoxy Painted Drywall Primer: Interior Latex Primer – MWF 4.0 mils Finish Coat – Two Component Polyamide Epoxy coating, gloss finish – MWF 9.0 mils. d. Wood Doors (Natural Finish): Primer: Sealer-primer with stain – MWF 2.0 mils Second Coat: White shellac – MWF 2.0 mils Third Coat: Satin Varnish – MWF 3.0 mils per coat e. Wood (Painted Finish): Primer: Enamel Undercoat – MWF 3.5 mils Second & Third Coats: Semi-gloss Oil Enamel – MWF 4.0 mils per coat f. Ferrous Metal: Primer: Enamel undercoat – DFT 3.0 mils Second and Third Coat – Semi-gloss latex enamel – DFT 1.5 mils per coat g. Prime or Shop Coats: Damaged prime or shop coats shall be touched-up or refinished with one coat of the proper primer. 9H-1 SECTION 9H - EXTERIOR STUCCO 1. REQUIREMENTS: a. Refer to Project Drawings for location, quantity, type and arrangement of work specified herein. Include all labor, materials, accessories, and scaffolding as required to completely install stucco surfaces over designated wood framed gables. b. Refer to the following listed Sections of the Specifications for additional requirements and related work affecting work specified herein: Section 1A – Description of the Work Section 1U – Storage and Protection Section 6A – Rough Carpentry\ Section 7F – Caulking & Sealants Section 7H – Flashing and Sheet Metal Section 9G - Painting c. Painting and finishing shall be as specified in Section 9G-Painting. d. Construct and maintain scaffolding to conform to all applicable codes and ordinances. e. Provide protection to and properly ventilate stucco during and subsequent to its application. f. Protect all finished surfaces during application of stucco. Plaster and cementitious materials shall be stored up off the ground or floor under cover and kept dry until ready for use. g. Minimum thickness of stucco shall be 3/4 inches measured from the face of the metal lath. h. All stucco work shall be three (3) coat work. 2. MATERIALS: a. Metal lath shall be USG Paper-backed Self-furring Junior Diamond Mesh Lath, galvanized finish, or approved equal. b. Stucco shall be Portland Cement-Lime Plaster. Mix for each application shall be as follows: Scratch Coat: 1 bag Portland cement, 1 bag lime, 6 to 7 cu. ft. sand. Brown Coat: 1 bag Portland cement, 1 bag lime, 6 to 7 cu. ft. sand. Finish Coat: 1 bag Portland cement, 2 bags lime, 7 to 10 cu. ft. sand (Finish coat may be factory-prepared product known as Oriental Stucco Finish.) c. Aggregate shall be clean sharp sand. 9H-2 d. Water shall be clean and suitable for human consumption, free from oils, acid, alkali, or vegetable materials. e. Edge trim shall be U. S. G. galvanized No. 66 square edge trim for 3/4 inch edge thickness. 3. EXECUTION OF THE WORK: a. All stucco ingredients shall be mixed in a mechanical mixer with the minimum amount of water needed to produce a plaster of workable consistency. b. Apply one layer of 15 lb. asphalt-impregnated felt over plywood substrate; then apply paper-backed lath. c. Lath over wood framing shall be attached with galvanized nails as per manufacturer's recommendations. d. Mixing, application, and curing of plaster shall be according to manufacturer's directions except as specifically stated otherwise in these specifications. 10A-1 DIVISION 10 - SPECIALITES SECTION 10A - FOLDING PARTITIONS 1. REQUIREMENTS: a. Refer to the Project Drawings for location and size of folding partitions. Include the furnishing and installation of folding partitions complete with suspension system and operating hardware as indicated on project drawings and specified herein. b. Refer to the following listed sections of specifications for related work affecting work and/or products specified herein: Section 1A – Description of the Work Section 1L – Fire Resistance Requirements Section 1T – Submittals Section 1U – Storage and Protection Section 1V – Products and Substitutions c. Product specified shall be warranted against defects in material and workmanship for a period of five years from date of installation. Pantographs, Trolleys, and Tracks shall be warranted for a period of five years from date of installation. d. Protection: Folding partitions shall be packaged at the factory in heavy cardboard cartons, or other approved containers (not plastic bags), to protect them during transportation and while stored on the job. They shall be stored in a dry location and protected at the site from physical damage and from excessive changes in humidity. e. Complete shop drawings and vinyl fabric samples shall be furnished for selection and approval by the Architect. Indicate size, location, operating hardware, detailing and method of installation. 2. MATERIALS: a. Folding Partitions shall be Kwik-Wall Model MK-X Accordion Partition with reinforced vinyl fabric face finish and woven backing weighing not less than 21 ounces per yard. Track shall be Kwik-Wall #4 architectural grade aluminum extrusion with custom taper design to prevent wheel chatter. Track mounting shall be concealed. Similar and equal products of other manufacturers may be approved for use on this project when submitted with complete descriptive and technical data confirming product equality. The Architect shall be the sole judge of product equality. b. Furnish complete with sub-channel for recess track, handles, automatic latches, screws, installation hardware and installation instructions. Finish shall be as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. 3. EXECUTION: a. This contractor shall be responsible for verifying the actual dimensions of the openings to which his work must fit. Any discrepancies which would prevent the operation and performance of folding partitions shall be reported in writing to the Architect. No work shall be installed until these conditions have been corrected. The starting of any work shall signify acceptance by this contractor of the opening as satisfactory for the installation of his work. 10A-2 b. All work specified herein shall be installed by skilled mechanics authorized by the manufacturer for the installation of folding partitions. c. All work shall be installed as indicated on approved shop drawings and according to manufacturer's recommendations. d. Any modifications to head and jamb assemblies as required for the installation of folding partitions shall be the responsibility of this contractor. 10B-1 SECTION 10B – AUDIO/VISUAL SPECIALTIES 1. REQUIREMENTS: a. Refer to the Project Drawings for the location, type, size, arrangement, quantity and mounting requirements for work required herein or reasonably implied. Include the relocation of one (1) existing ceiling mounted projector and the furnishing and installation of one (1) new electrically operated ceiling mounted projection screen assembly including controls, for a complete and functional audio/visual system. b. Refer to the following listed sections of specifications for related work affecting work specified herein: Section 1A – Description of the Work Section 1T – Submittals Section 1U – Storage and Protection Section 1V – Products and Substitutions Division 16 – Electrical (Sections as applicable) .c. Prior to the commencement of any work specified herein, this Contractor shall submit complete shop drawings for Architect's approval showing proposed method of installation, profiles and shapes of trim, and complete description of items, including samples of standard colors. d. Refer to Division 16 – Electrical for related electrical work. Electrical service and final connection to projection screen shall be by the Electrical Contractor. 2. MATERIALS: a. Projector is existing. b. Projection Screen shall be Draper, or approved equal, Access Fit/Series E Screen with Matte White XT1000E viewing surface. Viewing area shall be 54” H x 86.5“ W with 2” black borders. Provide screen with extra drop. Case shall be White. Motor and Controls shall be 110-120V AC (Standard) with motor located at left end of centered screen. c. Provide projection screen complete with mounting hardware, controls, trim and accessories as required for a finished and functional installation. 3. EXECUTION a. All items specified in this section shall be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions. b. Furnish manufacturer's standard guarantee for all new products. Projection screen assembly shall be warranted against defects for a period of ten (10) years. 10C-1 SECTION 10C – FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS 1. REQUIREMENTS: a. SCOPE Refer to Project Drawings for location, mounting, and quantity of work required under this section of the specifications. Furnish and install a fire extinguishers and cabinets as shown on the drawings, directed at jobsite and/or herein specified. b. Refer to the following listed sections of specifications for related work affecting work and/or products specified herein: Section 1A – Description of the Work Section 1T – Submittals Section 4A – Unit Masonry Section 6A – Rough Carpentry Section 9E – Gypsum Wallboard c. Furnish to Architect, for approval, shop drawings on all fire extinguisher cabinets including mounting methods and rough opening dimensions. d. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Package, handle, deliver and store extinguishers and cabinets at the job site in a manner that will avoid damage. Damaged items will be rejected and shall be replaced by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner. e. QUALITY ASSURANCE 1. Provide portable fire extinguishers, cabinets and accessories by a single company. 2. Provide new portable fire extinguishers which are UL listed and bear UL "Listing Mark" for type, rating, and classification of extinguisher indicated. f. WORKMANSHIP The products specified in this Section shall be installed by experienced and qualified mechanics. All units shall be mounted level in a horizontal direction and plumb in a vertical direction. Flanges shall fit adjoining wall surfaces where applicable and shall completely cover opening edges. Units shall be securely anchored in all cases. 2. PRODUCTS: a. MANUFACTURER 1. Products as manufactured by JL Industries, 4450 West 78th Street Circle, Bloomington, Minnesota 55435 are herein specified. 2. Products meeting the criteria of these Specifications as manufactured by one of the following, or approved equal, will be accepted provided the rough opening and recess dimensions are the same as for the specified product: 10C-2 a. Larsen’s Manufacturing Company 7421 Commerce Lane, N.E. Minneapolis, Minnesota 55432 b. Modern Metal Products Division of Technics County Road 45 North – P.O. Box 247 Owatonna, Minnesota 55060-0247 b. FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS Fire extinguisher cabinets shall be as herein specified and shall be located as shown on Project Drawings and/or as directed by the Architect. 1. Series Academy Aluminum 1027 2. Mounting Semi-Recessed 3. Trim Style 2-1/2" RT 4. Tub I.D. Dimensions (WxHxD) 10-1/2" x 24" x 6" 5. Frame O.D. (WxH) 13" x 26-1/2" 6. Wall Opening (WxHxD) 11-1/2" x 25" x 4" 7. Door Style Full Glass 8. Door Glazing 1/4" Clear Tempered 9. Door Hinge Continuous 10. Door Hardware Zinc plated pull handle and flexible cam 11. Options Anodized aluminum door and trim c. FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 1. Model Cosmic 10E 2. Nominal Capacity Ten (10) pounds 3. Cylinder Diameter Five (5) inches 4. Overall Height Twenty and one-half (20-1/2) inches 5. Overall Width Nine (9) inches 6. UL Rating 4A-60BC 7. Finish Epoxy 3. EXECUTION: a. OPENING AND BLOCKING INSTALLATION 1. Openings and blocking for accessories specified in this section of the specifications shall be by others. Openings in masonry walls shall be accomplished under SECTION 4A – UNIT MASONRY. Openings in wood stud walls shall be accomplished in accordance with SECTION 6A – ROUGH CARPENTRY. Openings in rated assemblies shall be constructed to maintain the rating of the assembly. 2. Fire Extinguisher Cabinet Contractor, Masonry Contractor and Framing Contractor shall coordinate their work with this section of the work. 10C-3 b. CABINET INSTALLATION 1. Cabinets shall be installed in locations specified herein and/or as shown on the drawings or directed at the jobsite and at specified mounting heights. Mount cabinets five (5) feet from finished floor to top of cabinet flange. 2. Recesses in walls for fire extinguisher cabinets will be prepared by others as hereinbefore specified. 3. Cabinets are prefinished products and shall be carefully handled to avoid damage. Scratches, dents or marred cabinets will not be acceptable. 4. Cabinets shall be installed plumb and level and shall be securely anchored to concealed wall blocking. 5. Install in accordance with approved shop drawings. c. EXTINGUISHER INSTALLATION 1. Check extinguishers for proper charge and operation before installing in cabinets or brackets. 2. Remove and replace damaged, defective or under charged units. 3. Each extinguisher shall bear a current certification tag showing name of installing contractor, date of charge, type of charge and name of service person. 10D-1 SECTION 10D – LOUVERS 1. REQUIREMENTS: a. Refer to the Project Drawings for the location, size, and mounting requirements for soffit and gable vent louvers. Include the furnishing and installation of soffit and gable vent louvers as indicated on project drawings and/or as specified herein. b. Refer to the following listed sections of specifications for related work affecting work specified herein: Section 1A – Description of the Work Section 1T – Submittals Section 4A – Unit Masonry Section 6A – Rough Carpentry Section 6B – Finish Carpentry Section 9H – Exterior Stucco Division 15 – Mechanical (Sections as applicable) c. Furnish shop drawings of gable vent louvers and samples of finish colors for selection and approval by Architect. 2. MATERIALS: a. Gable louvers at gables of new construction shall be similar and equal to Ekena Millwork, or approved equal, Item # GVR024FK round urethane gable vents with keystones. Furnish complete with insect screens mounted on the inboard side of each louver. b. Soffit vents shall be “Cirk l-vents”, Model C-25 as manufactured by Louver Manufacturing Company, Minneapolis, Minnesota, or approved equal. Units shall measure 2 ½ inches in diameter, shall be of aluminum. And shall have screened ends of 14 x 18 mesh aluminum screening. 3. EXECUTION: a. Preparation of rough openings for louvers and vents, including required subframing, shall be included in the work of Section 6A – Rough Carpentry, Section 6B – Finish Carpentry, and Section 9H – Stucco. b. Louvers and vents shall be installed as indicated on Project Drawings and as recommended by manufacturer on approved shop drawings. Exact mounting height and location shall be as indicated on the Project Drawings and/or as directed by the Architect at the job site. 11A-1 DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT SECTION 11A – APPLIANCES 1. REQUIREMENTS: a. Refer to Project Drawings for location, type, size, and quantity of work required by this Section of the Specifications. Furnish and install the following listed appliances as illustrated on project drawings and/or as specified herein: 1. Dishwasher – one required. 2. Electric Cooktop – one required. 3. Microwave/Hood (over Electric Cooktop) – one required. 4. Electric Range – one required. 5. Vented Hood over Electric Range – one required. 6. Double Wall Ovens – one required. 7. Warming Drawer – one required. 8. Refrigerator – one required. 9. Under Counter Freezer – one required. b. Refer to the following listed Sections of Specifications for related work affecting work specified herein: Section 1A – Description of the Work Section 1T – Submittals Section 1V – Products Section 12A – Manufactured Casework Section 12B – Countertops Division 15 – Mechanical (Sections as applicable) Division 16 – Electrical (Sections as applicable) c. The following listed Submittals shall be required for work specified herein: 1. Manufacturer’s Product Data and installation instructions for each appliance. 2. Shop Drawings completely describing installation requirements, cut-out requirements, clearance and accessories. d. Final connection to plumbing or exhaust ductwork where required shall be by the Plumbing or Heating and Air Conditioning Contractor as specified in Division 15 – Mechanical. e. Final connection to Electrical work where specified shall be by the Electrical Contractor as specified within Division 16 – Electrical. 2. MATERIALS: a. General Note: Proprietary references in this Section of the Specifications are given only to serve as a guide for establishing type, style and quality of products required. Similar and equal products by other manufacturers may be approved for use on the 11A-2 project when submitted with complete descriptive and technical data confirming product equality. The Architect will be the sole judge of product equality. b. Appliances shall be as specified in Appliance Schedule on Project Drawings, or approved equal. c. Accessories shall be furnished and installed as required for complete and functional installation of each appliance. 3. EXECUTION OF THE WORK: Installation of each appliance shall be as recommended by the manufacturer on approved shop drawings for the use intended and as illustrated on Project Drawings. 12A-1 DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS SECTION 12A – MANUFACTURED CASEWORK 1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: a. Refer to Project Drawings for location, arrangement, type, and quantity of kitchen cabinets. Fabricate, furnish and install all kitchen casework (including cabinet hardware) illustrated on Project Drawings and/or specified herein. b. Refer to the following listed sections of specifications for related work affecting the work specified herein: Section 1A – Description of the Work Section 1T – Submittals Section 1U – Storage and Protection Section 6B – Finish Carpentry Section 6C – Millwork Section 11A – Appliances Division 15 – Mechanical (Sections as applicable) c. Coordinate casework fabrication, design, and installation with the work of Specifications Section 6B – Finish Carpentry, Section 11A – Appliances, Section 12B – Countertops, and Division 15 Mechanical (sections as applicable). d. Submit physical samples of available casework finishes along with complete shop drawings of all casework to be furnished and installed under this section of the specifications. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details for each proposed installation. e. All casework shall be the product of a single manufacturer and KCMA certified by the Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturer’s Association. f. This contractor shall field verify all dimensions to which his work must conform prior to the fabrication of any material. Responsibility for proper fit shall rest with this contractor. g. Casework shall not be delivered or installed until building is enclosed, wet-work is complete, and interior space is environmentally controlled to the same extent as if occupied for the remainder of the construction period. 2. PRODUCTS: a. Products specified herein are the products of Armstrong Cabinets. Similar and equal products of other manufacturers will be approved for use on this project when submitted with complete technical and descriptive literature illustrating and confirming product equality to the full satisfaction of the Architect. b. Casework shall be Armstrong Premier Series Casework. Exposed wood shall be maple and door style shall be “Caruth” flat panel design with Satin Nickel hardware. Finish shall be as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standard finishes. 12A-2 c. Hardware (pulls and knobs, hinges, and drawer guides) shall be selected from manufacturer’s standard units. 3. EXECUTION OF THE WORK: a. Install cabinets as indicated on approved shop drawings with no variations in flushness of adjoining surfaces; use concealed shims. Where cabinets abut other finished work, scribe and cut for accurate fit. Provide filler strips, scribe strips, and moldings in finish to match cabinet face. Coordinate casework installation with countertop installation. b. Install cabinets without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings and are aligned. Complete installation of hardware and accessories as indicated. c. Install cabinets level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet. Fasten cabinets to adjacent units and to backing. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not less than 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for 1-inch (25 mm) penetration into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips. d. Adjust cabinets and hardware so that doors and drawers are centered in openings and operate smoothly without warp or bind. Lubricate operating hardware as recommended by manufacturer and leave ready for use by owner without further adjustment. e. Clean casework on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Remove and replace damaged surfaces. 12B-1 SECTION 12B – COUNTERTOPS 1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: a. Refer to Project Drawings for size, shape, quantity, installation and cut-out requirements for work specified herein. Include the fabrication, delivery, installation, sealing and final cleaning of quartz countertops and backsplashes illustrated on Project Drawings and/or specified herein. b. Quartz Countertops and backsplashes shall be provided in the new kitchen. c. Refer to the following listed sections of specifications for related work affecting the work specified herein: Section 1A – Description of the Work Section 1T – Submittals Section 6B – Finish Carpentry Section 11A – Appliances Section 12A – Manufactured Casework Division 15 – Mechanical (sections as applicable) d. The following listed standards of the American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM) and the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) are incorporated by reference and made a part of this specification to the same extent as if bound herein: 1. ANSI A108.5 Installation of Ceramic Tile with Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex Portland Cement Mortar. 2. ANSI A118.4 Latex-Portland Cement Mortar 3. ASTM C97 Standard Test Methods for Absorption and Bulk Specific Gravity of Dimension Stone. 4. ASTM C99 Standard Test Method for Modulus of Rupture of Dimension Stone. 5. ASTM C170 Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Dimension Stone. 6. ASTM C256 Method of Test for Flexural Strength of Magnesium Oxychloride Cements (Using Simple Bar with Two-Point or Single-Point Loading). 7. ASTM C370 Standard Test Methods for Moisture Expansion of Fired Whiteware Products. 8. ASTM C373 Standard Test method for Water Absorption, Bulk Density, Apparent Porosity, and Apparent Specific Gravity of Fired Whiteware Products. 9. ASTM C482 Standard Test Method for Bond Strength of Ceramic Tile to Portland Cement. 10. ASTM C484 Standard Test Method for Thermal Shock Resistance of Glazed Ceramic Tile. 11. ASTM C531 Standard Test Method for Linear Shrinkage and Coefficient of Thermal Expansion of Chemical-Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings, and Polymer Concretes. 12. ASTM C648 Standard Test Method for Breaking Strength of Ceramic Tile. 13. ASTM C650 Standard Test Method for Resistance of Ceramic Tile to Chemical Substances. 12B-2 14. ASTM C672/C672M Standard Test Method for Scaling Resistance of Concrete Surfaces Exposed to Deicing Chemicals. 15. ASTM C674 Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Ceramic Whiteware Materials. 16. ASTM C880 Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of Dimensional Stone. 17. ASTM C1026 Standard Test Method for Measuring the Resistance of Ceramic Tile to Freeze-Thaw Cycling. 18. ASTM C1028 Standard Test Method for Determining the Static Coefficient of Friction of Ceramic Tile and Other Like Surfaces by the Horizontal Dynamometer Pull-Meter Method. 19. ASTM C1378 Standard Test Method for Determination of Resistance to Staining. 20. ASTM E 84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. e. Work shall also comply with the applicable standards of the NSF International/American National Standards Institute (NSF/ANSI) 51 – Food Equipment Materials and the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) 94 – Standard for Safety of Flammability of Plastic Materials for Parts in Devices and Appliances Testing. f. Refer to Specification Section 11A – Appliances and to Division 15 – Mechanical. This contractor shall coordinate his work with that of other contractors whose work he must accommodate. Cut-outs for appliances, plumbing fixtures and trim, and accessories to be mounted in countertops shall be performed at the factory – not in the field. Rough-in data for required cutouts shall be provided to this contractor by each contractor whose work must be installed in these countertops with copies to the Architect. g. Contractor shall submit physical samples (1 each) of quartz countertop material along with samples of available colors for Architect’s selection and approval. Include shop drawings for each countertop installation showing proposed layout, cutouts, joints, and installation details along with detailed descriptions of material, fabrication, adhesives, grout, sealants, and accessories. Work shall not proceed until required submittals are approved by the Architect. h. Specified work shall be furnished and installed only by qualified subcontractors experienced in the application of specified products and approved by the product manufacturer. All materials shall be installed/applied in strict accordance with these Specifications and the manufacturer’s printed installation instruction for each product specified. Finished installation shall be warranted for 10 years by manufacturer against defects in materials and workmanship. i. This contractor shall field verify all dimensions to which his work must conform prior to fabrication of any material. Thereafter, the responsibility for proper fit shall rest with this contractor. j. Deliver, store and handle countertop fabrications and accessories recommended by product manufacturer. Damaged units (cracked, chipped or stained) will be removed from the site and replaced with undamaged units at the contractor’s expense. 12B-3 2. PRODUCTS: a. Countertops shall be fabricated from Silestone Quartz sheets as manufactured by Cosentino USA, Inc. Similar and equal products as manufactured by Cosmos Granite and Marble, M.C. International, Inc., or approved equal, will be approved for use on this project when submitted with complete technical and descriptive literature illustrating and confirming product equality. The Architect will be the sole judge of product equality. b. Countertops shall be of composition quartz aggregate slabs not less than 1 1/4 inch thickness with eased front edges. Backsplashes shall be of 3/4 inch thick matching slab quartz, four (4) inches in height and with eased edge top. Colors shall be similar and equal to standard manufacturer’s colors and finish shall be polished. c. Adhesives, grout, sealants, and stone accessories for granite countertops shall be as recommended by granite fabricator on approved submittals. 3. EXECUTION OF THE WORK: a. Prior to installation, this contractor shall examine all substrates on which quartz countertops are to be mounted. Do not proceed with installation until acceptable conditions exist. b. Fabricate and install quartz countertops as recommended by the fabricator/manufacturer on approved submittals. c. Installation tolerances for countertops shall not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet from level in horizontal applications or 1/16 inch in 10 feet from plumb. d. Coordinate installation of plumbing work with Plumbing Subcontractor in order to ensure proper installation of sinks, valves, drains, and fittings. e. Clean countertops as work progresses. Remove excess adhesives, grout, mortar, and sealant immediately. After final cleaning and acceptance of countertops, protect finished installation from further damage until all adjacent work is complete. 13-1 DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION No Special Construction is included in the Work of this Project. 14A-1 DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS SECTION 14A - HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: a. Refer to Project Drawings for location, size, and arrangement of the roped hydraulic limited use/limited application (LU/LA) elevator to be furnished and installed at Neill’s Creek Baptist Church. Work specified herein shall be Base Bid work. b. Refer to the following listed sections of specifications for related work affecting this section of the specifications: Section 1A – Description of the Work Section 1T – Submittals Section 1V - Submittals Division 15 – Mechanical (Sections as applicable) Division 16 – Electrical (Sections as applicable) c. Work described herein, together with project drawings, is intended to generally outline all required equipment, incidental material, and labor as required for a complete, safe, and operable elevator system. This section does not describe the details of design and construction of the elevator system, which are the responsibility of the elevator manufacturer. d. In the interest of unified responsibility, the elevator contractor shall be one regularly engaged in the business of installing and servicing elevators of the type and character required by these specifications. 1. The contractor shall have technical qualifications of at least three years experience, trained supervisory and installation personnel, and facilities to install specified items. 2. Any manufacturer's product submitted shall have been in satisfactory and efficient operation on not less than twenty-five installations similar to this project and for not less than one and one-half years. Submit list of instal-lations, including names and addresses to the Architect for approval. 3. There shall be a permanent service organization maintained or trained by contractor which will render satisfactory service to this installation within four hours of receipt of notification that service is needed. Submit name and address of service organization. e. Warranty: 1. The elevator contractor shall guarantee the materials and workmanship against defect due to faulty materials or faulty workmanship or negligence for a period of twelve (12) months following the final acceptance of work. Where items of equipment or material carry a manufacturer's warranty for any period in excess of twelve (12) months, then the manufacturer's warranty shall apply for that particular piece of equipment or material. The 14A-2 contractor shall replace such defective materials, equipment, or workmanship without cost to the Owner within the stipulated guarantee period. 2. This warranty is not intended to supplant normal maintenance service and shall not be construed to mean that the elevator contractor will provide free service for periodic examination, lubrication, or adjustment due to normal use, beyond that included in the specifications: nor will the elevator contractor correct, without charge, breakage maladjustments, or other trouble arising from abuse, misuses, or improper use of the equipment which may develop within twelve (12) months from the date of acceptance. f. Maintenance service: The elevator contractor shall furnish a first-quality maintenance and call-back service on each elevator after it is completed and placed in operation for a period of twelve (12) months, concurrent with warranty period. This service shall consist of examinations of the equipment at a minimum of once a month. Service shall include adjustments, lubrication, cleaning, supplies and parts to keep the equipment in proper operation, except for such adjustments, replacement of parts or repairs made necessary by abuse, misuse or any other causes beyond the control of the elevator contractor. All work will be done by trained employees of the elevator contractor during regular working hours of the trade. Emergency call-back service shall be provided and included for all hours and days during the maintenance period. g. All work shall be performed in a first-quality manner and is to include all work and material in accordance with the drawings and as specified herein. h. In all cases where a device or part of the equipment is herein referred to as a single component, it is intended that such reference shall apply to as many such devices as are required to complete the installation. i. Elevator shall be designed, manufactured, installed and inspected in accordance with ASME A17.1/CSA B44-00 standards and all applicable regulations of federal, state, and local codes. The following listed references shall apply: 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 2. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) 3. National Electric Code (NFPA 70) 4. CSA B44.1-00 Safety Code for Elevators. j. Submit manufacturer’s literature including product data, cab design, color charts, signal fixtures and specifications for Architect’s approval prior to fabrication or installation. Include layout drawings showing arrangement of elevator equipment including dimensions, clearances, location of machine equipment, and all loads and reactions imposed on pit and building structure. k. Inspections: All tests as called for by regulations of the North Carolina Department of Labor shall be performed in the presence of authorized representatives from the North Carolina Department of Labor. Elevator contractor shall coordinate the final inspection with the elevator consultant at the North Carolina Department of Labor, in order to inspect the workmanship and specification requirements. After tests and inspections are completed, a certificate of operation shall be furnished to the Architect from the North Carolina Department of Labor. 14A-3 l. Temporary service: Should the service of any elevator be required before completion and final acceptance, permission in writing must first be obtained from the Architect. In addition, the user agrees to sign the elevator contractor's temporary acceptance form and be bound by the terms and conditions thereof. 1. The elevator shall be inspected and approved by the North Carolina Department of Labor, Elevator Division, before being allowed to operate on a temporary basis. m. Storage: A dry and protected area, conveniently located to the elevator hoistway will be assigned to the elevator contractor without cost for storage of his material and tools. 2. Preparatory Work by others: a. Hoistway 1. A finished plumb hoistway of proper size and construction conforming to ASME A17.1, B44-00, all applicable building codes, and the elevator layout drawings. 2. Adequate supports shall be provided for fastening rail brackets as indicated on the layout drawings. Supports must withstand rail forces indicated. 3. A poured pit conforming to all applicable codes and to the dimensions indicated on the layout drawings must be provided. The pit must be designed for the impact load indicated and must be guaranteed dry and level from wall to wall. A fixed pit ladder shall be provided when it depth exceeds 3’-0”. 4. Knock-out in walls between the machine room and elevator hoistway for routing hydraulic and electrical lines and for hall buttons shall be coordinated with the elevator contractor 5. All wall patching, painting, and grouting by others Finish painting of all hoistway doors and frames by others. 6. Adequate sill supports at each landing are to be provided for hoistway entrances. Swing door entrances (when provided) are to be installed by general contractor. 7. A lockable self-closing governor access door with electric contact shall be provided in accordance with layout drawing (when required). b. Machine Room 1. An adjacent machine room built to conform to the layout drawings, NFPA 70, ASME A17.1, and all applicable building code requirements. It shall have suitable access, a lockable door, a convenience outlet, and light switch. Machine room temperature must be maintained between 60 and 100 degrees Fahrenheit. Relative humidity not to exceed 95%. 2. A telephone line to the machine room and tied into the elevator controller as per ASME A17.1/CSA B44-00 safety codes. 3. Machine room vents as required by local code. c. Electrical Codes 1. A 220VAC, single phase service, with neutral, to a lockable safety disconnect switch, fused with time delay fuses shall be furnished in the machine room in accordance with NFPA 70. A normally open electric interlock contact is required in the switch for battery isolation. 2. A 120VAC, single phase, 15 AMP service to a lockable fused disconnect switch, or circuit breaker, located in the machine room shall be provided for the cab lighting in accordance with NFPA 70. 3. A pit light with switch and a GFI duplex receptacle shall be furnished in accordance with NFPA 70 14A-4 d. Car Operating Panel Car operating panel shall consist of metal lens call pushbuttons with red LED halo lighting and Braille tags for each landing, door open buttons, an alarm button, emergency stop key switch. Light key switch, emergency light, integral phone box with telephone, and a digital car position indicator with direction arrows and audible signal all mounted onto a brushed stainless steel faceplate. e. Landing Controls Landing control stations shall consist of a metal lens call button with red LED halo lighting mounted onto a brushed stainless steel faceplate. f. Hoistway Doors Each hoistway entrance shall consist of a two speed horizontal sliding reinforced hollow metal UL-B 1-1/2 hour fire rated door and frame assembly with prime (paintable) finish and extruded aluminum sill. Each opening shall be protected with an electro-mechanical interlock to prevent operation of the elevator unless all doors are closed and locked. g. Car Doors Each car entrance shall be provided with a two speed horizontal sliding reinforced hollow metal door panels faced with brushed stainless steel finish. An electric contact shall be provided on each car door opening to prevent operation of the elevator unless the car door(s) are in the fully closed position. Car doors shall be equipped with a zone lock used to prevent opening of the car doors unless the car is within a landing zone. h. Door Operator A heavy duty DC master door operator with adjustable speed and torque shall be provided for each cab opening operable even during a power failure. Door operation shall be smooth and quiet through belt transmission and door movement shall be cushioned or checked at both limits of travel. Car doors shall be equipped with a clutch used to unlock and control the individual landing doors. Doors shall open automatically at each landing upon arrival of the car then close after a predetermined time interval i. Door Safety Edge Each car door shall be equipped with a full height infrared light curtain that will cause the doors to stop and reverse when closing if an obstruction is detected in the door openings. The door shall return to its open position and remain open for a predetermined time then close automatically. j. Door Hangers and Tracks Door hangers and tracks shall be provided for each car and hoistway entrances. Track shall be rolled steel with working surfaces contoured to match the door Hanger rollers. Hangers shall be designed for two point suspension of each door panel and shall be equipped with up thrust rollers on each hanger assembly including a secondary upthrust retainer device. A cable drive shall be used to transmit motion form one car door panel to the other and a secondary door interlock devices shall be furnished to prevent the doors from ever separating. All hanger rollers shall have polyurethane tires with pre-lubricated and sealed bearings. k. Car Enclosure 1. WALLS: ¾” thick fire rated wood core panels with plastic laminate faced interior and blackfilled reveals to simulate applied panels. 2. CAR ENTRANCE: Strike column, return post, and transom shall be #4 brushed stainless steel. 3. CAR DOORS: Two-speed, side slide, reinforced hollow metal construction, faced on the interior with #4 brushed stainless steel finish. 4. CANOPY/LIGHTING: Canopy shall be steel with baked enamel white finish. Florescent lighting above a removable thermoclear panel drop ceiling supported in a aluminum “T” frame shall be furnished. 5. HANDRAIL: 3/8” x 2” #4 brushed stainless steel handrail shall be furnished on (1) side wall. 6. VENTILATION: Adequate protected vent openings shall be furnished in the car canopy and cab wall base. l. Electrical Wiring All wiring and electrical materials shall conform to NFPA 70 and with all applicable codes. Insulated wiring shall have flame-retardant and moisture proof outer covering and shall be run in conduit or electrical wireways as required. 14A-5 Traveling cables shall be flexible and suitably suspended to relieve strain. A pit stop switch located near and accessible from the lowest landing hoistway door shall be furnished. 3. Inspection operation: Inspection operation shall be provided on the top of the car and from the main controller located in the machine room. Controller inspection shall be rendered inoperable when on top-of-car inspection. Inspection operating stations shall consist of a transfer switch and constant pressure “up”, “down”, and enable buttons. Top-of-car inspection station shall include an emergency stop, GFI protected duplex outlet, and a guarded light with a light switch. Controller shall be prepared with car and hoistway door bypass switches in accordance with ASME A17.1/CSA B44-00 safety codes. 4. Hoistway access switch: A (3) position spring return key switch shall be furnished adjacent to the top landing door used to permit movement of the car with the top landing door and car door in the open position allowing service personnel to gain access to the car top when the distance from the top of the car to the landing sill exceeds (35) inches when the car is level with the landing below. a. Control System A microprocessor based control system certified and labeled to the requirements of CAN/CSAB44.1/ASME A17.5 shall be provided. It shall include a motor starter with a potential relay, motor overload device, an uninterrupted power supply with battery charging circuit, and redundant device circuits that prevent the car from moving in the occurrence of a single ground or failure of any critical circuit contactors or relays and such devices shall be monitored prior to each start to assure that these devices are functioning in there intended manner. All circuits shall be fuse protected. All to be enclosed in a single key lockable cabinet. b. Hydraulic Power Unit The hydraulic power unit shall include a submersible motor, rotary screw type pump, two- speed control valve, and oil reservoir with an oil level gauge. The control valve shall include a safety check valve, up and down acceleration, deceleration, leveling, and soft stop adjustments, pressure relief valve, manual lowering valve, constant down speed regulation, pressure gauge with shutoff, negative pressure switch, and manual shutoff valve all mounted and enclosed in a compact unit assembly with a key lockable cover. c. Plunger and Cylinder The cylinder shall be constructed of steel pipe with a steel bulkplate welded to the lower end and a cylinder head welded on the upper end which houses the self-adjusting packing, bearings, wiper, air bleeder, and leach line hose. The plunger shall be manufactured from accurately ground and polished tubing fitted with a steel stop ring welded to the bottom to prevent the plunger from leaving the cylinder in the up direction. d. Pipe Rupture Valve An automatic shut off valve at the cylinder inlet shall be provided to stop and hold the elevator in the event of a main oil line failure or if the elevator should overspeed in the down direction. e. Car Frame and Platform The car frame shall be fabricated from structural and formed steel members, welded and bolted construction, of the cantilevered design. It shall be fitted with roller guide shoes, car safeties, and a slack cable switch that will disconnect power to the control valve if a rope should be become slack or broken. The car platform shall be fabricated from steel framing covered with plywood protected with a fire retardant material. A toe guard shall be provided at each car entrance extending below the platform. f. Car Suspension The elevator car frame shall be suspended by (3) 3/8” diameter, 6 X 19, traction steel cables. The cables shall dead end to the pit steel on one end, pass over a “U” groove sheave, and attach to the car safety device with approved type wedge sockets. g. Overspeed Governor An overspeed governor shall be provided in the overhead 14A-6 and a tension weight with Idler sheave shall be located in the pit. The governor cable shall be ¼” 8 x 19 traction steel and attach to the car safety device. The governor shall be designed to activate the car safeties in the event of an overspeed in the down direction. Governor shall be self resetting and be provided with means to seal the tripping speed adjustment. h. Guide Rails The car guide rails shall consist of (2) machined steel “tee” sections, no less than 8 lb. per foot, securely fastened to the hoistway structure with steel brackets. All rail end sections shall be tongue & groove type joined with steel splice plates. i. Spring Buffers Spring buffers shall be furnished in the pit when pit depth exceeds (21) inches 3. PASSENGER ELEVATOR: a. Product specified is a roped hydraulic LU/LA elevator as manufactured by Custom Elevator Manufacturing Company, Inc. Similar and equal products of other manufacturers will be approved for use on this project when submitted with complete descriptive and technical data confirming product equality. The Architect will be the sole judge of product equality. Characteristics include the following: i. Type: Roped 1:2 Hydraulic ii. Capacity: 1400 lbs. iii. Car Speed: 30 FPM iv. Operation: SAPB/Single button collective v. Travel: vi. Number of Stops: Two vii. Number of Openings: Two viii. Inside Car Dimensions: 42” x 60” x 81” high ix. Doors: 36” x 80” two speed, horizontal sliding x. Power Supply: 220 Volt, single phase, 60 Hz. xi. Cab Finish: Plastic Laminate xii. Push Button Faceplates and Handrail Finish: Stainless Steel b. Operation: Operation of the elevator shall be fully automatic. Control shall be single automatic push button or single button collective (field programmable); momentary pressure on any button will call or send the elevator to the corresponding landing and the car and hoistway doors shall open and close automatically. 1. Battery lowering: In the event of a power failure, the elevator shall automatically descend to the homepark landing, wait 30 seconds, then proceed to the bottom landing while monitoring all safety circuits. Elevator door(s) shall open and close automatically. Batteries are to have an automatic charging system. 2. Emergency car lighting: An emergency car light shall be furnished in the car operating panel that provides an illumination of not less than (.2) foot candles at a point (48) inches above the car floor and (11) inches in front of the car operating panel for a minimum of (4) hours. 3. Homepark feature: The elevator shall automatically return to a field programmable designated landing after one minute without use. 4. Automatic car light timer: With the in car light key switch in the “on” position, the cab lights shall time out automatically after (3) minutes and illuminate automatically when the elevator is called to a landing. 5. Automatic two-way leveling: The leveling device shall automatically stop and 14A-7 maintain the car within ½ inch of the landing regardless of the change in load. 6. Low oil control: A low oil control feature shall be provided designed to automatically cause an up traveling car to descend to the lowest terminal landing if the elevator should fail to reach a landing in a predetermined time or if the system does not have a sufficient reservoir of oil. 4. EXECUTUION: a. Prior to installation, this contractor shall verify dimensions of hoistway, pit, machine room and inspect conditions of supports and structures prior to installation. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to installer. b. Elevator installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions contained within approved shop drawings and shall conform to ASME A17.1/CSA b44.00 and all state and local code requirements. c. Upon completion of the installation, the owner shall be instructed on the elevator’s operation, safety precautions, and maintenance requirements. d. The elevator shall be maintained in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and all applicable codes. e. The elevator shall have a (2) year limited parts warranty. 5. COMPLETION: a. Upon completion, the elevator shall be in complete working order and free from all defects. b. The elevator contractor shall provide two complete sets of electrical and solid state wiring diagrams, and operating and maintenance manuals. c. The elevator contractor shall notify the North Carolina Department of Labor for scheduling of a final inspection as per code and specifications. Approval must be given that all code requirements have been met and that installation complies with the specifications before final payment will be made. 15010-1 DIVISION 15 - PLUMBING AND HVAC SECTION 15010 - GENERAL PROVISIONS OF THE PLUMBING/HVAC CONTRACT PART I: GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCE TO OTHER SECTIONS: A. All information, work, descriptions, etc., included hereinafter in Section 15010 shall be applicable to each section of Division 15 as it may apply. 1.02 SUBSTITUTIONS: A. Not withstanding any reference in the specifications to any article, device, product, material, fixture form of type of construction by name, make or catalogue number, such reference shall be interpreted as establishing a standard of quality and shall not be construed as limiting competition and the Contractor in such case, may at his option, use any article, device, product, material, fixture, form or type of construction which, in the judgment of the Architect/Engineer, expressed in writing is equal to that specified. The procedure for requesting a material substitution shall be as outlined in the "Instructions to Bidders" portion of this document. 1.03 EXAMINATION OF SITE: A. Before submitting a proposal on this work, this Contractor shall examine the site, familiarize himself with all existing conditions, and obtains such information as is required to enable him to do the work properly, interpret the plans, estimate costs and carry out measurements in the field. The Contractor's failure to comply with the above requirements will not relieve him of the responsibility for any errors which might have been avoided by his compliance therewith. 1.04 INSTRUCTIONS TO MAINTENANCE PERSONNEL: A. Before final acceptance of this work, the Contractor shall instruct a designated representative of the Owners in the entire operation of the system. This shall include instructions in opening and closing all valves throughout the system, and proper maintenance of all equipment. The Contractor shall have a representative present for the use of the building to assist the Owner's personnel in securing proper 15010-2 operation of the system. Furnish the Owner with complete maintenance and operations manuals on all systems and equipment likely to require regular maintenance or repairs. 1.05 CODES, FEES, ETC.: A. The Contractor shall file all drawings and obtain all permits. All fees for permits and/or inspection shall be paid by the Contractor. All work shall conform to the rules and regulations of the latest edition of the North Carolina Plumbing and Mechanical Codes. Should drawing or specifications and the Code conflict the Code shall take precedence. 1.06 STANDARDS: A. All materials shall be new, unless otherwise shown, or called for and shall be furnished in accordance with the Standard Specifications of the American Society for Testing Materials, the American Society of Mechanical Engineers and the American Specifications Institute as they may apply. B. All equipment furnished for this project shall bear the label of the Underwriters Laboratories. 1.07 REFERENCE TO MATERIALS BY NAME: A. Products are generally specified by ASTM or other reference standard and/or by manufacturer's name and model number or trade name. When specified only by reference standard, the Contractor may select any product meeting this standard by any manufacturer. When several products or manufacturers are specified as being equally acceptable, the Contractor has the option of using any product and manufacturer combination listed. When a single product or manufacturer is specified, the Contractor shall furnish the exact product or material listed. 1.08 SUBMISSION OF MATERIALS LISTS: A. Within twenty (20) days following the award of the Contract, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect/Engineer a complete list of material proposed for use on the job. B. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a complete list of materials which he proposes to use in this 15010-3 project, including cuts or drawings of all major equipment, five (6) copies of this will, be required. Three (3) copies of all operating manuals, maintenance manuals, and spare parts list for all equipment shall be turned over to the Owners at the completion of the job. 1.09 PROGRESS: A. The HVAC work must be installed as fast as the progress of the other trades will permit. 1.10 CONTIGUOUS WORK: A. If any part of this Contractor's work is dependent for its proper execution or for its subsequent efficiency or appearance on the character or condition of contiguous work not executed by him, the Contractor shall examine and measure such contiguous work and report to the Architect and Engineer in writing any imperfection therein, or conditions that render it unsuitable for the completion of this work. In case the Contractor proceeds without making such written report, he shall be held to have accepted such work and the existing condition, and he shall be responsible for any defects in his work consequent thereon and will not be relieved of the obligation of any guarantee because of such imperfection or condition. 1.11 PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT: A. The Contractor shall be responsible for all work damaged by him in executing his contract. All work damaged shall be replaced by him and placed in perfect working condition without extra cost. Any construction work damaged shall be made good. The Contractor shall at all times be responsible for any damaged equipment or work in conjunction with executing his contract. All fixtures and fittings shall be adequately protected before and after installation. 1.12 COOPERATION WITH OTHER TRADES: A. This Contractor shall make every effort to cooperate at all times, with the other contractors on this project. B. In many sections of the work, there will be areas where conflicts may arise in the location of piping and this Contractor shall confer with the General Contractor to 15010-4 avoid the conflicts where possible. 1.13 PLACING IN SERVICE: A. Upon completion of the entire installation, the complete system and equipment shall be tested by actual operation to prove that it will function as intended. 1.14 GUARANTEE: A. Refer to the General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions of the Contract. 1.15 SCOPE OF WORK: A. The work to be done under this contract shall consist of and include the furnishing of all labor, material, equipment and services necessary for and incidental to the proper completion of all plumbing, heating ventilation and air conditioning work as shown on the drawings, and hereinafter specified, except work or material specified as being furnished and or performed by others. B. Unless otherwise noted all work performed in Division 15 shall be concealed in walls, ceilings or floor systems. Any work proposed to be installed exposed to view shall be approved in advance by the building architect. All penetrations in fire rated wall and ceiling assemblies shall be sealed in accordance with the UL details provided on the plans. 1.16 "AS-BUILT" DRAWINGS: A. This Contractor shall retain one (1) set of drawings and specifications for the express purpose of recording accurately and all changes or modifications made involving relocation or change of piping or ductwork. Upon completion of the project, this set of drawings shall be delivered to the Architect or Engineer to be used in the preparation of the "as-built" drawings. END OF SECTION 15010 15051-1 DIVISION 15 – PLUMBING/HVAC SECTION 15051 – PLUMBING/HVAC RELATED WORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Extent of mechanical related work required by this section is indicated on drawings and/or specified in other Division-15 sections. B. Types of mechanical related work specified in this section include the following: 1. Access to Plumbing Work: a. Access doors in walls, ceilings, and floors. b. Removable cover plates in walls, ceilings, and floors. 2. Excavating for Plumbing Work: a. Exterior water distribution systems. b. Exterior sanitary sewer systems. C. Access door requirements associated with mechanical work and mechanically related electrical components are specified in this section. D. Quality control testing for concrete work is required as work of this section. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Access Units Fire Resistance Ratings: Where fire resistance rating is indicated for construction penetrated by access units, provide UL listed and labeled Class B units, except for units which are smaller than minimum size requiring ratings as recognized by governing authority. 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data, Access Units: Submit manufacturer's technical data and installation instructions for each type of access door assembly, including setting drawings, templates, instructions and directions for installation of anchorage devices. 1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS: 15051-2 A. Existing Utilities: Locate and protect existing utilities and other underground work in manner which will ensure that no damage or service interruption will result from excavating and backfilling. B. Protect property from damage which might result from excavating and backfilling. C. Protect persons from injury at excavations, by barricades, warnings and illumination. D. Coordinate excavations with weather conditions, to minimize possibility of washouts, settlements and other damages and hazards. E. Provide temporary covering or enclosure and temporary heat as necessary to protect bottoms of excavations from freezing and frost action. Do not install mechanical work on frozen excavation bases or sub bases. F. Perform all shoring and ditch sloping required by OSHA and other applicable regulations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCESS TO MECHANICAL WORK: A. Access Doors - General: Where floors, walls and ceilings must be penetrated for access to mechanical work, provide types of access doors indicated, including floor doors if any. Furnish sizes indicated or, where not otherwise indicated, furnish adequate size for intended and necessary access. Furnish manufacturer's complete units, of type recommended for application in indicated substrate construction, in each case, complete with anchorages and hardware. B. Access Door Construction: Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate wall/ceiling door units of welded steel construction with welds ground smooth; 16-gage frames and 14-gage flush panel doors; 175 swing with concealed spring hinges; flush screwdriver operated cam locks; factory applied rust inhibitive prime coat paint finish. 1. Locks: Where indicated, provide 5-pin or 5-disc type cylinder locks, commonly keyed unless otherwise indicated. Provide ten (10) keys for each separately keyed lock. Locks shall be keyed 15051-3 to the building's master key combination. C. Removable Access Plates: 1. General: Where valves, control devices, cleanouts and similar elements of mechanical work are located within or behind wall, ceiling or floor construction or finishes, or below grade, and are not (cannot be) provided with integral removable access plates as specified in other Division-15 sections, provide removable access plates of types and sizes needed for access requirements, as indicated. Provide manufacturer's complete units with anchorages, fasteners and standard factory applied finishes. 2. Wall/Ceiling Unit Construction: Except as otherwise indicated, and where adaptable to substrate, provide manufacturer's standard frameless round formed stainless steel or chrome plated brass low profile plate cover, with single exposed flush screw anchor, with bright polished finish. 3. Painted Finish: Where substrate is indicated for painted finish, provide steel units with prime coat paint finish. 2.02 EXCAVATING FOR MECHANICAL WORK: A. Sub base Material: Provide graded mixture of gravel, sand, crushed stone or crushed slag. 1. Finely Graded Sub base Material: Well graded sand, gravel, crushed stone or crushed slag, with 100% passing 3/8" sieve. B. Backfill Material: Soil material suitable for compacting to required densities, and complying with AASHO Designation M145, Group A-1, A-2-4, A-2-5 or A-3. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 ACCESS TO MECHANICAL WORK: A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installa-tion of access doors, floor doors, and removable access plates. B. Set frames accurately in position and securely attach 15051-4 to supports with face panels plumb or level in relation to adjacent finish surfaces. C. Adjust hardware and panels after installation for proper operation. D. Remove or replace panels or frames which are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged. 3.02 EXCAVATING FOR MECHANICAL WORK: A. General: Do not excavate for mechanical work until work is ready to proceed without delay, so that total time lapse from excavation to completion of backfilling will be minimum. B. Excavate with vertical sided excavations to greatest extent possible, except where otherwise indicated. Where necessary, provide sheeting and cross bracing to sustain sides of excavations. Remove sheeting and cross bracing during backfilling wherever such removal would not endanger work or other property. Where not removed, cut sheeting off at sufficient distance below finished grade to not interfere with other work. C. Width: Excavate for piping with 6" to 9" clearance on both sides of pipe, except where otherwise shown or required for proper installation of pipe joints, fit-tings, valves and other work. Excavate for other mechanical work to provide minimum practical but ade-quate working clearances. D. Depth for Direct Support: For work to be supported directly on undisturbed soil, do not excavate beyond indicated depths, and hand excavate bottom cut to accurate elevations. Except as otherwise indicated, support the following work on undisturbed soil at bottom of the excavations: 1. Piping of 6" and less pipe/tube size. 2. Cast in place concrete. E. Depth for Unsatisfactory Soil Conditions: Where di-rected (because of unsatisfactory soil condition at bottom of indicated excavation), excavate additional depth as directed to reach satisfactory soil bearing condition. Backfill with sub base material compacted as directed, to proper excavation depth. Refer to Division 1 for change order procedure on additional work, including additional excavating and backfilling. 15051-5 F. Depth for Exterior Piping: Except as otherwise indi-cated, excavate for exterior water bearing piping (water, drainage) so that top of piping will not be less than 2'-0" vertical distance below finished grade. G. Excavate near large trees (within drip line) by hand, and protect root system from damage or dry out to greatest extent possible. Maintain moist condition for root system and cover exposed roots with burlap. Treat tree root cuts one inch diameter and larger with asphaltic tree paint. H. Store excavated material (temporarily) near excavation, in manner which will not interfere with or damage excavation or other work. Do not store under trees (within drip line). 1. Retain excavated material which complies with requirements for backfill material. 2. Dispose of excavated material which is either in excess of quantity needed for backfilling or does not comply with requirements for backfill materi-al. a. Remove unused material from project site, and dispose of in lawful manner. 3.03 DEWATERING: A. Maintain dry excavations for mechanical work, by remov-ing water. Protect excavations from inflow of surface water. Pump minor inflow of ground water from excava-tions; protect excavations from major inflow of ground water, by installing temporary sheeting and waterproof-ing. Provide adequate barriers which will protect other excavations and below grade property from being damaged by water, sediment or erosion from or through mechanical work excavations. 3.04 BASE PREPARATION: A. Sub base Installation: Where indicated, install sub base material to receive mechanical work, and compact by tamping to form firm base for work. For piping, horizontal cylindrical tanks, and similar work, shape sub base to fit shape of bottom 90o of cylinder, for uniform continuous support. 15051-6 1. Provide finely graded sub base material for wrapped, coated, and plastic pipe and tanks. B. Shape sub bases and bottoms of excavations with recesses to receive pipe bells, flanged connections, valves and similar enlargements in piping systems. C. Concrete Encasement: Where piping under roadways is less than 30" below surface of roadway, provide 4" base slab of concrete to support piping. After piping is installed and tested, provide 4" thick encasement (sides and top) of concrete before backfilling. Pro-vide Class 2500 concrete for encasement and slab. D. Previous Excavations: Where piping crosses over area more than 5'-0" wide which has been previously excavat-ed to greater depth than required for piping installa-tion, provide suitable subsidence proof support for piping. Comply with details shown or, where not other-wise shown, provide one of the following support sys-tems: 1. Excavate to undisturbed soil, in width equal to pipe diameter plus 2'-0". Install 8" courses of sub base material, each compacted to 95% of maximum density, as required to fill excavation and support piping. 3.05 BACKFILLING: A. Do not backfill until installed mechanical work has been tested and accepted, wherever testing is indicat-ed. B. Install drainage fill where indicated, and tamp to uniform firm density. C. Backfill with finely graded sub base material to 6" above wrapped, coated, and plastic piping and tanks, and to centerline of other tanks. D. Condition backfill material by either drying or adding water uniformly, to whatever extent may be necessary to facilitate compaction to required densities. Do not backfill with frozen soil materials. E. Backfill simultaneously on opposite sides of mechanical work, and compact simultaneously; do not dislocate work from installed positions. 15051-7 F. Backfill excavations in 8" high courses of backfill material, uniformly compacted to the following densi-ties (% of maximum density, ASTM D 1557), using power--driven hand operated compaction equipment. 1. Lawn and Landscaped Areas: 85% for cohesive soils; 90% for cohesionless soils. 2. Paved Areas, Other Than Roadways: 90% for cohe-sive soils; 95% for cohesionless soils. 3. Roadways: 90% for cohesive soils; 95% for cohesi-onless soils. G. Backfill to elevations matching adjacent grades, at time of backfilling excavations for mechanical work. H. Compaction Tests: Where compaction tests indicate lower densities of backfill than specified, continue compaction (and re excavation and backfilling where necessary) and provide additional testing as directed by the Architect. Allowable density tolerance is not more than one test out of 5 falling more than 2 per-centage points below specified density. 3.06 PERFORMANCE AND MAINTENANCE, EXCAVATION WORK: A. Subsidence: Where subsidence is measurable or observ-able at mechanical work excavations during general project warranty period, remove surface (pavement, lawn or other finish), add backfill material, compact, and replace surface treatment. Restore appearance, quali-ty, and condition of surface or finish to match adja-cent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible. END OF SECTION 15051 15100-1 DIVISION 15P - PLUMBING SECTION 15100 - VALVES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Extent of valves required by this section is indicated on drawings and/or specified in other Division-15 sections. B. Types of valves specified in this section include the following: 1. Ball Valves. C. Valves furnished as part of factory-fabricated equipment, are specified as part of the equipment assembly in other sections. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Valve Types: Provide valves of same type by same manufacturer. B. Valve Identification: Provide valves with manufacturer’s name (or trademark) and pressure rating clearly marked on valve body. C. Codes and Standards: 1. MSS Compliance: Mark valves in accordance with MSS-25 "Standard Marking System for Valves, Fittings, Flanges and Unions". 2. UL and FM Compliance: Provide valves used in fire protection piping, which are UL-listed and FM approved. 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including installation instructions for each type of valve. Include pressure drop curve or chart for each type and size of valve. Submit valve schedule showing manufacturer's figure number, size, location, and valve features for each required valve. 15100-2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 VALVES: A. General: Provide factory fabricated valves recommended by manufacturer for use in service indicated. Provide valves of types and pressure ratings indicated; provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Provide end connections which properly mate with pipe, tube, and equipment connections. B. Size: Unless otherwise indicated, provide valves of same size as upstream pipe size. C. Operators: Provide hand wheels, fastened to valve stem, for valves other than quarter-turn. Provide lever handle for quarter-turn valves, 6" and smaller. 2.02 BALL VALVES: A. Comply with the following standards: 1. Bronze Valves: MSS SP-80. 2.03 VALVE FEATURES: A. General: Provide valves with features indicated and, where not otherwise indicated, provide proper valve features as determined by Installer for installation requirements. Comply with ASME B31.9 for building services piping and ASME B31.1 for power piping. B. Threaded: Valve ends complying with ANSI B2.1. C. Solder-Joint: Valve ends complying with ANSI B16.18. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with the following requirements. 1. Install valves where required for proper operation of piping and equipment, including valves in branch lines where necessary to isolate sections of piping. Locate valves so as to be accessible and so that separate support can be provided when necessary. 15100-3 2. Install valves with stems pointed up, in vertical position where possible, but in no case with stems pointed downward from horizontal plane unless unavoidable. Install valve drains with hose-end adapter for each valve that must be installed with stem below horizontal plane. B. Insulation: Where insulation is indicated, install extended-stem valves, arranged in proper manner to receive insulation. C. Selection of Valve Ends (Pipe Connections): Except as otherwise indicated, select and install valves with the following ends or types of pipe/tube connections: 1. Pipe Size 2" and Smaller: One of the following, at Installer's option: a. Threaded valves. D. Valve System: Select and install valves with outside screw and yoke stems, except provide inside screw non-rising stem valves where headroom prevents full opening of OS&Y valves. E. Non-Metallic Disc: Limit selection and installation of valves with non-metallic discs to locations indicated and where foreign material in piping system can be expected to prevent tight shutoff of metal seated valves. 3.02 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING: A. Valve Adjustment: After piping systems have been tested and put into service inspect each valve for possible leaks. Adjust or replace packing to stop leaks, replace valve if leak persists. C. Cleaning: Clean factory-finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces with manufacturer's touch-up paint. 3.03 VALVE SCHEDULE: A. General: Provide the following valves for various valve types listed in Division-15 piping sections. 3.06 BALL VALVES: 15100-4 A. 1" and Smaller: 150 psi, bronze body, standard port, bronze trim, 2-piece construction, TFE seats and seals. B. 1-1/4" to 2": 150 psi, bronze body, standard port, 3-piece body, TFE seats with bronze trim. END OF SECTION 15100 15120-1 DIVISION 15P - PLUMBING SECTION 15120 - PIPING SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Extent of piping specialties work required by this section is indicated on drawings and schedules and by requirements of this section. B. Types of piping specialties specified in this section include the following: 1. Pipe Escutcheons. 2. Dielectric Unions. 3. Fire Barrier Penetration Seals. 4. Water Hammer Arresters. 4. Pipe Sleeves. C. Piping specialties furnished as part of factory-fabricated equipment, are specified as part of equipment assembly in other sections of this specification. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Codes and Standards: 1. FCI Compliance: Test and rate "Y" type strainers in accordance with FCI 73-1 "Pressure Rating Standard for "Y" Type Strainers". Test and rate other type strainers in accordance with FCI 78-1 "Pressure Rating Standard for Pipeline Strainers Other than "Y" Type". 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including installation instructions, and dimensioned drawings for each type of manufactured piping specialty. Include pressure drop curve or chart for each type and size of pipeline strainer. Submit schedule showing manufacturer's figure number, size, location, and features for each required piping specialty. 15120-2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPING SPECIALTIES: A. General: Provide factory-fabricated piping specialties recommended by manufacturer for use in service indicated. Provide piping specialties of types and pressure ratings indicated for each service, or if not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Provide sizes as indicated, and connections, which properly mate with pipe, tube, and equipment connections. Where more than one type is indicated, selection is Installer's option. 2.02 PIPE ESCUTCHEONS: A. General: Provide pipe escutcheons as specified herein with inside diameter closely fitting pipe outside diameter, or outside of pipe insulation where pipe is insulated. Select outside diameter of escutcheon to completely cover pipe penetration hole in floors, walls, or ceilings; and pipe sleeve extension, if any. Furnish pipe escutcheons with nickel or chrome finish for occupied areas, prime paint finish for unoccupied areas. B. Pipe Escutcheons for Moist Areas: For waterproof floors, and areas where water and condensation can be expected to accumulate, provide cast brass or sheet brass escutcheons, solid or split hinged. C. Pipe Escutcheons for Dry Areas: Provide sheet steel escutcheons, solid or split hinged. 2.04 DIELECTRIC UNIONS: A. General: Provide standard products recommended by manufacturer for use in service indicated, which effectively isolate ferrous from non-ferrous piping (electrical conductance), prevent galvanic action, and stop corrosion. 2.05 FIRE BARRIER PENETRATION SEALS: A. Provide seals for any opening through fire-rated walls, floors, or ceilings used as passage for mechanical components such as piping or ductwork. 1. Use UL details shown on the drawings for fire 15120-3 stopping all penetrations in rated walls and/or floors. 2.06 WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS: A. General: Provide water hammer arresters, stainless steel casing and bellows, pressure rated for 250 psi, tested and certified in accordance with PDI Standard WH-201. 2.07 FABRICATED PIPING SPECIALTIES: A. Drip Pans: Provide drip pans fabricated from corrosion-resistant sheet metal with watertight joints, and with edges turned up 2-1/2". Reinforce top, either by structural angles or by rolling top over 1/4" steel rod. Provide opening, gasket, and flange at low point for watertight joint and 1" drain line connection. B. Pipe Sleeves: Provide pipe sleeves of the following: 1. Steel-Pipe: Fabricate from Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe; for above grade. 2. PVC-Pipe: Fabricate from Schedule 40 PVC pipe; for below grade. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SPECIALTIES: A. Pipe Escutcheons: Install pipe escutcheons on each pipe penetration through floors, walls, partitions, and ceilings where penetration is exposed to view; and on exterior of building. Secure escutcheon to pipe or insulation so escutcheon covers penetration hole, and is flush with adjoining surface. B. Dielectric Unions: Install at each piping joint between ferrous and non-ferrous piping. Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions. C. Fire Barrier Penetration Seals: Fill entire opening with sealing compound. Adhere to manufacturer's installation instructions. D. Water Hammer Arresters: Install in upright position, in locations and of sizes in accordance with PDI Standard WH-201, and elsewhere as indicated. 15120-4 3.02 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED PIPING SPECIALTIES: A. Pipe Sleeves: Install pipe sleeves of types indicated where piping passes through walls, floors, ceilings, and roofs. Do not install sleeves through structural members of work, except as detailed on drawings, or as reviewed by the Contracting Officer. Install sleeves accurately centered on pipe runs. Size sleeves so that piping and insulation (if any) will have free movement in sleeve, including allowance for thermal expansion; but not less than 2 pipe sizes larger than piping run. Where insulation includes vapor- barrier jacket, provide sleeve with sufficient clearance for installation. Install length of sleeve equal to thickness of construction penetrated, and finish flush to surface; except floor sleeves. Extend floor sleeves 1/4" above level floor finish and 3/4" above floor finish sloped to drain. Provide temporary support of sleeves during placement of concrete and other work around sleeves, and provide temporary closure to prevent concrete and other materials from entering sleeves. 1. Install sheet-metal sleeves at interior partitions and ceilings other than suspended ceilings. 2. Install steel-pipe sleeves in exterior or load bearing partitions except as otherwise indicated. END OF SECTION 15120 15140-1 DIVISION 15P - PLUMBING SECTION 15140 - SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Extent of supports and anchors required by this section is indicated on drawings and/or specified in other Division-15 sections. B. Types of supports and anchors specified in this section include the following: 1. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports. 2. Vertical-Piping Clamps. 3. Hanger-Rod Attachments. 4. Building Attachments. 5. Saddles and Shields. 6. Miscellaneous Materials. C. Supports and anchors furnished as part of factory-fabricated equipment are specified as part of equipment assembly in other Division-15 sections. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of supports and anchors, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. Codes and Standards: 1. Code Compliance: Comply with North Carolina Building Code Volume II pertaining to product materials and installation of supports and anchors. 2. UL and FM Compliance: Provide products which are UL-listed and FM approved. 3. MSS Standard Compliance: a. Provide pipe hangers and supports of which materials, design, and manufacture comply with MSS SP-58. 15140-2 b. Select and apply pipe hangers and supports, complying with MSS SP-69. c. Fabricate and install pipe hangers and supports, complying with MSS SP-89. d. Terminology used in this section is defined in MSS SP-90. 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including installation instructions for each type of support and anchor. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 HORIZONTAL-PIPING HANGERS AND SUPPORTS: A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory-fabricated horizontal-piping hangers and supports complying with MSS SP-58, of one of the following MSS types listed, selected by Installer to suit horizontal-piping systems, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's published product information. Use only one type by one manufacturer for each piping service. Select size of hangers and supports to exactly fit pipe size for bare piping, and to exactly fit around piping insulation with saddle or shield for insulated piping. Provide copper-plated hangers and supports for copper-piping systems. B. Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers: MSS Type 1. C. Steel Pipe Clamps: MSS Type 4. D. Pipe Hangers: MSS Type 5. E. Split Pipe Rings: MSS Type 11. 2.02 VERTICAL-PIPING CLAMPS: A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory-fabricated vertical-piping clamps complying with MSS SP-58, of one of the following types listed, selected by Installer to suit vertical piping systems, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's published product information. Select size of vertical piping clamps to exactly fit pipe size of bare pipe. Provide copper-plated clamps for copper-piping systems. 15140-3 B. Two-Bolt Riser Clamps: MSS Type 8. 2.03 HANGER-ROD ATTACHMENTS: A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory-fabricated hanger-rod attachments complying with MSS SP-58, of one of the following MSS types listed, selected by Installer to suit horizontal piping hangers and building attachments, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's published product information. Use only one type by one manufacturer for each piping service. Select size of hanger-rod attachments to suit hanger rods. Provide copper-plated hanger-rod attachments for copper-piping systems. B. Steel Turnbuckles: MSS Type 13. C. Swivel Turnbuckles: MSS Type 15. D. Malleable Iron Sockets: MSS Type 16. 2.04 BUILDING ATTACHMENTS: A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory-fabricated building attachments complying with MSS SP-58, selected by Installer to suit building substrate conditions, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's published product information. Select size of building attachments to suit hanger rods. Provide copper-plated building attachments for copper-piping systems. 2.05 SADDLES AND SHIELDS: A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide saddles or shields under piping hangers and supports, factory-fabricated, for all insulated piping. Size saddles and shields for exact fit to mate with pipe insulation. B. Protection Saddles: MSS Type 39; fill interior voids with segments of insulation matching adjoining insulation. C. Protection Shields: MSS Type 40; of length recommended by manufacturer to prevent crushing of insulation. D. Thermal Hanger Shields: Constructed of 360 insert of high density, 100 psi, waterproofed calcium silicate, 15140-4 encased in 360 sheet metal shield. Provide assembly of same thickness as adjoining insulation. 2.06 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS: A. Metal Framing: Provide products complying with NEMA STD ML 1. B. Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars: Provide products complying with ASTM A 36. C. Cement Grout: Portland cement (ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III) and clean uniformly graded, natural sand (ASTM C 404, Size No. 2). Mix at a ratio of 1.0 part cement to 3.0 parts sand, by volume, with minimum amount of water required for placement and hydration. D. Heavy-Duty Steel Trapezes: Fabricate from steel shapes selected for loads required; weld steel in accordance with AWS standards. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION: A. Examine areas and conditions under which supports and anchors are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer. 3.02 PREPARATION: A. Proceed with installation of hangers, supports and anchors only after required building structural work has been completed in areas where the work is to be installed. Correct any problems including but not limited to proper placement of inserts, anchors and other building structural attachments. B. Prior to installation of hangers, supports, anchors and associated work, Installer shall meet at project site with Contractor, installer of each component of associated work, inspection and testing agency representatives (if any), installers of other work requiring coordination with work of this section and Contracting Officer for purpose of reviewing material selections and procedures to be followed in performing the work in compliance with requirements specified. 15140-5 3.03 INSTALLATION OF BUILDING ATTACHMENTS: A. Install building attachments at required locations within concrete or on structural steel for proper piping support. Space attachments within maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP-69. Install additional building attachments where support is required for additional concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, expansion joints, and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten insert securely to forms. Where concrete with compressive strength less than 2500 psi is indicated, install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS: A. General: Install hangers, supports, clamps and attachments to support piping properly from building structure; comply with MSS SP-69. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping to be supported together on trapeze type hangers where possible. Install supports with maximum spacing complying with MSS SP-69. Where piping of various sizes is to be supported together by trapeze hangers, space hangers for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipe. Do not use wire or perforated metal to support piping, and do not support piping from other piping. B. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers and other accessories. Except as otherwise indicated for exposed continuous pipe runs install hangers and supports of same type and style as installed for adjacent similar piping. D. Provisions for Movement: 1. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping systems and to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends and similar units. E. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loading and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment. 15140-6 F. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes, and so that maximum pipe deflections allowed by ANSI B31 Pressure Piping Codes are not exceeded. G. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following installation requirements. 1. Clamps: Attach clamps, including spacers (if any), to piping with clamps projecting through insulation; do not exceed pipe stresses allowed by ANSI B31. 2. Shields: Where low-compressive-strength insulation or vapor barriers are indicated on cold or chilled water piping, install coated protective shields. For pipe 8" and over, install wood insulation saddles. 3. Saddles: Where insulation without vapor barrier is indicated, install protection saddles. 3.05 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING: A. Hanger Adjustment: Adjust hangers so as to distribute loads equally on attachments. B. Support Adjustment: Provide grout under supports so as to bring piping and equipment to proper level and elevations. C. Cleaning: Clean factory-finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces with manufacturer's touch-up paint. END OF SECTION 15140 15250-1 DIVISION 15P - PLUMBING SECTION 15250 - PLUMBING SYSTEM INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Extent of mechanical insulation required by this section is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this section. B. Types of mechanical insulation specified in this section include the following: 1. Piping System Insulation: a. Armaflex 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of mechanical insulation products, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 3 years. B. Installer's Qualifications: Firms with at least 5 years successful installation experience on projects with mechanical insulations similar to that required for this project. C. Flame/Smoke Ratings: Provide composite mechanical insulation (insulation, jackets, coverings, sealers, mastics and adhesives) with flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less, as tested by ASTM E 84 (NFPA 255) method. 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions for each type of mechanical insulation. Submit schedule showing manufacturer's product number, k-value, thickness, and furnished accessories for each mechanical system requiring insulation. B. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and replacement material lists for each type of mechanical insulation. Include this data and product data in 15250-2 maintenance manual. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. Deliver insulation, coverings, cements, adhesives, and coatings to site in containers with manufacturer's stamp or label, affixed showing fire hazard indexes of products. B. Protect insulation against dirt, water, and chemical and mechanical damage. Do not install damaged or wet insulation; remove from project site. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE INSULATION MATERIALS: A. Armaflex Foam Pipe Insulation: ASTM C 547, Class 1 unless otherwise indicated. B. Adhesives, Sealers, and Protective Finishes: As recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION: A. Examine areas and conditions under which mechanical insulation is to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer. 3.02 PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEM INSULATION: A. Insulation Omitted: Omit insulation on chrome-plated exposed piping (except for handicapped fixtures), air chambers, unions, strainers, check valves, balance cocks, flow regulators, drain lines from water coolers, buried piping, fire protection piping, and preinsulated equipment. B. Hot Piping: 1. Application Requirements: Insulate the following hot plumbing piping systems: a. Potable hot water piping. 2. Insulate each piping system specified above with 15250-3 one of the following types and thicknesses of insulation: a. Pipe insulation: 1" thick for pipe sizes up to and including 2” Min k value =.27 BTU/in/hr-sqft-degF. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF PIPING INSULATION: A. General: Install insulation products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that insulation serves its intended purpose. B. Install insulation on pipe systems subsequent to installation of heat tracing, painting, testing, and acceptance of tests. C. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces. Insulate each continuous run of piping with full-length units of insulation, with single cut piece to complete run. Do not use cut pieces or scraps abutting each other. D. Clean and dry pipe surfaces prior to insulating. Butt insulation joints firmly together to ensure complete and tight fit over surfaces to be covered. E. Maintain integrity of vapor-barrier jackets on pipe insulation, and protect to prevent puncture or other damage. F. Cover valves, fittings and similar items in each piping system with equivalent thickness and composition of insulation as applied to adjoining pipe run. Install factory molded, precut or job fabricated units (at Installer's option) except where specific form or type is indicated. G. Extend piping insulation without interruption through walls, floors and similar piping penetrations, except where otherwise indicated. H. Butt pipe insulation against pipe hanger insulation inserts. For hot pipes, apply 3" wide vapor barrier tape or band over the butt joints. For cold piping apply wet coat of vapor barrier lap cement on butt joints and seal joints with 3" wide vapor barrier tape or band. 15250-4 3.04 PROTECTION AND REPLACEMENT: A. Replace damaged insulation that cannot be repaired satisfactorily. B. Protection: Insulation Installer shall advise Contractor of required protection for insulation work during remainder of construction period, to avoid damage and deterioration. END OF SECTION 15250 15251H-1 DIVISION 15H - HVAC SECTION 15251H - HVAC SYSTEM INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Extent of mechanical insulation required by this section is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this section. B. Types of mechanical insulation specified in this section include the following: 1. Piping System Insulation: a. Armaflex 2. Ductwork System Insulation: a. Fiberglass. C. Refer to Division-15 section "Supports and Anchors" for protection saddles, protection shields, and thermal hanger shields; not work of this section. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of mechanical insulation products, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 3 years. B. Installer's Qualifications: Firms with at least 5 years successful installation experience on projects with mechanical insulations similar to that required for this project. C. Flame/Smoke Ratings: Provide composite mechanical insulation (insulation, jackets, coverings, sealers, mastics and adhesives) with flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less, as tested by ASTM E 84 (NFPA 255) method. 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions for each type of 15251H-2 mechanical insulation. Submit schedule showing manufacturer's product number, k-value, thickness, and furnished accessories for each mechanical system requiring insulation. B. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and replacement material lists for each type of mechanical insulation. Include this data and product data in maintenance manual. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. Deliver insulation, coverings, cements, adhesives, and coatings to site in containers with manufacturer's stamp or label, affixed showing fire hazard indexes of products. B. Protect insulation against dirt, water, and chemical and mechanical damage. Do not install damaged or wet insulation; remove from project site. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE INSULATION MATERIALS: A. Armaflex Pipe Insulation: ASTM C 547, Class 1 unless otherwise indicated. B. Adhesives, Sealers, and Protective Finishes: As recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated. 2.02 DUCTWORK INSULATION MATERIALS: A. Flexible Fiberglass Ductwrap Insulation: ASTM C 553, Type I, Class B-4. B. Jackets for Ductwork Insulation: ASTM C 921, Type I for ductwork with temperatures below ambient; Type II for ductwork with temperatures above ambient. C. Ductwork Insulation Accessories: Provide staples, bands, wires, tape, anchors, corner angles and similar accessories as recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated. D. Ductwork Insulation Compounds: Provide cements, adhesives, coatings, sealers, protective finishes and similar compounds as recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated. 15251H-3 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION: A. Examine areas and conditions under which mechanical insulation is to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer. 3.02 HVAC PIPING SYSTEM INSULATION: A. Insulation Omitted: Omit insulation on hot piping within radiation enclosures or unit cabinets; on cold piping within unit cabinets provided piping is located over drain pan; on heating piping beyond control valve, located within heated space. B. Sub-Freezing Piping (0 to 39oF (-18 to 4oC)): 1. Application Requirements: Insulate the following sub-freezing HVAC piping systems: a. Refrigerant suction lines between evaporators and compressors. 2. Insulate each piping system specified above with one of the following types and thicknesses of insulation: a. Armaflex: 1" thick for pipe sizes up to and including 1 1/2"; 1 1/2" thick for pipe sizes over 1 1/2". Min k =.27 BTU/in/hr-sqft-degF. C. Insulation of Piping Exposed to Weather: Protect outdoor insulation from weather by installing outdoor protective finish or jacketing as recommended by the manufacturer. 3.04 DUCTWORK SYSTEM INSULATION: A. Dual Temperature Ductwork: 1. Application Requirements: Insulate the following dual temperature ductwork: a. Hot/cold supply and return ductwork between fan discharge or HVAC unit discharge and room terminal outlets; including plenums and 15251H-4 equipment housings/casings not factory insulated. b. Insulate neck and bells of all supply and return diffusers. 2. Insulate each ductwork system specified above with one of the following types and thicknesses of insulation: a. Flexible Duct Wrap(no duct liner): Minimum value of R=5. 3.06 INSTALLATION OF PIPING INSULATION: A. General: Install insulation products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that insulation serves its intended purpose. B. Install insulation on pipe systems subsequent to installation of heat tracing, painting, testing, and acceptance of tests. C. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces. Insulate each continuous run of piping with full-length units of insulation, with single cut piece to complete run. Do not use cut pieces or scraps abutting each other. D. Clean and dry pipe surfaces prior to insulating. Butt insulation joints firmly together to ensure complete and tight fit over surfaces to be covered. E. Maintain integrity of vapor-barrier jackets on pipe insulation, and protect to prevent puncture or other damage. F. Cover valves, fittings and similar items in each piping system with equivalent thickness and composition of insulation as applied to adjoining pipe run. Install factory molded, precut or job fabricated units (at Installer's option) except where specific form or type is indicated. G. Extend piping insulation without interruption through walls, floors and similar piping penetrations, except where otherwise indicated. H. Butt pipe insulation against pipe hanger insulation 15251H-5 inserts. For hot pipes, apply 3" wide vapor barrier tape or band over the butt joints. For cold piping apply wet coat of vapor barrier lap cement on butt joints and seal joints with 3" wide vapor barrier tape or band. 3.07 INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK INSULATION: A. General: Install insulation products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that insulation serves its intended purpose. B. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces. C. Clean and dry ductwork prior to insulating. Butt insulation joints firmly together to ensure complete and tight fit over surfaces to be covered. D. Maintain integrity of vapor-barrier on ductwork insulation, and protect it to prevent puncture and other damage. E. Extend ductwork insulation without interruption through walls, floors and similar ductwork penetrations, except where otherwise indicated. F. Lined Ductwork: Except as otherwise indicated, omit insulation on ductwork where internal insulation or sound absorbing linings have been installed. G. Ductwork Exposed to Weather: Protect outdoor insulation from weather by installing outdoor protective finish or jacketing as recommended by manufacturer. H. Corner Angles: Except for oven and hood exhaust duct insulation, install corner angles on external corners of insulation on ductwork in exposed finished spaces before covering with jacketing. 3.09 PROTECTION AND REPLACEMENT: A. Replace damaged insulation which cannot be repaired satisfactorily, including units with vapor barrier damage and moisture saturated units. B. Protection: Insulation Installer shall advise 15251H-6 Contractor of required protection for insulation work during remainder of construction period, to avoid damage and deterioration. END OF SECTION 15251 15401-1 DIVISION 15P - PLUMBING SECTION 15401 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Extent of domestic water piping systems work is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this section. B. Applications for domestic water piping systems include the following: 1. Domestic cold-water piping. 2. Domestic hot-water piping. C. Extend building water to existing public water line outside foundation wall where shown on the site plans. D. Refer to appropriate Division-15 sections for insulation required in connection with domestic water piping; not work of this section. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Qualification of Installers: The entire gasket system shall be installed by trained workmen skilled in the installation of such systems. B. Plumbing Code Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of the North Carolina Building Code Volume II pertaining to plumbing materials, construction and installation of products. C. ANSI Compliance: Comply with applicable American National Standards pertaining to products and installation of domestic water piping systems. 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data for domestic water piping systems, materials and products. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS: A. General: Provide piping materials and 15401-2 factory-fabricated piping products of sizes, types, pressure ratings, temperature ratings, and capacities as indicated. Where not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with local installation requirements. Provide sizes and types matching piping and equipment connections; provide fittings of materials which match pipe materials used in domestic water piping systems. Where more than 1 type of materials or products are indicated, selection is Installer's option. 2.02 BASIC PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS: A. General: Provide pipe, tube and fittings complying with Division-15 Basic Materials and Methods section "Pipes and Pipe Fittings", in accordance with the following listing: B. Domestic Water Piping: 1. Tube Size 2" and Smaller on Building (Interior Above Grade): Copper tube. a. Wall Thickness: Type L, hard temper. b. Fittings: Wrought-copper, 95-5 solder joints. 2. Tube Size 2" and Smaller on Building Exterior(Below Grade): Copper tube. a. Wall Thickness: Type K, soft temper. b. Fittings: Wrought-copper, silver braze-joints. 2.03 BASIC PIPING SPECIALTIES: A. General: Provide piping specialties in accordance with the following listing: 1. Pipe escutcheons. 2. Pipe sleeves. 2.04 SPECIAL PIPING SPECIALTIES: A. Water Hammer Arresters: Provide bellows type water hammer arresters, stainless steel casing and bellows, pressure rated for 250 psi, tested and certified in accordance with PDI Standard WH-201. 2.05 BASIC SUPPORTS, ANCHORS, AND SEALS: 15401-3 A. General: Provide supports, anchors, and seals in accordance with the following listing: 1. Adjustable steel clevises for horizontal piping hangers and supports. 2. Two-bolt riser clamps for vertical piping supports. 3. C-clamps, and steel brackets for building attachments. 4. Protection shields for insulated piping support in hangers. 5. Copper flashing for piping penetrations. 2.06 BASIC VALVES: A. General: Provide valves complying with Division-15 Basic Materials and Methods section "Valves", in accordance with the following listing: 1. Sectional Valves: a. 2" and Smaller: Ball Valves. 2. Shutoff Valves: a. 2" and Smaller: Ball Valves. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF DOMESTIC WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING: A. General: Install water distribution piping in accordance with Division-15 Basic Materials and Methods section "Pipe, Tube, and Fittings". B. Sterilization: At completion of water distribution line installation, flush and sterilize in conformance with AWWA C-601, to satisfaction of local authorities having jurisdiction. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SPECIALTIES: A. Water Hammer Arresters: Install in upright position, in locations and of sizes in accordance with PDI Standard WH-201, and elsewhere as indicated. 15401-4 3.03 INSTALLATION OF VALVES: A. Install valves in accordance with Division-15 Basic Materials and Methods section "Valves". B. Sectional Valves: Install on each branch and riser, close to main, where branch or riser serves 2 or more plumbing fixtures or equipment connections, and elsewhere as indicated. C. Shutoff Valves: Install on inlet of each plumbing equipment item, and on inlet of each plumbing fixture, and elsewhere as indicated. 3.04 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS: A. Piping Run outs to Fixtures: Provide hot and cold water piping run outs to fixtures of sizes indicated, but in no case smaller than required by the North Carolina Plumbing Code. END OF SECTION 15401 15405-1 DIVISION 15P - PLUMBING SECTION 15405 - SOIL AND WASTE PIPING SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Extent of soil and waste piping system work, is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this section. B. Applications for soil and waste piping systems include the following: 1. Above ground soil, waste and vent piping within buildings including soil stacks, vent stacks, horizontal branches, traps, and connections to fixtures and drains. 2. Extend building sewer to public sewer line outside foundation wall where shown on the site plans. C. Insulation for soil and waste piping is specified in applicable Division-15 sections, and is included as work of this section. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Specimen Joints: Before commencing pipe laying, Contractor shall form specimen joints to demonstrate, to the satisfaction of the Architect, that materials and methods employed will result in watertight joints. B. Qualification of Installers: The entire gasket system shall be installed by trained workmen skilled in the installation of such systems. C. Plumbing Code Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of National Standard Plumbing Code and the North Carolina Building Code Volume II pertaining to plumbing materials, construction and installation of products. D. ANSI Compliance: Comply with applicable American National Standards pertaining to products and installation of soil and waste piping systems. E. PDI Compliance: Comply with applicable Plumbing and Drainage Institute Standards pertaining to products and installation of soil and waste piping systems. 15405-2 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data for soil and waste piping systems materials and products. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SOIL AND WASTE PIPING MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS: A. General: Provide piping materials and factory-fabricated piping products of sizes, types, pressure ratings, and capacities as indicated. Where not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Provide sizes and types matching piping and equipment connections; provide fittings of materials which match pipe materials used in soil and waste piping systems. 2.03 BASIC PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS: A. General: Provide pipe, tube, and fittings complying with Division-15 Basic Materials and Methods section "Pipe, Tube, and Fittings", in accordance with the following listing: B. Aboveground Building Drain Piping: 1. Pipe Size 4" and Smaller: PVC DWV pipe. a. Pipe Class: Foam Core (not for pressure service). b. Fittings: PVC solvent weld drainage pattern fittings. C. Below Ground Building Drain Piping: 1. Pipe Size 6" and Smaller: PVC DWV pipe. a. Pipe Class: Foam Core (not for pressure service). b. Fittings: PVC solvent weld drainage pattern fittings. C. Below Ground Force Main Piping: 1. Pipe Size 2" and Smaller: PVC Schedule 40 pipe. a. Fittings: PVC solvent weld pressure rated fittings. No 90 degree bends. Use 45 degree 15405-3 fittings and wye fitting for all bends and junctions. 2.04 BASIC PIPING SPECIALTIES: A. General: Provide piping specialties in accordance with the following listing: 1. Pipe Escutcheons. 2. Pipe Sleeves. 3. Sleeve Seals. 2.05 BASIC SUPPORTS, ANCHORS, AND SEALS: A. General: Provide supports, anchors, and seals in accordance with the following listing: 1. Adjustable steel clevises for horizontal piping hangers and supports. 2. Two-bolt riser clamps for vertical piping supports. 3. C-clamps, and steel brackets for building attachments. 4. Copper flashing for piping penetrations. 2.06 DRAINAGE PIPING PRODUCTS: A. General: Provide factory-fabricated drainage piping products of size and type indicated. Where not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements and governing regulations. B. Cleanout Plugs: Cast-bronze or brass, threads complying with ANSI B2.1, countersunk head. C. Floor Cleanouts: Cast-iron body and frame; cleanout plug; adjustable round top as follows: 1. Nickel-Bronze Top: Manufacturers standard cast unit of the pattern indicated: a. Pattern: Exposed rim type, with recess to receive applicable floor finish. b. Pattern: Exposed flush type, standard non-slip scored or abrasive finish. 15405-4 D. Flashing Flanges: Cast-iron watertight stack or wall sleeve with membrane flashing ring. Provide underdeck clamp and sleeve length as required. E. Vent Flashing Sleeves: Cast-iron calking type roof coupling for cast-iron stacks. 2.07 FLOOR DRAINS: A. General: Provide floor drains of size as indicated on drawings; and type, including features, as specified herein: B. Floor Drain: Cast-iron body and flashing collar with closure plug, nickel bronze adjustable strainer head with secured square hole grate, with the following features: 1. Trap primer connection. 2. Bottom outlet, inside calk. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF SOIL AND WASTE ABOVE GROUND PIPING: A. General: Install soil and waste piping in accordance with Division-15 Basic Materials and Methods section "Pipe, Tube, and Fittings", and with National Standard Plumbing Code and North Carolina Building Code Volume II. Fire stop all penetrations per UL details on the drawings. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF BUILDING DRAIN PIPING: A. General: Install underground building drains as indicated and in accordance with National Standard Plumbing Code and North Carolina Building Code Volume II. Lay underground building drains beginning at low point of systems, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install required gaskets in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for use of lubricants, cements, and other special installation requirements. Clean interior of piping of dirt and other superfluous material as work progresses. Maintain swab or drag in line and pull past each joint as it is completed. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day or whenever work stops. 1. Install soil and vent piping pitched to drain at 15405-5 minimum slope of 1/4" per foot (2%) for piping 2" and smaller, and 1/8" per foot (1%) for piping 3"-6". 3.03 INSTALLATION OF DRAINAGE PIPING PRODUCTS: A. Cleanouts: Install in sanitary above ground piping and sanitary building drain piping as indicated, as required by National Standard Plumbing Code and North Carolina Building Code Volume II and at each change in direction of piping greater than 45; at minimum intervals of 50' for piping 3" and smaller and 75' for larger piping; and at base of each vertical soil or waste stack. Install floor and wall cleanout covers for concealed piping, select type to match adjacent building finish. B. Flashing Flanges: Install flashing flange and clamping device with each stack and cleanout passing through waterproof membranes. C. Vent Flashing Sleeves: Install on stacks passing through roof, secure over stack flashing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF FLOOR DRAINS: A. General: Install floor drains in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and in locations indicated. 1. Coordinate with soil and waste piping as necessary to interface floor drains with drainage piping systems. 2. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained, or as indicated. Set tops of drains flush with finished floor. 3. Install drain flashing collar or flange so that no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes, where penetrated. 4. Position drains so that they are accessible and easy to maintain. 3.05 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS: A. Piping Runouts to Fixtures: Provide soil and waste 15405-6 piping runouts to plumbing fixtures and drains, with approved trap, of sizes indicated; but in no case smaller than required by National Standard Plumbing Code and North Carolina Building Code Volume II. 1. Locate piping runouts as close as possible to bottom of floor slab supporting fixtures or drains. 3.06 PIPING TESTS: A. Test soil and waste piping system in accordance with requirements of North Carolina Plumbing Code. END OF SECTION 15405 15429-1 DIVISION 15P - PLUMBING SECTION 15429 - PLUMBING FIXTURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Extent of plumbing fixtures work required by this section is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this section. B. Types of plumbing fixtures specified in this section include the following: 1. Floor drains. 2. Water heaters. 3. Stainless steel sinks C. Refer to Division-16 sections for field installed electrical wiring required for water coolers and other plumbing fixtures; not work of this section. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of plumbing fixtures of type, style and configuration required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 3 years. B. Codes and Standards: 1. Plumbing Fixture Standards: Comply with applicable portions of National Standard Plumbing Code and North Carolina Building Code Volume II pertaining to materials and installation of plumbing fixtures. 2. ANSI Standards: Comply with applicable ANSI standards pertaining to plumbing fixtures and systems. 3. Compliance: Comply with standards established NCSBC for plumbing fixtures for handicapped persons. 4. ASHRAE Compliance: Test and rate water coolers in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 18 "Method of Testing for Rating Drinking Water Coolers with 15429-2 Self Contained Mechanical Refrigeration Systems". 5. ANSI Compliance: Construct and install barrier free plumbing fixtures in accordance with ANSI and ADA Standards. 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including rated capacities of selected model clearly indicated, furnished specialties and accessories; and installation instructions. B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawings indicating dimensions, roughing-in requirements, required clearances, and methods of assembly of components and anchorages. C. Samples: Submit samples of each cabinet finish furnished, and fixture color furnished. D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for each type of plumbing fixture and accessory; including "trouble shooting" maintenance guide. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of Division 1. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. Deliver plumbing fixtures individually wrapped in factory fabricated containers. B. Handle plumbing fixtures carefully to prevent breakage, chipping and scoring fixture finish. Do not install damaged plumbing fixtures; replace and return damaged units to equipment manufacturer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PLUMBING FIXTURES: A. General: Provide factory fabricated fixtures of type, style and material indicated. For each type fixture, provide fixture manufacturer's standard trim, carrier, seats, and valves as indicated by their published product information; either as designed and constructed, or as recommended by manufacturer, and as required for complete installation. Where more than one type is indicated, selection is Installer's option; 15429-3 but, all fixtures of same type must be furnished by single manufacturer. Where type is not otherwise indicated, provide fixtures complying with governing regulations. 2.02 MATERIALS: A. General: Unless otherwise specified, comply with applicable Federal Specification WW-P-541/-Series sections pertaining to plumbing fixtures, fittings, trim, metals and finishes. Comply with requirements of WW-P-541/specification relative to quality of ware, glazing, enamel, composition and finish of metals, air gaps, and vacuum breakers, even though some plumbing fixtures specified in this section are not described in WW-P-541/-. B. Provide materials which have been selected for their surface flatness and smoothness. Exposed surfaces which exhibit pitting, seam marks, roller marks, foundry sand holes, stains, discoloration, or other surface imperfections on finished units are not acceptable. C. Where fittings, trim and accessories are exposed or semi exposed, provide bright chrome plated or polished stainless steel units. Provide copper or brass where not exposed. D. Stainless Steel Sheets: ASTM A 167, Type 302/304, hardest workable temper. 1. Finish: No. 4, bright, directional polish on exposed surfaces. E. Steel Sheets for Baked Enamel Finish: ASTM A 591, coating Class C, galvanized bonderized. F. Steel Sheets for Porcelain Enamel Finish: ASTM A 424, commercial quality, Type I. G. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 526, except ASTM A 527 for extensive forming; ASTM A 525, G90 zinc coating, chemical treatment. H. Aluminum: ASTM B 209/B 221 sheet, plate and extrusions, as indicated; alloy, temper and finish as determined by manufacturer except 0.40 mil natural anodized finish on exposed work unless another finish is indicated. 15429-4 I. Plastic Laminate: NEMA LD3, general purpose high pressure type, 0.050" thick, smooth (non textured) white unless another texture and color are indicated or selected by the Architect. J. Vitreous China: High quality, free from fire cracks, spots, blisters, pinholes and specks; glaze exposed surfaces, and test for crazing resistance in accordance with ASTM C 554. K. Synthetic Stone: High quality, free from defects, glaze on exposed surfaces, stain resistant. L. Fiberglass: ANSI Z124, smooth surfaced, with color selected by the Architect. 2.03 PLUMBING FITTINGS, TRIM AND ACCESSORIES: A. Water Outlets: At locations where water is supplied (by manual, automatic or remote control) provide commercial quality faucets, valves, or dispensing devices, of type and size indicated, and as required to operate as indicated. Include manual shutoff valves and connecting stem pipes to permit outlet servicing without shut-down of water supply piping systems. 1. Vacuum Breakers: Provide with flush valves where required by governing regulations, including locations where water outlets are equipped for hose attachment. B. P-Traps: Include removable P traps where drains are indicated for direct connection to drainage system. C. Fixture Bolt Caps: Provide manufacturer's standard exposed fixture bolt caps finished to match fixture finish. D. Escutcheons: Where fixture supplies and drains penetrate walls in exposed locations, provide chrome-plated sheet steel escutcheons with friction clips. E. Comply with additional fixture requirements contained in fixture schedule on the drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION: 15429-5 A. Examine roughing-in work of potable water and waste piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections prior to installing fixtures. Also examine floors and substrates, and conditions under which fixture work is to be accomplished. Correct any incorrect locations of piping, and other unsatisfactory conditions for installation of plumbing fixtures. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF PLUMBING FIXTURES: A. General: Install plumbing fixtures of types indicated where shown and at indicated heights; in accordance with fixture manufacturer's written instructions, roughing-in drawings, and with recognized industry practices. Ensure that plumbing fixtures comply with requirements and serve intended purposes. Comply with applicable requirements of National Standard Plumbing Code and North Carolina Building Code Volume II pertaining to installation of plumbing fixtures. B. Fasten plumbing fixtures securely to indicated supports or building structure; and ensure that fixtures are level and plumb. Secure plumbing supplies behind or within wall construction so as to be rigid, and not subject to pull or push movement. C. Protect installed fixtures from damage during remainder of construction period. D. Caulk with a silicone based white caulking material the joints between fixtures and the finished wall or floor surfaces. Caulking shall be neat and provide a moisture tight seal between fixture and the mounting surface. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: A. Upon completion of installation of plumbing fixtures and after units are water pressurized, test fixtures to demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. When possible, correct malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units and proceed with retesting. 15429-6 3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING: A. Clean plumbing fixtures, trim, and strainers of dirt and debris upon completion of installation. B. Adjust water pressure at faucets, shower valves, and flush valves to provide proper flow stream and specified gpm. C. Adjust or replace washers to prevent leaks at faucets and stops. 3.05 EXTRA STOCK: A. General: Furnish special wrenches and other devices necessary for servicing plumbing fixtures and trim to the Owner with receipt. Furnish one device for every 10 units. END OF SECTION 15429 15773-1 DIVISION 15H - HVAC SECTION 15773 - SPLIT SYSTEM HEAT PUMPS. 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK: A. Furnish and install a complete heat pump system to include but not limited to air handler, outdoor section, interconnecting piping and valves, auxiliary electric heaters, through the wall and controls. 1.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: A. Standard Products: Materials and equipment shall be standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacturing of such products, which are of a similar material, design and workmanship. The standard products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for two years prior to bid opening. The two year use shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. The two years experience must be satisfactorily completed by a product which has been sold or is offered for sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturer's catalogs, or brochures. B. Nameplates: Each major component of equipment shall have the manufacturer's name, address, type or style, model or serial number, and catalog number on a plate secured to the equipment. C. Equipment Guards: Belts, pulleys, chains, gears, couplings, projecting setscrews, keys, and other rotating parts so located that any person may come in close proximity thereto shall be completely enclosed or guarded. High-temperature equipment and piping so located as to endanger personnel or creates a fire hazard shall be guarded or covered with insulation of a type as specified. D. Verification of Dimensions: The contractor shall verify all dimensions in the field and shall advise the Engineer of any discrepancy before performing any work. 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Shop Drawings: Shop drawings shall be submitted and shall consist of a complete list of equipment and materials, including manufacturer's descriptive and 15773-2 technical literature; performance charts and curves; catalog cuts; and installation instructions. Shop drawings shall also contain complete wiring and schematic diagrams; and any other details required to demonstrate that the system has been coordinated and will properly function as a unit. Drawings shall show proposed layout and anchorage of equipment and appurtenances, and equipment relationship to other parts of the work including clearances for maintenance and operation. Refer to the "General Provisions" for the required number of copies. B. Spare Parts Data: After approval of the shop drawings and three months prior to the date of beneficial occupancy, the Contractor shall furnish spare parts data in triplicate. The data shall include a complete list of parts and supplies, with current unit prices and source of supply. C. Operating and Maintenance Instructions: 1. Operating instructions outlining the step-by-step procedures required for system start-up and operation shall be furnished. The instructions shall include the manufacturer's name, model number, service manual, parts lists, and brief description of all equipment and their basic operating features. 2. Maintenance instructions listing routine maintenance procedures, possible breakdowns and repairs shall be furnished. The instructions shall include diagrams for the system as installed. D. Performance Test Reports: Upon completion and testing of the installed system, test reports shall be submitted in booklet form showing all field tests performed to adjust each component and all field tests performed to provide compliance with the specified performance criteria. The report shall prove compliance with the specified performance criteria. The report shall include the information as required by paragraph ADJUSTING. BALANCING, CHARGING, AND TESTING. 1.04 DELIVERY AND STORAGE: A. Equipment placed in storage shall be stored with protection from the weather, humidity and temperature variations, dirt and dust, or other contaminants. 15773-3 1.05 ELECTRICAL WORK: A. Electrical motor driven equipment specified shall be provided complete with motors, motor starters, and controls. Electrical equipment and wiring shall be in accordance with DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL. Electrical characteristics shall be as indicated or specified. Motor starters shall be provided complete with thermal overload protection and other appurtenances necessary for the motor control indicated. Each motor shall be of sufficient size to drive the equipment at the specified capacity without exceeding the nameplate rating of the motor. Manual or automatic control and protective or signal devices required for the operation specified and any control wiring required for controls and devices specified, but not shown, shall be provided. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 AIR TO AIR HEAT PUMP: A. Heat pump shall be the split type consisting of a complete packaged outdoor unit and a complete packaged indoor unit with interconnecting piping. Outdoor unit shall be a factory assembled through the wall, electrically operated unit including compressors, air-cooled condenser/air-source evaporator, circulating fan and motor, and the necessary structural frame, housing, valves, suction line accumulator, piping, wiring, and controls. Indoor section shall include cooling/heating coil, blower, motor and controls, supplementary heating coil, and air filters. Each unit shall be provided with a factory operating charge of refrigerant and oil or a holding charge of refrigerant. Where units are shipped with refrigerant holding charge, the system shall be completely charged in the field. Indoor and outdoor section shall be tested, and rated in accordance with ARI 240. Refrigerant shall be R-410. B. Indoor Fan-Coil Section: 1. Supplementary electric heaters of the resistance type shall be provided integral with fan unit. Heaters shall be wired in compliance with UL 559 and controlled in one or more steps to provide sufficient additional heating capacity as required in excess of the compression and indoor fan 15773-4 heating capacity. Each heater assembly shall include power supply fusing, air flow switch, and heat limiters for thermal protection. 2. Filters shall be located to filter outside intake air and return air inside of the unit casing. Filters shall be Class 1 or Class 2 in accordance with UL Building Materials Directory requirements. Filters shall be 1 or 2"-inch thick. Filters shall be replaceable pleated throw away type in accordance with Fed. Spec. F-F-10 of size required to suit the application. C. Outdoor Condenser/Evaporator through the Wall Section: 1. Compressor shall be the hermetic type. Compressors shall be provided with vibration isolators. Each compressor shall be provided with high-low pressure safety cutoff, internal motor-winding temperature sensing protection device, and crankcase heater. 2.02 INSULATION: A. Factory Applied: 1. Refrigerant suction lines between the evaporator and each compressor shall be insulated with fiberglass or unicellular plastic foam. B. Field Applied: 1. Insulation shall be as specified in SECTION: 15250. 2.03 PIPING, VALVES, AND ACCESSORIES: A. Refrigerant Piping: Refrigerant piping, valves, fittings, and accessories shall conform to the requirements of ASHRAE 15 and ANSI B31.5, except as specified. B. Pipe and Tubing: 1. Copper tubing shall be soft annealed where bending is required and hard drawn where no bending is required. Soft annealed copper tubing shall not be used in sizes larger than 1-3/8 inches. Joints shall be brazed. 15773-5 C. Fittings: 1. Fittings for brazed joint shall be wrought-copper or forged-brass sweat fittings. Cast sweat-type fittings will not be allowed for brazed joints. D. Refrigerant-Stop Valves: 1. Valves shall be designed for use with the refrigerant used and shall have pressure ratings compatible with system working pressures encountered. Gate valves will not be acceptable. 2. Valves for copper shall be all brass, hand-wheel operated, diaphragm packless type globe or angle valves in sizes up to and including 5/8 inch. Valves over 5/8 inch shall be brass or bronze globe or angle type, wrench operated with ground-finish stems, packed especially for fluorocarbon refrigerant service, back-seated, and provided with seal caps. E. Check Valves: 1. Valves shall be steel or brass body, lift or swing type suitable for refrigerant liquid or gas service as required. F. Expansion Valves: 1. Valves shall be designed for use with the type of refrigerant used with a pressure rating suitable for pressure encountered. Valves shall be of the thermostatic and external superheat adjustment set at the factory for 10 degrees F. superheat. Power elements and valve size shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for the service intended. G. Moisture Indicator Sight Glasses: 1. Sight glasses shall have a protective cover and shall be provided in the liquid line preceding each expansion valve. Sight glass and moisture indicating element shall be removable. Moisture indicator shall have a reversible color indicator which has an easily distinguished color change. H. Accumulators: 15773-6 1. Accumulators shall be provided in the suction line to each compressor. I. Drain and Make-Up Water Piping: 1. Drain lines shall be provided for equipment as indicated and shall comply with the requirements of DIVISION 15. Drains shall be connected by means of an indirect waste. Clean-outs shall be provided where indicated or required. 2.04 PAINTING AND FINISHES: A. Factory Coating: Unless otherwise specified, equipment and component items, when fabricated from ferrous metal, shall be factory finished with the manufacturer's standard finish. Cut edges of galvanized surfaces where hot-dip galvanized sheet steel is used shall be coated with a zinc-rich coating conforming to Mil. Spec. DOD-P-1035. B. Field Painting: Painting required for surfaces not otherwise specified wand finish painting of items only primed at the factory are specified in painting section of these specifications. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. All work shall be installed as indicated and accordance with the manufacturer's diagrams and recommendations. B. Refrigeration Piping: Unless otherwise specified, pipe and fitting installation shall conform to requirements of ANSI B31.5. Pipe shall be cut accurately to measurement established at the job site and worked into place without springing or forcing. Cutting or other weakening of the building structure to facilitate piping installation will not be permitted without written approval. Pipes shall be cut square, shall have burrs removed by reaming, and shall be installed in a manner to permit free expansion and contraction without damage to joints or hangers. Filings, dust, or dirt shall be wiped from interior of pipe before connections are made. Changes in direction shall be made with fittings, except that bending of pipe 4 inches and smaller will be permitted, provided a pipe bender is used and wide-sweep bends are formed. The centerline radius of bends shall not be less than 6 15773-7 diameters of the pipe. Bent pipe showing kinks, wrinkles, or other malformations will not be accepted. All piping shall be installed with sufficient pitch to insure adequate oil drainage. Open ends of refrigerant lines or equipment shall be properly capped or plugged during installation to keep moisture, dirt, or other foreign material out of the system. C. Joints: 1. Joints in copper tubing and steel tubing shall be brazed with nitrogen purge. Surplus brazing material shall be removed at all joints in lines not insulated. D. Valves: 1. Valves in refrigerant lines shall be installed with stems vertical or horizontal. Stop valves shall be installed on each piece of equipment such as compressors, condensers, evaporators, receivers, and other similar items in multiple-unit installation or repair. Each valve, except check valves, shall be identified with a brass or aluminum tag not less than 1-3/8 inch in diameter, correctly stamped to explain the valve function, and with a number for identification. Tags shall be secured to the valve with 18-gage copper or brass wire. 3.02 CHARGING, AND TESTING: A. Testing: 1. The contractor shall submit his proposed testing program to the Owners Representative at least 2 weeks prior to the schedule test to assure agreement as to personnel and instrumentation required and scope of testing program. Tests shall be conducted in the presence of the Owners Representative who shall be given 2 days notice before any test is to be conducted. Water and electricity required for the tests will be furnished by the Owner. Any material, equipment, instruments, and personnel required for the test shall be provided by the Contractor. 2. Refrigerant Piping: After all components of the refrigerant system have been installed and the 15773-8 piping connected, the system shall be subjected to a pneumatic test. The pneumatic testing shall be done with dry nitrogen before any refrigerant pipe is covered. The high and low side of the refrigerant system shall be tested for the minimum refrigerant leak field test pressure specified in ASHRAE 15, for the refrigerant employed in the system. System shall be proved tight under test pressure by first checking each joint with soap solution and after charging with refrigerant the system should be checked with a halide torch or by electronic leak detection. To repair leaks, the joint shall be taken apart, thoroughly cleaned, and remade as a new joint. Joints repaired by caulking or remelting and adding more brazing material will not be acceptable. System will be proved tight and free of leaks by successfully completing the soap and detector tests and by allowing the leak-test pressure to remain on the system for 24 hours with no drop in pressure. Correction of 0.3 psi will be allowed for each degree change in the initial and final temperature of the surrounding air, plus for an increase and minus for a decrease. After the foregoing tests have been satisfactorily completed and the pressure relieved, the entire system shall be evacuated to an absolute pressure of 500 microns (0.02 inch of Hg). During evacuation of the system the ambient temperature shall be higher than 35 degrees F. The vacuum line shall be closed, and the system shall stand for 12 hours. After this period the increase in absolute pressure shall not exceed 100 microns (0.004 inch of Hg). During this test, pressures shall be recorded by a thermocouple-type, electronic-type, or a calibrated micron gage. Upon completion of the test, the vacuum shall be broken by charging the system with dry refrigerant for which the system is designed. 3. System Operation: Upon completion and prior to acceptance of the project, the Contractor shall subject the heat pump system to such tests to demonstrate specified air capacities and operating efficiency. Test shall be conducted by a qualified test engineer at such times as directed. Indicating instruments shall be read at half-hour intervals, unless otherwise directed. Tests shall cover a period of not less than 1 day for heating and cooling seasons for each system tested; and 15773-9 test reports shall include the following applicable specific information together with conclusions as to the adequacy of the system. Date and time with outside weather conditions. Load on the system. Air Quantity and conditions at direct expansion cooling coils. Capacity loading conditions of the compressor. Condensing temperature and pressure. Suction temperature and pressure. Running current of all motors. The actual on-site setting of all operating and safety controls. The refrigerant used in the system. The above information shall be taken at least three different times at outside dry-bulb temperatures that are at least 5 degrees F. apart. B. Refrigerant and Oil Charging: 1. Refrigerant: Upon completion of the evacuation test, the vacuum shall be broken by completely charging with dry refrigerant for which the system is designed and shall be subjected to the performance tests and halide torch or electronic leak detector tests specified. Upon satisfactory completion of the test, any refrigerant that has been lost from the system shall be replaced. The loss of refrigerant during the first season of operation shall be guaranteed not to exceed 10 percent of the full charge of the system, and all refrigerant required above this amount shall be furnished if the loss if the result of defective equipment or installation. END OF SECTION 15773 15841H-1 DIVISION 15841H - HVAC SECTION 15841H - LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Extent of low pressure ductwork is indicated on drawings and in schedules, and by requirements of this section. Low pressure ductwork is hereby defined as ductwork subjected to velocities of 2500 fpm or less, and operating pressure of 2" w.g. or less, positive and negative. B. Types of low pressure ductwork required for project include the following: 1. Dual temperature supply and return air systems. 2. Fresh air supply systems. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Installer: A firm with at least 3 years of successful installation experience on projects with low pressure ductwork systems. B.SMACNA Standards: Comply with SMACNA "Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards" for fabrication and installation of low pressure ductwork. C.ASHRAE Standards: Comply with ASHRAE Handbook and Product Directory, 1988 Equipment Volume, Chapter 1 "Duct Construction", for fabrication and installation of low pressure ductwork. D.NFPA Compliance: Comply with ANSI/NFPA 90A "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems" and ANSI/NFPA 90B "Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems." 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications on manufactured products and factory-fabricated ductwork, used for work of this section. Refer to the "General Requirements" for the number of copies required. B. Record Drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed ductwork, duct accessories, and outlets and inlets; in accordance with requirements of Division 1. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: 15841H-2 A. Protect shop fabricated and factory fabricated ductwork, accessories and purchased products from damage during shipping, storage and handling. Prevent end damage and prevent dirt and moisture from entering ducts and fittings. B. Where possible, store ductwork inside and protect from weather. Where necessary to store outside, store above grade and enclose with waterproof wrapping. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01GENERAL MATERIALS A. Exposed Ductwork Materials: Where ductwork is indicated to be exposed to view in occupied spaces, provide materials which are free from visual imperfections including pitting, seam marks, roller marks, oil canning, stains and discolorations, and other imperfections, including those which would impair painting. B. Sheet Metal: Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate ductwork from galvanized sheet steel complying with ANSI/ASTM A 527, lock forming quality, with ANSI/ASTM A 525, G90 zinc coating; mill phosphatized for exposed locations. 2.02 DUCTWORK INSULATION MATERIALS: A. See SECTION 15251 for ductwork insulation for main system ductwork. B. Ductwork Insulation Accessories: Provide staples, bands, wires, tape, anchors, corner angles and similar accessories as recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated. C. Ductwork Insulation Compounds: Provide cements, adhesives, coatings, sealers, protective finishes and similar compounds as recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated. 2.02 MISCELLANEOUS DUCTWORK MATERIALS: A. General: Provide miscellaneous materials and products of types and sizes indicated and, where not otherwise indicated, provide type and size required to comply with ductwork system requirements including proper connection of ductwork and equipment. B. Duct Sealant: Non hardening, non migrating mastic or liquid elastic sealant (type applicable for fabrication/installation detail) as compounded and 15841H-3 recommended by manufacturer specifically for sealing joints and seams in ductwork. C. Duct Cement: Non hardening migrating mastic or liquid neoprene based cement (type applicable for fabrication/installation detail) as compounded and recommended by manufacturer specifically for cementing fitting components, or longitudinal seams in ductwork. D. Ductwork Support Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hot dipped galvanized steel fasteners, anchors, rods, straps, trim and angles for support of ductwork. 2.03 FABRICATION: A. Fabricate ductwork in 4, 8, 10 or 12-foot lengths, unless otherwise indicated or required to complete runs. Pre assemble work in shop to greatest extent possible, so as to minimize field assembly of systems. Disassemble systems only to extent necessary for shipping and handling. Match mark sections for reassembly and coordinated installation. B. Shop fabricate ductwork of gages and reinforcement complying with SMACNA "Low Pressure Duct Standards - Latest Edition." C. Fabricate ductwork of gages and reinforcement complying with ASHRAE Handbook and Product Directory, 1979 Equipment Volume, Chapter 1, "Duct Construction." D. Fabricate duct fittings to match adjoining ducts, and to comply with duct requirements as applicable to fittings. Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate elbows with centerline radius equal to associated duct width; and fabricate to include turning vanes in elbows where shorter radius is necessary. Limit angular tapers to 30o for contracting tapers and 20o for expanding tapers. E. Fabricate ductwork with accessories installed during fabrication to the greatest extent possible. F. Fabricate ductwork with duct liner in each section of duct where indicated. Laminate liner to internal surfaces of duct in accordance with instructions by manufacturers of lining and adhesive, and fasten with mechanical fasteners. 2.04 FACTORY-FABRICATED DUCTWORK: A. General: At installer's option, provide factory fabricated duct and fittings, in lieu of shop fabricated duct and fittings. B. Material: Galvanized sheet steel complying with ANSI/ASTM A 15841H-4 527, lock forming quality, with ANSI/ASTM A 525, G90 zinc coating, mill phosphatized. C. Gage: 28 ga. minimum for round and oval ducts and fittings, 4" through 24" diameter. D. Elbows: One piece construction for 90o and 45o elbows 14" and smaller. Provide multiple gore construction for larger diameters with standing seam circumferential joint. E. Divided Flow Fittings: 90o tees, constructed with saddle tap spot welded and bonded to duct fitting body. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK: A. General: Assemble and install ductwork in accordance with recognized industry practices which will achieve air tight (5% leakage) and noiseless (no objectionable noise) systems, capable of performing each indicated service. Install each run with minimum of joints. Align ductwork accurately at connections, within 1/8" misalignment tolerance and with internal surfaces smooth. Support ducts rigidly with suitable ties, braces, hangers and anchors of type which will hold ducts true to shape and to prevent buckling. B. Seal ductwork, after installation, to seal class recommended, and method prescribed in SMACNA "Low Pressure Duct Standards - Latest Edition." C. Complete fabrication of work at project as necessary to match shop fabricated work and accommodates installation requirements. D. Locate ductwork runs, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally and avoid diagonal runs wherever possible. Locate runs as indicated by diagrams, details and notations or, if not otherwise indicated, run ductwork in shortest route which does not obstruct useable space or block access for servicing building and its equipment. Hold ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent-enclosure elements of building. Limit clearance to 1/2" where furring is shown for enclosure or concealment of ducts, but allow for insulation thickness, if any. Where possible, locate insulated ductwork for 1" clearance outside of insulation. Wherever possible in finished and occupied spaces, conceal ductwork from view, by locating in mechanical shafts, hollow wall construction or above suspended ceilings. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions, except as specifically shown. Coordinate layout with suspended 15841H-5 ceiling and lighting layouts and similar finished work. E. Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior walls, conceal space between construction opening and duct or duct plus insulation with sheet metal flanges of same gage as duct. Overlap opening on 4 sides by at least 1-1/2". F. Coordinate duct installations with installation of accessories, dampers, coil frames, equipment, controls and other associated work of ductwork system. G. Support ductwork in manner complying with SMACNA "Low Pressure Duct Standards - Latest Edition" hangers and supports section. 3.02 DUCTWORK SYSTEM INSULATION: A. Dual Temperature Ductwork: See SECTION 15H 3.03 CLEANING AND PROTECTION: A. Clean ductwork internally, unit by unit as it is installed, of dust and debris. Clean external surfaces of foreign substances which might cause corrosive deterioration of metal or, where ductwork is to be painted, might interfere with painting or cause paint deterioration. B. Strip protective paper from stainless ductwork surfaces, and repair finish wherever it has been damaged. C. Temporary Closure: At ends of ducts which are not connected to equipment or air distribution devices at time of ductwork installation, provide temporary closure of polyethylene film or other covering which will prevent entrance of dust and debris until time connections are to be completed. 3.04 BALANCING: A. Refer to Division-15 section "Test, Adjust and Balance" for air distribution balancing of low pressure ductwork; not work of this section. Seal any leaks in ductwork that became apparent in balancing process. END OF SECTION 15841H 15932-1 DIVISION 15H - HVAC SECTION 15932 - AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Extent of air outlets and inlets work is indicated by drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this section. B. Types of air outlets and inlets required for project include the following: 1. Ceiling supply air diffusers. 2. Ceiling return air grilles C. Refer to other Division-15 sections for ductwork and duct accessories required in conjunction with air outlets and inlets; not work of this section. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of air outlets and inlets of types and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use for not less than 5 years. B. Codes and Standards: 1. ARI Compliance: Test and rate air outlets and inlets in accordance with ARI 650 "Standard Air Outlets and Inlets". 2. ASHRAE Compliance: Test and rate air outlets and inlets in accordance with ASHRAE 70 "Method of Testing for Rating the Air Flow Performance of Outlets and Inlets". 3. ADC Compliance: Test and rate air outlets and inlets in certified laboratories under requirements of ADC 1062 "Certification, Rating and Test Manual". 4. ADC Seal: Provide air outlets and inlets bearing ADC Certified Rating Seal. 5. AMCA Compliance: Test and rate louvers in accordance with AMCA 500 "Test Method of Louvers, 15932-2 Dampers and Shutters". 6. AMCA Seal: Provide louvers bearing AMCA Certified Rating Seal. 7. NFPA Compliance: Install air outlets and inlets in accordance with NFPA 90A "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems". 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for air outlets and inlets including the following: 1. Schedule of air outlets and inlets indicating drawing designation, room location, number furnished, model number, size, and accessories furnished. 2. Data sheet for each type of air outlet and inlet, and accessory furnished; indicating construction, finish, and mounting details. 3. Performance data for each type of air outlet and inlet furnished, including aspiration ability, temperature and velocity traverses, throw and drop, and noise criteria ratings. Indicate selections on data. B. Samples: Submit 3 samples of each type of finish furnished. C. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data, including cleaning instructions for finishes, and spare parts lists. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in maintenance manuals; in accordance with requirements of Division 1. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. Deliver air outlets and inlets wrapped in factory-fabricated fiberboard type containers. Identify on outside of container type of outlet or inlet and location to be installed. Avoid crushing or bending and prevent dirt and debris from entering and settling in devices. B. Store air outlets and inlets in original cartons and 15932-3 protect from weather and construction work traffic. Where possible, store indoors; when necessary to store outdoors, store above grade and enclose with waterproof wrapping. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CEILING AIR DIFFUSERS: A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard ceiling air diffusers where shown; of size, shape, capacity and type indicated; constructed of materials and components as indicated, and as required for complete installation. B. Performance: Provide ceiling air diffusers that have, as minimum, temperature and velocity traverses, throw and drop, and noise criteria ratings for each size device as listed in manufacturer's current data. C. Ceiling Compatibility: Provide diffusers with border styles that are compatible with adjacent ceiling systems, and that are specifically manufactured to fit into ceiling module with accurate fit and adequate support. Refer to general construction drawings and specifications for types of ceiling systems which will contain each type of ceiling air diffuser. D. Types: Provide ceiling diffusers of louver face type, and with accessories and finishes to match adjoining colors. The following requirements shall apply: 1. Diffuser Faces: a. Supply: Square or rectangular housing suitable for ceiling finish. Furnish with adjustable air pattern deflector and damper. b. Returns: Sight proof grille with square, or rectangular housing fixed air pattern suitable for ceiling finish. 2. Diffuser Patterns: a. 4 Way: Fixed louver for 4 direction air flow, in accordance with schedule indicated on drawings. 3. Diffuser Dampers: 15932-4 a. Opposed Blade: Adjustable opposed blade damper assembly, operated from face of diffuser. 4. Diffuser Finishes: b. White Enamel: Semi-gloss white enamel prime finish. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION: A. Examine areas and conditions under which air outlets and inlets are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION: A. General: Install air outlets and inlets in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and in accordance with recognized industry practices to insure that products serve intended functions. B. Coordinate with other work, including ductwork and duct accessories, as necessary to interface installation of air outlets and inlets with other work. C. Locate ceiling air diffusers, registers, and grilles, as indicated on general construction "Reflected Ceiling Plans". Unless otherwise indicated, locate units in center of acoustical ceiling modules. END OF SECTION 15932 16010-1 DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 16010 - GENERAL PROVISIONS OF THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCE TO OTHER SECTIONS: A. The Instructions to Bidders, Supplementary and General Conditions, Division 1: General Requirements, Contract Drawings and these specifications constitute the necessary documents for this part of the work. It should be understood that the Electrical Plans are diagrammatic in character, and not all fittings, offsets, boxes, etc are shown but shall be furnished and installed consistent with construction of the building. Do not scale electrical drawings. Refer to the Architectural Drawings for the exact dimensions of the building. All information, work descriptions, etc., included hereinafter in Section 16010 shall be applicable and considered a part of all Sections in Division 16 as it may apply. It shall be the Contractors responsibility to call to the attention of the Engineer any omissions or discrepancies on the drawings or specifications before proceeding with the work in question. B. The Contractor shall have a licensed electrician on the job during periods of construction that require the roughing in of electrical equipment and materials. He shall have the responsibility to arrange for and coordinate installation of all openings, sleeves, conduit stub-ups, floor boxes and the like required for a complete installation for the Electrical System. Failure to make these arrangements shall make the Contractor responsible for all appurtenances that may be subsequently required for a proper installation. 1.02 SUBSTITUTIONS: A. Not with standing any reference in the specifications to any article, device, product, material, fixture form of type of construction by name, make or catalogue number, such reference shall be interpreted as establishing a standard of quality and shall not be construed as limiting competition and the Contractor in such case, may at his option, use any article, device, product, material, fixture, form or type of construction. Comply with the procedure for submitting request for substitutions in the Instructions to Bidders. 16010-2 1.03 EXAMINATION OF SITE: A. Before submitting a proposal on this work, this Contractor shall examine the site, familiarize himself with all existing conditions, and obtains such information as is required to enable him to do the work properly, interpret the plans, estimate costs and carry out measurements in the field. The Contractor's failure to comply with the above requirements will not relieve him of the responsibility for any errors which might have been avoided by his compliance therewith. 1.04 INSTRUCTIONS TO MAINTENANCE PERSONNEL: A. Before final acceptance of this work, the Contractor shall instruct a designated representative of the Owners in the entire operation of the system. This shall include instructions on proper maintenance of all equipment. The Contractor shall have a representative present for the use of the building to assist the Owner's personnel in securing proper operation of the system. 1.05 PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS: A. The Contractor shall file all drawings and obtain all permits. All fees for permits and/or inspection shall be paid by the Contractor. The Contractor shall coordinate with the local electrical inspector and be present for all required inspections. The Contractor shall present three copies of the Final Inspection Certificate signed by the Electrical Inspector to the Architect before final acceptance of the work. 1.06 CODES AND STANDARDS: A. All electrical work shall conform to the rules and regulations of the latest edition of the following publications listed below. Should drawing or specifications and the Code conflict the Code shall take precedence. 1. Third Party Agencies Accredited by the NCBCC to Label Electrical and Mechanical Equipment as of August 1, 1991. 2. Electrical Testing Laboratories, Standards (ETL) 3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association Standards (NEMA) 4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 16010-3 National Electrical Code-Latest Edition (NEC) 5. North Carolina Building Code-Latest Edition including Addendum. 6. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 7. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) National Fire Alarm Code Latest Edition (NFPA 72) 8. Others as may be referenced in each individual section. 1.07 REFERENCE TO MATERIALS BY NAME: A. Products are generally specified by ASTM or other reference standard and/or by manufacturer's name and model number or trade name. When specified only by reference standard, the Contractor may select any product meeting this standard by any manufacturer with prior approval of the builder/developer. When several products or manufacturers are specified as being equally acceptable, the Contractor has the option of using any product and manufacturer combination listed. 1.08 SUBMISSION OF MATERIALS LISTS: A. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a complete list of materials which he proposes to use in this project, including cuts or drawings of all major equipment, five (5) copies of this will, be required. The Contractor shall submit data and shop drawings on the following items: electrical wire, panelboards/switchboards, conduit/wireway and fittings, and light fixtures. Three (3) copies of all operating manuals, maintenance manuals, and spare parts list for all equipment shall be turned over to the Architect/Engineer at the completion of the job. 1.09 PROGRESS: A. The Electrical work must be installed as fast as the progress of the other trades will permit and in accordance with the project schedule. 1.10 CONTIGUOUS WORK: A. If any part of this Contractor's work is dependent for its proper execution or for its subsequent efficiency or appearance on the character or condition of 16010-4 contiguous work not executed by him, the Contractor shall examine and measure such contiguous work and report to the Architect and Engineer in writing any imperfection therein, or conditions that render it unsuitable for the reception of this work. In case the Contractor proceeds without making such written report, he shall be held to have accepted such work and the existing condition, and he shall be responsible for any defects in his work consequent thereon and will not be relieved of the obligation of any guarantee because of such imperfection or condition. 1.11 PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT: A. The Contractor shall be responsible for all work damaged by him in executing his contract. All work damaged shall be replaced by him and placed in perfect working condition without extra cost. Any construction work damaged shall be made good. The Contractor shall at all times be responsible for any damaged equipment or work in conjunction with executing his contract. All fixtures and fittings shall be adequately protected before and after installation. 1.12 COOPERATION WITH OTHER TRADES: A. This Contractor shall make every effort to cooperate at all times, with the other contractors on this project. B. In many sections of the work, there will be areas where conflicts may arise in the location of piping and this Contractor shall confer with the other Contractors to avoid the conflicts where possible. 1.13 PLACING IN SERVICE: A. Upon completion of the entire installation, the complete system and equipment shall be tested in the presence of the owner’s representative to assure the entire system is free of grounds, shorts or open circuits. The Contractor shall furnish and install all fuses in fusible switches or switchboards and shall furnish proper overload protection for motor starters where necessary. Overload protection shall be in accordance with the starter manufacturer’s data and sized for the motor horsepower to be protected. 1.14 GUARANTEE: A. Refer to the General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions of the Contract. 16010-5 1.15 DRAWINGS: A. The contractor shall perform all work in accordance with the contract drawings and these specifications. The contractor shall notify the Architect/Engineer of any conflict in the drawings and the specifications that would affect his bid for the work during the bidding period. 1.16 SCOPE OF WORK: A. The work to be done under this contract shall consist of and include the furnishing of all labor, material, equipment and services necessary for and incidental to the proper completion of all power and lighting work as shown on the drawings, and hereinafter specified, except work or material specified as being furnished and or performed by others. All work shall be concealed behind wall, floor or ceiling surfaces unless approved in advance by the architect. Exposed electrical work is not permitted. 1.17 "AS-BUILT" DRAWINGS A. This Contractor shall retain one (1) set of drawings and specifications for the express purpose of recording accurately and all changes or modifications made involving relocation for change of power or lighting layouts. Upon completion of the project, this set of drawings shall be delivered to the Architect or Engineer to be used in the preparation of the "as-built" drawings. END OF SECTION 16010 16110-1 DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 16110 - RACEWAYS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA standards pertaining to raceways. B. UL Compliance and Labeling: Comply with applicable provisions of UL safety standards pertaining to electrical raceway systems; and provide products and components which have been UL-listed and labeled. C. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to construction and installation of raceway systems. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING: A. General: Provide metal conduit, tubing and fittings of types, grades, sizes and weights (wall thicknesses) for each service indicated. Where types and grades are not indicated, provide proper selection from the following materials and approved by Designer to fulfill wiring requirements, and comply with applicable portions of NEC for raceways. B. Flexible Metal Conduit: FS WW-C-566, of the following type: 1. Type 2: Zinc-coated steel. C. Flexible Metal Conduit Fittings: FS W-F-406, Type 1, Class 1, and Style A. D. Metal Clad Cable(Type MC): FS WW-C-566, of the following type: 1. Type 2: Zinc-coated steel. E. Metal Clad Conduit Fittings: FS W-F-406, Type 1, Class 1, and Style A. F. Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit: Provide liquid-tight flexible metal conduit; construct of single strip, flexible, continuous, interlocked, and 16110-2 double-wrapped steel; galvanized inside and outside; coat with liquid-tight jacket of flexible polyvinyl chloride (PVC). G. Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit Fittings: FS W-F-406, Type 1, Class 3, Style G. 2.02 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND DUCTS:(Use allowed only below grade or exposed on building exterior) A. General: Provide nonmetallic conduit, ducts and fittings of types, sizes and weights (wall thicknesses) for each service indicated. Where types and grades are not indicated, provide proper selection determined by the Contractor to fulfill wiring requirements, and comply with applicable provisions of NEC for raceways. B. Electrical Plastic Conduit (EPC): NEMA Stds Pub No. TC 2, Type 3, Schedule 40 PVC, for direct burial. C. PVC Conduit and Tubing Fittings: NEMA Stds Pub No. TC 3, match to conduit/tubing type and material. D. Conduit, Tubing, and Duct Accessories: Provide conduit, tubing and duct accessories of types, sizes, and materials, complying with manufacturer's published product information, which mate and match conduit and tubing. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. Install branch circuit and feeders in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions, and applicable requirements of NEC and NECA's "Standard of Installation." B. Coordinate with other work including metal and concrete deck work, as necessary to interface installation of electrical raceways and components with other work. C. Level and square raceway runs, and install at proper elevations/heights. Install parallel to, or at right angles to beams, walls, and floors of buildings. D. Complete installation of electrical raceways before starting installation of cables/wires within raceways. E. Raceways run external to the building foundation(with 16110-3 the exception of branch circuit raceways) shall be encased with a minimum of 3" of concrete on all sides. Use Schedule 40 PVC raceway material approved by the NEC for concrete encasement and maintain a minimum cover of 18" for raceway carrying 600V or less. Minimum raceway size shall be 1". F. Install flexible conduit for motor connections, and for other electrical equipment connections where subject to movement and vibration. G. Install liquid tight flexible conduit for connection of motors and for other electrical equipment where subject to movement and vibration and also subjected to one or more of the following conditions: 1. Exterior location. 2. Moist or humid atmosphere where condensate can be expected to accumulate. 3. Corrosive atmosphere. 4. Subjected to water spray. 5. Subjected to dripping oil, grease, or water. 6. Wherever possible, install horizontal raceway runs above water piping. H. Minimum size of raceways shall be 1/2" trade size. I. Branch circuit raceways run underground external to building foundation walls shall be run in raceways installed in accordance with the NEC, and shall be of a type approved by the NEC as "suitable for direct burial." Minimum raceway size shall be 1 inch. J. All underground raceways shall be identified by underground line marking tape located directly above the raceway at 6 to 8 inches below finished grade. Tape shall be permanent, bright-colored, continuous printed, plastic tape compounded for direct burial not less than 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick. Printed legend shall be indicative of general type of underground line below. K. Where underground raceways are required to turn up into cabinets, equipment, etc., and on to poles, the elbow required and the stub-up out of the slab or earth shall be of rigid steel. L. The race way system shall not be relied on for grounding continuity. See Section Grounding for clarification. 16110-4 M. The use of "LB's" shall be limited where possible. Where necessary to use "LB's" sized above 2 inches, mogul units shall be installed. N. Excavation and backfill shall conform to "Division 2" of the specifications except heavy-duty, hydraulic-operated compaction equipment shall not be used. O. Trenches should be cut neatly and uniformly, sloping uniformly to required pitch. END OF SECTION 16110 16120-1 DIVISION 16 -ELECTRICAL SECTION 16120 - WIRES AND CABLES(600V AND BELOW) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Extent of electrical wire and cable work is indicated by drawings and schedules. B. Types of electrical wire, cable, and connectors specified in this section include the following: 1. Copper conductors. 2. Fixture wires. 3. Tap type connectors. 4. Split-bolt connectors. 5. Wirenut connectors. C. Applications of electrical wire, cable, and connectors required for project are as follows: 1. For power distribution circuits. 2. For lighting circuits. 3. For appliance, equipment, and branch circuits. 4. For motor-branch circuits. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of electrical wire and cable products of types and ratings required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. Installer's Qualifications: Qualified with at least 3 years of successful installation experience on projects with electrical wiring work similar to that required for project. C. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC requirements as applicable to construction, installation and color coding of electrical wire, cable and connectors. D. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of UL Std 44, "Rubber-Insulated Wire and Cables", Std 83, "Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables", Std 486A, "Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductors", and Std 493, "Thermoplastic-Insulated Underground Feeder and Branch Circuit Cables." 16120-2 E. Labels: Provide wiring/cabling and connector products which are listed and labeled by Third Party Agencies Accredited by the NCBCC to Label Electrical and Mechanical Equipment. F. NEMA/ICEA Compliance: Comply with NEMA/ICEA Std Pub/No.'s WC 5, "Thermoplastic Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy", and WC-30, "Color Coding of Wires and Cables", pertaining to electrical power type wires and cables. G. IEEE Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of IEEE Stds 82, "Test Procedures for Impulse Voltage Tests on Insulated Conductors", and Std 241, "IEEE Recommended Practice for Electric Power Systems in Commercial Buildings" pertaining to wiring systems. H. ASTM Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of ASTM B1, 2, 3, 8 and D-753. Provide copper conductors with conductivity of not less than 98% at 20oC (68oF). 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Certification: Submit two weeks prior to final inspection certification that installed material is in accordance with specifications and has been tested by meggar to be free from short circuits and grounds. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. Deliver wire and cable properly packaged in factory fabricated type containers, or wound on NEMA specified type wire and cable reels. B. Store wire and cable in clean dry space in original containers. Protect products from weather, damaging fumes, construction debris and traffic. C. Handle wire and cable carefully to avoid abrading, puncturing and tearing wire and cable insulation and sheathing. Ensure that dielectric resistance integrity of wires/cables is maintained. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 WIRE, CABLE AND CONNECTORS: A. General: Provide electrical wires, cables, and 16120-3 connectors of manufacturer's standard materials, as indicated by published product information; designed and constructed as recommended by manufacturer, for a complete installation, and for application indicated. Provide copper conductors with conductivity of not less than 98% at 20oC (68oF). 1. Color code all conductors in conformance with color schedule included with this section. Conductors No. 6 AWG and smaller shall be factory color coded. 2. Conductors sizes No. 8 AWG and larger shall be stranded wire, sizes No. 10 AWG and smaller shall be solid. Minimum wire size shall be No. 14 AWG. Maximum conductor size shall be 500 MCM. 3. Conductors for branch circuits shall be sized to prevent a voltage drop exceeding three percent (3%) at the farthest outlet of power, heating and lighting loads, or any combination of such loads. The maximum total voltage drop on both feeders and branch circuits to the farthest outlet shall not exceed five percent (5%). 4. Fire alarm and control wiring shall be stranded. Minimum wire size shall be #14 AWG. B. Building Wires: Provide wiring of sizes, ampacity ratings, and materials for applications and services indicated. Where not indicated, provide proper wire selection to comply with project's installation requirements, NEC and NEMA standards. Select from the following UL types, those wires with construction features which fulfill project requirements: 1. Type THWN/THHN: For dry and wet locations; max operating temperature 75oC (167oF). Insulation flame-retardant moisture and heat resistant, thermoplastic; outer covering nylon jacket; conductor annealed copper. C. Connectors/Splices: 1. General: Provide UL type factory fabricated, metal connectors of sizes, ampacity ratings, materials, types and classes for applications and for services indicated. Where not indicated, provide proper selection to comply with project's 16120-4 installation requirements, NEC and NEMA standards. Select from the following, those types, classes, kinds and styles of connectors to fulfill project requirements: a. Type: Pressure Crimp Threaded b. Class: Insulated. c. Kind: Copper (for Cu to Cu connection). d. Style: Elbow connection. Combined "T" and straight connection "T" connection Split-bolt parallel connection Tap connection Wirenut connection 2. Branch Circuit (No. 10 AWG and Smaller): a. Provide solder less screw on, pressure cable type, 600V, 105oC, with integral insulation, approved for copper conductor, and capable of reuse. b. Integral insulation skirt shall completely cover stripped wires. 3. Feeder Circuits: a. Provide indent connectors, hex screw or bolt clamp type. Fabricate of high conductivity and low corrosion material. b. Connectors for cable size 250 MCM and larger shall have not less than two clamping elements or compression indents. c. Insulate splices with material NEC approved for particular use, location, voltage, and temperature. d. Plastic electric insulating tape shall be flame-retardant, cold and weather resistant. 4. Cable Support: Install cable support for all vertical feeders. Provide split wedge type which firmly clamps each individual cable and tightens 16120-5 due to cable weight. 5. Seal cable and wire entering building from underground between wire and conduit, where cable exits conduit, with non hardening sealing compound. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF WIRES AND CABLES: A. General: Install electrical cables, wires, ground conductors, and wiring connectors as indicated, in compliance with applicable requirements of NEC, NEMA, UL, and NECA's "Standard of Installation", and in accordance with recognized industry practices. 1. Unless indicated otherwise, install all wiring in rigid metal conduit, electric metallic tubing, or in flexible conduit. 2. Install green insulated, properly sized grounding conductors in all raceways with phase conductors. B. Coordinate wire/cable installation work including electrical raceway and equipment installation work, as necessary to properly interface installation of wires/cables with other work. 1. Keep conductor splices to minimum. Splice wires/cables only in outlet boxes, junction boxes, gutters, pull boxes, manholes or hand holes. Provide conductor identification within each enclosure where a tap splice or termination is made. 2. Install splices and taps which have mechanical strength and insulation rating equivalent or better than conductor. 3. Install splice and tap connectors which possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than conductors being spliced. 4. Use splice and tap connectors which are compatible with conductor material. 5. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with manufacturer's published torque tightening values. 16120-6 Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Std 486A and B. 6. Joints in solid conductors shall be spliced using Ideal "wirenuts", 3M Company "Scotchlock" or T&B "Piggy" connectors in junction boxes, outlet boxes and lighting fixtures. 7. "Sta-kon" or other permanent type crimp connectors shall not be used for branch circuit connections. 8. Joints in stranded conductors shall be spliced by approved mechanical connectors and gum rubber tape or friction tape. Solderless mechanical connectors for splices and taps, provided with U/L-approved insulating covers, may be used instead of mechanical connectors plus tape. 9. Conductors in all cases shall be continuous from outlet to outlet and no splicing shall be made except within outlet or junction boxes, troughs and gutters. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: A. Prior to energization of circuitry, check installed wires and cables with megohm meter to determine insulation resistance levels to ensure requirements are fulfilled. B. Prior to energization, test wires and cables for electrical continuity and for short circuits. Prepare certification that wiring and cabling complies with requirements of specification. C. Subsequent to wire and cable hook ups, energize circuitry and demonstrate functioning in accordance with requirements. Where necessary, correct malfunctioning units, and then retest to demonstrate compliance. 3.03 COLOR CODING SCHEDULE: A. Provide all secondary service, feeders and branch circuits with color coding in conformance with the following: 208/120 Volt Phase 240/120 Volt 16120-7 N/A A Black N/A B Red N/A C N/A N/A Neutral White N/A Ground Green B. Provide all No. 12 and No. 10 branch circuit conductors and neutrals with solid color insulation/covering. END OF SECTION 16120 16135-1 DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 16135 - ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to construction and installation of electrical wiring boxes and fittings. B. UL Compliance: Comply with UL Std No.'s 50, 514-series and 886. Provide electrical boxes and fittings which are UL-listed and labeled. C. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA Stds/Pub No.'s OS1, OS2 and Pub 250. D. Federal Specification Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of FS W-C-586, "Electrical Cast Metal Conduit Outlet Boxes, Bodies and Entrance Caps". PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FABRICATED MATERIALS: A. Outlet Boxes: Provide nonmetallic outlet wiring boxes, of shapes, cubic inch capacities, and sizes, including box depths as indicated, suitable for installation at respective locations. Construct outlet boxes with mounting holes, and with cable and conduit-size knockout openings in bottom and sides. 1. Outlet Box Accessories: Provide outlet box accessories as required for each installation, including box supports, mounting ears and brackets, wallboard hangers, box extension rings, fixture studs, cable clamps and metal straps for supporting outlet boxes, which are compatible with outlet boxes being used to fulfill installation requirements for individual wiring situations. Choice of accessories is Installer's code-compliance option. B. Raintight Outlet Boxes: Provide corrosion-resistant cast-metal raintight outlet wiring boxes, of types, shapes and sizes, including depth of boxes, with threaded conduit holes for fastening electrical conduit, cast-metal face plates with spring-hinged 16135-2 watertight caps suitably configured for each application, including face plate gaskets and corrosion-resistant plugs and fasteners. C. Junction and Pull Boxes: Provide galvanized code-gage sheet steel junction and pull boxes, with screw-on covers; of types, shapes and sizes, to suit each respective location and installation; with welded seams and equipped with stainless steel nuts, bolts, screws and washers. D. Bushings, Knockout Closures and Locknuts: Provide corrosion-resistant box knockout closures, conduit locknuts and malleable iron conduit bushings, offset connectors, of types and sizes, to suit respective installation requirements and applications. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. Install electrical boxes and fittings as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and NECA's "Standard of Installation", and in accordance with recognized industry practices to fulfill project requirements. B. Coordinate installation of electrical boxes and fittings with wire/cable, wiring devices, and raceway installation work. C. Provide weathertight outlets for interior and exterior locations exposed to weather or moisture. D. Install electrical boxes in those locations which ensure ready accessibility to enclosed electrical wiring. E. Do not install aluminum products in concrete. F. Position recessed outlet boxes accurately to allow for surface finish thickness. G. Set flush boxes level and even with finish surface. H. Fasten electrical boxes firmly and rigidly to substrates or structural surfaces to which attached, or solidly embed electrical boxes in concrete or masonry. I. Provide electrical connections for installed boxes. 16135-3 J. Ground electrical boxes properly upon completion of installation work and demonstrate compliance with requirements. END OF SECTION 16135 16143-1 DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 16143 - WIRING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to installation and wiring of electrical wiring devices. B. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirement of UL 20, 486A, 498 and 943 pertaining to installation of wiring devices. Provide wiring devices which are UL-listed and labeled. C. IEEE Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of IEEE Std 241, "Recommended Practice for Electric Power Systems in Commercial Buildings", pertaining to electrical wiring systems. D. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of NEMA Stds Pub/No. WD 1, "General-Purpose Wiring Devices", WD 2, "Semiconductor Dimmers for Incandescent Lamps", and WD 5, "Specific-Purpose Wiring Devices". PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 WIRING DEVICES: A. General: Provide factory fabricated wiring devices, in types, colors, and electrical ratings for applications indicated and which comply with NEMA Stds Pub/No. WDI. Provide white color devices and white phenolic wallplates in finished areas except as otherwise indicated; color selection to be verified by Contractor with Architect. B. Receptacles: 1. Heavy Duty Duplex: Provide heavy-duty duplex receptacles, 2-pole, 3-wire, grounding, 15 or 20-amperes, 125-volts, with metal plaster ears, design for side wiring with four binding screws and provision for back wiring from eight separate metal wiring clamps, with spring loaded, screw activated pressure plate, with NEMA Standard No. WDI.1019868 and shall be "approved" third party listed unless otherwise indicated. Receptacles shall be specification grade, mounted vertically. 16143-2 Receptacles mounted over counters, back-splashes, etc., shall be mounted horizontally. 2. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters: Provide "feed thru" type ground fault circuit interrupters, with heavy-duty duplex receptacles, capable of protecting connected downstream receptacles on single circuit, and of being installed in a 2-3/4" deep outlet box without adapter, grounding type UL rated Class A, Group 1, rated 20-amperes, 120-volts, 60 Hz; with solid-state ground fault sensing and signaling; with 5 milliamperes ground fault trip level; equip with NEMA configuration 5-20R. GFCI receptacles shall be provided where installed to serve countertop and are located within 6 feet of a sink. C. Switches: 1. Snap: Provide heavy-duty flush single pole toggle AC quiet switches, 20-amperes, 120/277 volts, with mounting yoke insulated from mechanism, equip with plaster ears, switch handle, grounding, with green hexagonal equipment ground screw and side wired screw terminals. Furnish with pilot lights where called for on the plans. 2. Duplex Snap: Provide heavy-duty flush double pole AC quiet switches, 20-amperes, 120/277 volts, with mounting yoke insulated from mechanism, equip with plaster ears, switch handles, grounding, with green hexagonal equipment ground screw, side wired screw terminals, with break off tab features, which allows wiring with separate or common feed. 3. Three Way: Provide heavy-duty flush 3-way AC quiet switches, 20-amperes, 120-277 volts, with mounting yoke insulated from mechanism, equip with plaster ears, lock type switch handles, grounding, with green hexagonal equipment ground screw, side-wired screw terminals, with break off tab features, which allows wiring with separate or common feed. 2.02 WIRING DEVICE ACCESSORIES: A. Wall Plates: Provide wall plates for single and combination wiring devices, of types, sizes, and with ganging and cutouts as indicated. Select plates which mate and match wiring devices to which attached. Cover 16143-3 plates to be constructed of white phenolic plastic with metal screws for securing plates to devices; screw heads to match finish of plates. Quantity of 2% spare cover plates of each type shall be provided to the owner. Provide plates possessing the following additional construction features: B. Exterior switch and receptacle plates shall be weatherproof PVC with ganging as required. Plates shall be approved and marked as "rain tight while in use". C. Switch and receptacle cover plates on exposed work shall be galvanized cast ferrous metal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. Install wiring devices as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, and applicable requirements of NEC and NECA's "Standard of Installation". B. Install wiring devices only in electrical boxes which are clean; free from excess building materials, dirt, and debris. C. Install wiring devices after wiring work is completed. D. Install wall plates after painting work is completed. E. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening valves for wiring devices. Where manufacturer's torque requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Stds 486A and B. Use properly scaled torque indicating hand tool. F. Testing: Prior to energizing circuitry, test wiring for electrical continuity, and for short-circuits. Ensure proper polarity of connections is maintained. After energizing circuitry, test wiring devices to demonstrate compliance with requirements. END OF SECTION 16143 16170-1 DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 16170 - CIRCUIT, MOTOR DISCONNECTS AND ENCLOSED SWITCHES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Extent of circuit and motor disconnect switch work is indicated by drawings and schedules. B. Types of circuit, motor disconnect and enclosed switches in this section include the following: 1. Equipment disconnects. 2. Appliance disconnects. 3. Motor circuit disconnects. 4. Main service equipment disconnecting means. C. Wires/cables, raceways, and electrical boxes and fittings required in connection with circuit, motor disconnect and enclosed switches work are specified in other Division-16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods sections. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacturer of circuit, motor disconnect and enclosed switches of types and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 3 years. B. Installer: Specialist with at least 3 years of successful installation experience with projects utilizing circuit, motor disconnect and enclosed switches work similar to that required for this project. C. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC requirements pertaining to construction and installation of electrical circuit, motor disconnect and enclosed switches devices. D. UL Compliance: Comply with requirements of UL 98, "Enclosed and Dead Front Switches. Provide circuit, motor disconnect and enclosed switches which have been UL listed and labeled. E. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements 16170-2 of NEMA STDS Pub No. KS 1, "Enclosed Switches" and "Enclosures for Electrical Equipment - 600 Volts Maximum". F. Federal Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of Federal Specification #FS W-S-865. 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on circuit, motor disconnect and enclosed switches switch required. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FABRICATED SWITCHES: A. Heavy Duty Disconnect Switches: Provide surface mounted, heavy-duty type, sheet steel enclosed switches, of types, sizes, and electrical characteristics indicated on the drawings; fusible type; rated 240 volts, up to 100 amperes, 60 Hz, with 3-blades, 4-poles solid neutral(where neutral is required); and incorporating spring assisted, quick make, quick break switches which are so constructed that switch blades are visible in OFF position with door open. Equip with operating handle which is integral part of enclosure base and whose operating position is easily recognizable, and is capable of being padlocked in the ON or OFF position. Construct current carrying parts of high conductivity copper, with silver tungsten type switch contacts, and stamped enclosure knockouts. Provide NEMA Type 1 enclosure for indoor and NEMA 3R for outdoor applications. B. Fuses: Provide dual element time delay/current limiting fuses for safety switches, as recommended by switch manufacturer, of classes, types, and ratings needed to fulfill electrical requirements for service indicated. C. Non-fusible switches may be used only where specifically mentioned on the drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF CIRCUIT, MOTOR DISCONNECT AND ENCLOSED SWITCHES: A. Install circuit, motor disconnect and enclosed switches as indicated, complying with manufacturer's written 16170-3 instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NEMA, and NECA's "Standard of Installation", and in accordance with recognized industry practices. Switches shall be properly labeled. (see Section I Electrical Identification) B. Coordinate circuit, motor disconnect and enclosed switches switch installation work with electrical raceway and cable work, as necessary for proper interface. C. Install disconnect switches for use with motor driven appliances, and motors and controllers within sight of controller position unless otherwise indicated. 3.02 GROUNDING: A. Provide equipment grounding connections, sufficiently tight to assure a permanent and effective ground, for electrical disconnect switches where indicated. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: A. Subsequent to completion of installation of electrical disconnect switches, energize circuitry and demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at project site, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise remove and replace with new units and retest. END OF SECTION 16170 16180-1 DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 16180 - OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Extent of overcurrent protective device work is indicated by drawings and schedules. B. Types of overcurrent protective devices in this section include the following: 1. Circuit Breakers: a. Molded case. 2. Fuses: a. Class LPN-RK(250V) dual element time delay. C. Refer to other Div-16 sections for cable/wire and connector work required in conjunction with overcurrent protective devices; not work of this section. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of overcurrent protective devices, of types, sizes, and ratings required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. Installer: Specialist qualified with at least 5 years of successful installation experience on projects with electrical installation work similar to that required for project. C. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC requirements as applicable to construction and installation of overcurrent protective devices. D. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of UL 489, "Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Circuit Breaker Enclosures", and UL 198E, "High Interrupting Capacity Class RK1 Fuses". Provide overcurrent protective devices which are UL listed and labeled. E. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA Std Pub Nos. AB 1, AB 2 and SG 3 pertaining to molded case and low voltage power type circuit 16180-2 breakers. F. ANSI Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI C97.1 pertaining to low voltage cartridge fuses. G. FS Compliance: Comply with Federal Specification W-C-375B/GEN pertaining to molded case circuit breakers. 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on overcurrent protective devices, including: amperes, voltages and current ratings, interrupting ratings, current limitations, internal inductive and non inductive loads, time current trip characteristic curves, and mounting requirements. B. Maintenance Stock Fuses: For types and ratings required, furnish additional fuses, amounting to one unit for every 5 installed units, but not less than one unit of each. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CIRCUIT BREAKERS: A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide circuit breakers and ancillary components, of types, sizes, ratings and electrical characteristics indicated, which comply with manufacturer's standard design, materials, components, and construction in accordance with published product information, and as required for a complete installation. B. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: Provide factory assembled, molded case circuit breakers of frame size required and indicated; rated from 15 amperes to 200 amperes, 240V 60 Hz, with poles as indicated and 22,000 RMS symmetrical amperes interrupting ratings. Provide breakers with permanent thermal and instantaneous magnetic trips in each pole, ampere ratings as indicated. Construct with over center, trip free, toggle type operating mechanisms with quick make, quick break action and positive handle trip indication. Provide push to trip button on cover for mechanical tripping circuit breakers. Construct breakers for mounting and operating in any physical position and operating in an ambient temperature of 40C. Provide 16180-3 breakers with mechanical screw type removable connector lugs, AL/CU rated. 2.02 FUSES: A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide fuses of types, sizes, ratings, and average time/current and peak let-through current characteristics indicated, which comply with manufacturer's standard design, materials, and construction in accordance with published product information, and with industry standards and configurations. B. Class LPN-RK Dual Element Time Delay Fuses: Provide UL Class RK1 dual element time delay fuses rated 250 V, 60 Hz, 5-80 amperes, with 200,000 RMS symmetrical interrupting current rating for protecting transformers, motors, and circuit breakers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES: A. Install overcurrent protective devices as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices to ensure that protective devices comply with requirements. Comply with NEC and NEMA standards for installation of overcurrent protective devices. B. Coordinate with other work, including electrical wiring work, as necessary to interface installation of overcurrent protective devices with other work. C. Fasten circuit breakers without causing mechanical stresses, twisting or misalignment being exerted by clamps, supports, or cabling. 3.02 ADJUST AND CLEAN: A. Inspect circuit breaker operating mechanisms for malfunctioning and, where necessary, adjust units for free mechanical movement. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: A. Prior to energization of overcurrent protective devices, test devices for continuity of circuitry and for short circuits. Correct malfunctioning units, and then demonstrate compliance with requirements. 16180-4 END OF SECTION 16180 16450-1 DIVISION 16 -ELECTRICAL SECTION 16450 - GROUNDING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Extent of grounding work is indicated by drawings and schedules. B. Types of grounding specified in this section include the following: 1. Solid grounding. C. Applications of grounding work in this section include the following: 1. Metal piping. 2. Metal water piping. 3. Service equipment. 4. Enclosures. 5. Equipment. D. Requirements of this section apply to electrical grounding work specified elsewhere in these specifications. Coordinate requirements with the lightening protection of these specifications. All grounding systems shall be bonded together. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of electrical connectors, terminals and fittings, of types and ratings required, and ancillary grounding materials, including stranded cable, copper braid and bus, ground rods and plate electrodes, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 3 years. B. Contractor: Qualified with at least 3 years of successful installation experience on projects with electrical grounding work similar to that required for project. C. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC requirements as applicable to materials and installation of electrical grounding systems, associated equipment and wiring. Provide grounding products which are UL-listed and 16450-2 labeled. D. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of UL Standards Nos. 467 and 869 pertaining to electrical grounding and bonding. E. IEEE Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of IEEE Standard 142 and 241 pertaining to electrical grounding. 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on grounding systems and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: Submit layout drawings of grounding systems and accessories including, but not limited to, ground wiring, copper braid and bus, ground rods, and plate electrodes. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. Handle electrical grounding accessories and components carefully to avoid damage; store in original wrappings and protect from dirt and weather. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GROUNDING SYSTEMS: A. Materials and Components: 1. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide electrical grounding systems indicated; with assembly of materials, including, but not limited to, cables/wires, connectors, terminals (solderless lugs), bonding jumper braid, and additional accessories needed for complete installation. Where more than one type unit meets indicated requirements, selection is Installer's option. Where materials or components are not indicated, provide products complying with NEC, UL, IEEE, and established industry standards for applications indicated. 2. Conductors: Unless otherwise indicated, provide grounding conductors for grounding connections matching power supply wiring materials and sized according to NEC, these specification and the drawings. 16450-3 3. Flexible Jumper Strap: Flexible flat conductor, 480 strands of 30-gage bare copper wire; 3/4" wide, 9-1/2" long; 48,250 cm. Protect braid with copper bolt hole ends with holes sized for 3/8" dia. bolts. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION: A. Installer must examine areas and conditions under which electrical grounding connections are to be made and notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL GROUNDING: A. General: Install electrical grounding systems where shown, in accordance with applicable portions of NEC, with NECA's "Standard of Installation", and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products comply with requirements and serve intended functions. B. Coordinate with other electrical work as necessary to interface installation of electrical grounding system with other work. C. Install clamp-on connectors only on thoroughly cleaned metal contact surfaces, to ensure electrical conductivity and circuit integrity. D. Install equipment grounding conductor sized in accordance with the NEC in all feeders and branch circuits. Grounding conductors, where insulated, shall be colored solid green. Conductors intended as neutral shall be colored solid white on 120/208 volt circuits. The raceway system is not be used for grounding continuity. A green grounding conductor, properly sized per NEC Table 250-122, shall be run in ALL raceways. E. Electrical service shall be grounded to metallic cold water pipe, as per NEC Article 250. F. Ground to rod(s). Ground rods shall be 10 feet long and 3/4 inch in diameter, and shall be of copper-clad steel construction. All ground connections shall be 16450-4 accessible. G. Boxes with concentric, eccentric or over-sized knockouts shall be provided with bonding bushings and jumpers. The jumper shall be sized per NEC Table 250-122 and lugged to the box. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: A. Upon completion of installation of electrical grounding systems, test ground resistance with ground resistance tester. Where tests show resistance to ground is over 3 ohms, take appropriate action to reduce resistance to 3 ohms, or less, by driving additional ground rods and/or by chemically treating soil encircling ground rod; then retest to demonstrate compliance. END OF SECTION 16450 16470-1 DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 16470 - PANELBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of Std No.'s 50, 67, 869, 486A, 486B, and 1053. Provide units which are UL-listed and labeled. B. Special-Use Markings: Provide panelboards, constructed for special- use, with appropriate UL marks which indicates that special type of use/application. C. NEC and NEMA Compliances: Comply with NEC and NEMA Stds Pub/No.'s 250, PB 1, PB 1.1, and PB 1.2. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PANELBOARDS: A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide panelboards/switchboards, enclosures and ancillary components, of types, sizes, and ratings indicated, which comply with manufacturer's standard materials; design and construction in accordance with published product information; equip with proper number of unit panelboard devices as required for complete installation. Where types, sizes, or ratings are not indicated, comply with NEC, UL and established industry standards for those applications indicated. B. Panelboards: Provide dead front safety type distribution and lighting and branch circuit panelboards as indicated, with switching and protective devices in quantities, ratings, types and arrangements shown; with anti-burn solderless pressure type lug connectors approved for aluminum or copper conductors; construct unit for connecting feeders at top or bottom of panel as required by job conditions; equip with aluminum bus bars, full-sized neutral bar, with bolt in type heavy-duty, quick make, quick break, single pole circuit breakers, with toggle handles that indicate when tripped. Provide suitable lugs on neutral bus for each outgoing feeder required; provide bare uninsulated grounding bars suitable for bolting to enclosures. Select enclosures fabricated by same manufacturer as panelboards, which mate properly with panelboards. 16470-2 Panels shall be service entrance rated when used as building service equipment. C. Panelboard Enclosures: Provide galvanized sheet steel cabinet type enclosures, in sizes and NEMA types as indicated, code gage, minimum 16 gage thickness. Construct with multiple knockouts and wiring gutters. Provide fronts with adjustable trim clamps, and doors with flush locks and keys, all panelboard enclosures keyed alike, with concealed piano door hinges and door swings as indicated. Equip with interior circuit directory frame, and card with clear plastic covering. Provide baked gray enamel finish over a rust inhibitor coating. Design enclosures for recessed mounting. Provide enclosures which are fabricated by same manufacturer as panelboards, which mate properly with panelboards to be enclosed. D. Panelboard Accessories: Provide panelboard accessories and devices including, but not necessarily limited to, circuit breakers, ground fault protection units, etc., as recommended by panelboard manufacturer for ratings and applications indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. Install panelboards and enclosures as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements of NEC and NECA's "Standard of Installation". B. Coordinate installation of panelboards/meter centers and enclosures with cable and raceway installation work. C. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values for equipment connectors. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Stds 486A and B. D. Anchor enclosures firmly to walls and structural surfaces, ensuring that they are permanently and mechanically secure. 16470-3 E. Provide properly wired electrical connections within enclosures. F. Fill out panelboard's circuit directory card upon completion of installation work. G. An engraved nameplate shall be provided for each meter center. H. Tighten equipment grounding connections for panelboards as indicated and comply with tightening torques specified in UL Stds 486A and B to assure permanent and effective grounds. 1. Prior to energization of panelboards/meter centers, check phase to phase and phase to ground insulation resistance levels to ensure requirements are fulfilled. 2. Prior to energization, check panelboards/meter centers for electrical continuity of circuits, and for short-circuits. I. Test panelboards to demonstrate functioning in accordance with requirements. Field correct malfunctioning units, and replace where not field correctable, then retest. END OF SECTION 16470